Analog Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

USER'S MANUAL

Voltage / Current Input FX3G-2AD-BD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3UC-4AD Voltage / Current Output FX3G-1DA-BD FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA-ADP Voltage / Current Input / Output Mixture FX3U-3A-ADP Temperature Sensor Input FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP

Safety Precautions (Read these precautions before use.)

Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and safely. This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories: and .

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury. It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety. Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents. 1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits). 2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 3) Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case. 4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.

Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. Noise may cause malfunctions. Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to an analog input expansion board, special analog input adapter, or special function block at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. Noise may cause malfunctions. Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to an analog output expansion board, special analog output adapter, or special function block at one point on the analog device side. However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. Noise may cause malfunctions. Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the power connectors or terminal blocks. Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.

(1) Safety Precautions (Read these precautions before use.)

2. WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.

Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out. Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product. Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit. Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise: - Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input/output cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line, or load line. Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit, high-voltage line, or load line. - Ground the shield of the analog input/output cable at one point on the signal receiving side. However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. - Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires. - Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends. - Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size. - Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.

(2) Safety Precautions (Read these precautions before use.)

3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions. Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally. Failure to do so may cause electric shock. Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation. An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents. Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time. (i.e. from a programming tool and a GOT) Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program.

Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions. For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices, expansion boards, special adapters, and extension blocks. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

(3) Safety Precautions (Read these precautions before use.)

MEMO

(4) FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers

User's Manual [Analog Control Edition]

Manual number JY997D16701 Manual revision J Date 2/2012

Foreword

This manual describes the "analog" function of the MELSEC-F FX Series programmable controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition

Outline Precautions

This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers. The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or persons is as follows; 1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment. 2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices. 3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment. Note: The term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life. Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric. This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system. When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system, machine, and apparatus with which a user is using. If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or use, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference, please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples. This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement. The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

Registration The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company.

2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...... (1) A Common Items

1. Introduction A-1

1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control...... A-1 1.1.1 Analog input control...... A-2 1.1.2 Analog output control...... A-3 1.1.3 Temperature sensor input control...... A-4

2. Description of Analog Products A-5

2.1 Types of Analog Products...... A-5 2.1.1 Expansion board...... A-5 2.1.2 Special adapter...... A-6 2.1.3 Special function block...... A-8 2.2 List of Analog Product Models ...... A-10 2.2.1 Expansion board...... A-10 2.2.2 Special adapter...... A-10 2.2.3 Special function block...... A-11

3. System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A-14

3.1 FX3U Series PLC ...... A-14 3.1.1 Connection of special adapters ...... A-14 3.1.2 Connection of special function blocks ...... A-15 3.2 FX3UC Series PLC...... A-16 3.2.1 Connection of special adapters ...... A-16 3.2.2 Connection of special function blocks ...... A-18 3.3 FX3G Series PLC ...... A-20 3.3.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters...... A-20 3.3.2 Connection of special function blocks ...... A-22 3.4 FX3GC Series PLC...... A-23 3.4.1 Connection of special adapters ...... A-23 3.4.2 Connection of special function blocks ...... A-24

4. Comparison of Performance Specifications A-25

4.1 Analog Input...... A-25 4.1.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP ...... A-25 4.1.2 FX2N-2AD...... A-26 4.1.3 FX3U-4AD...... A-27 4.1.4 FX2N-4AD...... A-28 4.1.5 FX3UC-4AD ...... A-29 4.1.6 FX2NC-4AD ...... A-30 4.1.7 FX2N-8AD...... A-31 4.1.8 FX3G-2AD-BD ...... A-32 4.2 Analog Output ...... A-33 4.2.1 FX3U-4DA-ADP ...... A-33 4.2.2 FX2N-2DA...... A-34 4.2.3 FX3U-4DA...... A-35 4.2.4 FX2N-4DA ...... A-36 4.2.5 FX2NC-4DA ...... A-37 4.2.6 FX3G-1DA-BD ...... A-38

3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output...... A-39 4.3.1 FX3U-3A-ADP...... A-39 4.3.2 FX2N-5A ...... A-40 4.3.3 FX0N-3A ...... A-42 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input ...... A-43 4.4.1 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP ...... A-43 4.4.2 FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP...... A-44 4.4.3 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP ...... A-45 4.4.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP ...... A-46 4.4.5 FX2N-4AD-PT...... A-47 4.4.6 FX2N-4AD-TC...... A-48 4.4.7 FX2N-8AD...... A-49 4.4.8 FX2N-2LC ...... A-50 4.4.9 FX3U-4LC ...... A-51

5. Version Number A-52

5.1 PLC Main Unit...... A-52 5.1.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method...... A-52 5.1.2 Version check...... A-53 5.2 Special adapter ...... A-54 5.2.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method...... A-54

6. Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) A-55

6.1 How to Use the Manuals...... A-55 6.2 Description of Related Manuals ...... A-56 6.2.1 Analog control manuals...... A-56 6.2.2 Manuals related to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC main unit ...... A-56 6.2.3 Manuals of analog units...... A-58

7. Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual A-60

4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

B. FX3U-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)

1. Outline B-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... B-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... B-4 1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers ...... B-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... B-5

2. Specifications B-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... B-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... B-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... B-8 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 ...... B-9

3. Wiring B-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... B-12 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque...... B-13 3.2.1 Power cable (FX3UC-4AD) ...... B-13 3.2.2 Cable (FX3U-4AD)...... B-13 3.2.3 Cable (FX3UC-4AD)...... B-14 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit...... B-15 3.3.1 FX3U-4AD...... B-15 3.3.2 FX3UC-4AD ...... B-16 3.3.3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables...... B-16 3.4 Analog Input Line ...... B-17 3.4.1 FX3U-4AD...... B-17 3.4.2 FX3UC-4AD ...... B-18 3.5 Grounding ...... B-18

4. Analog Input B-19

4.1 Analog Input Procedures...... B-19

5. Buffer Memory (BFM) B-21

5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory ...... B-21 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method...... B-23 5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U, FX3UC PLC only)...... B-23 5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC PLC) ...... B-23 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)...... B-24 5.4 Buffer Memory Details...... B-28 5.4.1 BFM #0: Input mode specification ...... B-28 5.4.2 BFM #2 to #5: Averaging time...... B-29 5.4.3 BFM #6 to #9: Digital filter setting...... B-30 5.4.4 BFM #10 to #13: Channel data...... B-31 5.4.5 BFM #19: Data change disable ...... B-32 5.4.6 BFM #20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status) ...... B-32 5.4.7 BFM #21: Input characteristics writing...... B-32 5.4.8 BFM #22: Convenient function setting...... B-33 5.4.9 BFM #26: Upper/lower limit error status...... B-35 5.4.10 BFM #27: Abrupt change detection status ...... B-36

5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

5.4.11 BFM #28: Over-scale status...... B-37 5.4.12 BFM #29: Error status ...... B-38 5.4.13 BFM #30: Model code ...... B-39 5.4.14 BFM #41 to #44: Offset data / BFM #51 to #54: Gain data ...... B-39 5.4.15 BFM #61 to #64: Addition data...... B-40 5.4.16 BFM #71 to #74: Lower limit error setting / BFM #81 to #84: Upper limit error setting...... B-41 5.4.17 BFM #91 to #94: Abrupt change detection value setting...... B-42 5.4.18 BFM #99: Clearance of upper/lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data ...... B-43 5.4.19 BFM #101 to #104: Minimum peak value / BFM #111 to #114: Maximum peak value ...... B-43 5.4.20 BFM #109: Minimum peak value resetting / BFM #119: Maximum peak value resetting...... B-44 5.4.21 BFM #125: Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification...... B-44 5.4.22 BFM #126: Upper/lower error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification.....B-45 5.4.23 BFM #127: Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register specification ...... B-46 5.4.24 BFM #128: Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification ...... B-47 5.4.25 BFM #129: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification...... B-47 5.4.26 BFM #197: Selection of cyclic data update function (function for data history)...... B-48 5.4.27 BFM #198: Data history sampling time setting ...... B-48 5.4.28 BFM #199: Data history resetting/stoppage ...... B-49 5.4.29 BFM #200 to #6999: Data history...... B-50

6. Changing Input Characteristics B-51

6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics ...... B-51

7. Examples of Practical Programs B-54

7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time...... B-54 7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions ...... B-56 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function ...... B-59 7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default)...... B-62

8. Troubleshooting B-63

8.1 PLC Version Number Check...... B-63 8.2 Wiring Check...... B-63 8.3 Program Check ...... B-63 8.4 Error Status Check...... B-64 8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program...... B-65

6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

C. FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input)

1. Outline C-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... C-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... C-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number ...... C-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... C-5

2. Specifications C-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... C-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... C-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... C-8 2.4 A/D Conversion Time...... C-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... C-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... C-10

3. Wiring C-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... C-12 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... C-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... C-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... C-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... C-14 3.4 Analog Input Line ...... C-15 3.5 Grounding ...... C-15

4. Programming C-16

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... C-16 4.2 List of Special Devices...... C-18 4.3 Switching of Input Mode...... C-19 4.4 Input Data...... C-20 4.5 Averaging Time...... C-21 4.6 Error Status...... C-22 4.7 Model Code...... C-24 4.8 Basic Program Example...... C-25

5. Changing of Input Characteristics C-27

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics...... C-27

6. Troubleshooting C-30

6.1 PLC Version Number Check...... C-30 6.2 Wiring Check...... C-30 6.3 Special Device Check ...... C-31 6.4 Program Check ...... C-31 6.5 Error Status Check...... C-32

7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

D. FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input)

1. Outline D-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... D-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... D-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number ...... D-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... D-5

2. Specifications D-6

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... D-6 2.2 Performance Specifications ...... D-7 2.3 A/D Conversion Time...... D-8

3. Wiring D-9

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... D-10 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... D-11 3.3 Analog Input Line ...... D-12 3.4 Grounding ...... D-12

4. Programming D-13

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... D-13 4.2 List of Special Devices...... D-14 4.3 Switching of Input Mode...... D-14 4.4 Input Data...... D-15 4.5 Averaging Time...... D-16 4.6 Error Status...... D-17 4.7 Model Code...... D-19 4.8 Basic Program Example...... D-19

5. Changing of Input Characteristics D-20

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics...... D-20

6. Troubleshooting D-21

6.1 PLC Version Number Check...... D-21 6.2 Checking Installation...... D-21 6.3 Wiring Check...... D-21 6.4 Special Device Check ...... D-21 6.5 Program Check ...... D-22 6.6 Error Status Check...... D-22

8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

E. FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)

1. Outline E-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... E-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... E-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers ...... E-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... E-5

2. Specifications E-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... E-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... E-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... E-8 2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0...... E-9

3. Wiring E-10

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... E-11 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque...... E-11 3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals...... E-12 3.3.1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit ...... E-12 3.3.2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals...... E-12 3.4 Analog Output Wiring...... E-13 3.5 Grounding ...... E-13

4. Analog Output E-14

4.1 Analog Output Procedures...... E-14

5. Buffer Memory (BFM) E-16

5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory ...... E-16 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method...... E-17 5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U, FX3UC PLC only)...... E-18 5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC PLC) ...... E-18 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)...... E-19 5.4 Buffer Memory Details...... E-22 5.4.1 BFM #0: Output mode specification ...... E-22 5.4.2 BFM #1 to #4: Output data ...... E-23 5.4.3 BFM #5: Output setting upon PLC stop...... E-23 5.4.4 BFM #6: Output status...... E-24 5.4.5 BFM #9: Offset/gain setting value write command...... E-25 5.4.6 BFM #10 to #13: Offset data/BFM #14 to #17: Gain data ...... E-26 5.4.7 BFM #19: Data change prohibition of setting change...... E-27 5.4.8 BFM #20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status) ...... E-28 5.4.9 BFM #28: Disconnection detection status (only in current output mode) ...... E-28 5.4.10 BFM #29: Error status ...... E-29 5.4.11 BFM #30: Model code ...... E-30 5.4.12 BFM #32 to #35: Data to be output upon PLC stop...... E-30 5.4.13 BFM #38: Upper/lower limit function setting...... E-31 5.4.14 BFM #39: Upper/lower limit function status ...... E-32 5.4.15 BFM #40: Clearance of upper/lower limit function status ...... E-32 5.4.16 BFM #41 to #44: Lower limit values of upper/lower limit function BFM #45 to #48: Upper limit values of upper/lower limit function...... E-33

9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

5.4.17 BFM #50: Setting of output corrective function by load resistance (only in voltage output mode)/BFM #51 to #54: Load resistance values ...... E-34 5.4.18 BFM #60: Status automatic transfer function setting...... E-35 5.4.19 BFM #61: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification...... E-36 5.4.20 BFM #62: Upper/lower limit function status data automatic transfer-to data register specification ...... E-37 5.4.21 BFM #63: Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection ...... E-38 5.4.22 BFM #80 to #3098: Table output function ...... E-38

6. Table Output Function E-39

6.1 Outline of Table Output Function ...... E-39 6.2 Preparation of data table...... E-40 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory ...... E-45 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function...... E-49 6.5 Details of table output error...... E-51 6.6 Examples uses of table output function ...... E-53

7. Changing Output Characteristics E-54

7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics ...... E-54

8. Examples of Practical Programs E-57

8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation)...... E-57 8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions...... E-58 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation)...... E-61 8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)...... E-64

9. Troubleshooting E-65

9.1 PLC Version Number Check...... E-65 9.2 Wiring Check...... E-65 9.3 Program Check ...... E-65 9.4 Error Status Check...... E-66 9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program...... E-67

10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

F. FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output)

1. Outline F-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... F-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... F-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers ...... F-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... F-5

2. Specifications F-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... F-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... F-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... F-8 2.4 D/A Conversion Time...... F-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... F-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... F-10

3. Wiring F-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... F-12 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... F-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... F-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... F-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... F-14 3.4 Analog Output Line ...... F-15 3.5 Grounding ...... F-15

4. Programming F-16

4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data ...... F-16 4.2 List of Special Devices...... F-18 4.3 Switching of Output Mode...... F-19 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ...... F-20 4.5 Output Setting Data...... F-21 4.6 Error Status...... F-22 4.7 Model Code...... F-24 4.8 Basic Program Example...... F-24

5. Changing of Output Characteristics F-25

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics...... F-25

6. Troubleshooting F-27

6.1 PLC Version Number Check...... F-27 6.2 Wiring Check...... F-27 6.3 Special Device Check ...... F-27 6.4 Program Check ...... F-28 6.5 Error Status Check...... F-28

11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

G. FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output)

1. Outline G-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... G-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... G-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers ...... G-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... G-5

2. Specifications G-6

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... G-6 2.2 Performance Specifications ...... G-7 2.3 D/A Conversion Time...... G-8

3. Wiring G-9

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... G-10 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... G-11 3.3 Analog Output Line ...... G-12 3.4 Grounding ...... G-12

4. Programming G-13

4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data ...... G-13 4.2 List of Special Devices...... G-14 4.3 Switching of Output Mode...... G-14 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ...... G-15 4.5 Output Setting Data...... G-15 4.6 Error Status...... G-16 4.7 Model Code...... G-16 4.8 Basic Program Example...... G-17

5. Changing of Output Characteristics G-18

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics...... G-18

6. Troubleshooting G-19

6.1 PLC Version Number Check...... G-19 6.2 Checking installation ...... G-19 6.3 Wiring Check...... G-19 6.4 Special Device Check ...... G-19 6.5 Program Check ...... G-20 6.6 Error Status Check...... G-20

12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

H. FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output)

1. Outline H-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... H-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... H-4 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number ...... H-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... H-5

2. Specifications H-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... H-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... H-7 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... H-8 2.4 Conversion Time...... H-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... H-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... H-10

3. Wiring H-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... H-12 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... H-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... H-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... H-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... H-14 3.4 Analog Input / output Line ...... H-15 3.4.1 Analog Input Line...... H-15 3.4.2 Analog Output Line...... H-15 3.5 Grounding ...... H-16

4. Programming H-17

4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data ...... H-17 4.2 List of Special Devices...... H-18 4.3 Switching of Input Mode...... H-19 4.4 Switching of Output Mode...... H-20 4.5 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ...... H-20 4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used...... H-21 4.7 Input Data...... H-22 4.8 Output Setting Data...... H-23 4.9 Averaging Time...... H-24 4.10 Error Status...... H-25 4.11 Model Code...... H-27 4.12 Basic Program Example...... H-28

5. Changing of Input/output Characteristics H-30

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics...... H-30 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics...... H-33

13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

6. Troubleshooting H-35

6.1 PLC Version Number Check...... H-35 6.2 Wiring Check...... H-35 6.3 Special Device Check ...... H-35 6.4 Program Check ...... H-36 6.5 Error Status Check...... H-36

14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

I. FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

1. Outline I-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... I-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... I-4 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ...... I-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... I-5

2. Specifications I-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... I-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... I-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... I-8 2.4 A/D Conversion Time...... I-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... I-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... I-10 2.5 Temperature Measurement...... I-10

3. Wiring I-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... I-12 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque...... I-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... I-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... I-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... I-14 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor...... I-15 3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor ...... I-15 3.6 Grounding ...... I-15

4. Programming I-16

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... I-16 4.2 List of Special Devices...... I-18 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ...... I-19 4.4 Temperature Measurement...... I-20 4.5 Averaging Time...... I-21 4.6 Error Status...... I-22 4.7 Model Code...... I-25 4.8 Basic Program Example...... I-26

5. Troubleshooting I-27

5.1 PLC Version Number Check...... I-27 5.2 Wiring Check...... I-27 5.3 Special Device Check ...... I-27 5.4 Program Check ...... I-28 5.5 Error Status Check...... I-28

15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

J. FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

1. Outline J-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... J-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... J-4 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ...... J-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... J-5

2. Specifications J-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... J-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... J-8 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... J-8 2.4 A/D Conversion Time...... J-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... J-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... J-10 2.5 Temperature Measurement...... J-10

3. Wiring J-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... J-12 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque...... J-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... J-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... J-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... J-14 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor...... J-15 3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor ...... J-15 3.6 Grounding ...... J-15

4. Programming J-16

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... J-16 4.2 List of Special Devices...... J-18 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ...... J-19 4.4 Temperature Measurement...... J-20 4.5 Averaging Time...... J-21 4.6 Error Status...... J-22 4.7 Model Code...... J-25 4.8 Basic Program Example...... J-26

5. Troubleshooting J-27

5.1 PLC Version Number Check...... J-27 5.2 Wiring Check...... J-27 5.3 Special Device Check ...... J-27 5.4 Program Check ...... J-28 5.5 Error Status Check...... J-28

16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

K. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

1. Outline K-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... K-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... K-4 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ...... K-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... K-5

2. Specifications K-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... K-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... K-7 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... K-8 2.4 A/D Conversion Time...... K-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... K-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... K-10 2.5 Temperature Measurement...... K-10

3. Wiring K-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... K-12 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... K-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... K-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... K-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... K-14 3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor...... K-15 3.5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor ...... K-15 3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring...... K-16 3.7 Grounding ...... K-16

4. Programming K-17

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... K-17 4.2 List of Special Devices...... K-19 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ...... K-20 4.4 Input sensor selection ...... K-21 4.5 Temperature Measurement...... K-22 4.6 Averaging Time...... K-23 4.7 Error Status...... K-24 4.8 Model Code...... K-27 4.9 Basic Program Example...... K-28

5. Troubleshooting K-30

5.1 PLC Version Number Check...... K-30 5.2 Wiring Check...... K-30 5.3 Special Device Check ...... K-30 5.4 Program Check ...... K-31 5.5 Error Status Check...... K-31

17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

L. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input)

1. Outline L-3

1.1 Outline of Functions ...... L-3 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ...... L-4 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number ...... L-5 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ...... L-5

2. Specifications L-7

2.1 Generic Specifications ...... L-7 2.2 Power Supply Specifications...... L-7 2.3 Performance Specifications ...... L-8 2.4 A/D Conversion Time...... L-9 2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC...... L-9 2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC ...... L-10 2.5 Temperature Measurement...... L-10

3. Wiring L-11

3.1 Terminal Layout ...... L-12 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ...... L-13 3.3 Power Supply Line ...... L-14 3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC...... L-14 3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC ...... L-14 3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple ...... L-15 3.4.1 Thermocouple type...... L-15 3.4.2 Compensating lead wire...... L-15 3.5 Wiring of Thermocouple...... L-15 3.5.1 Wiring of thermocouple type K ...... L-15 3.5.2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J...... L-16 3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring...... L-16 3.7 Grounding ...... L-16

4. Programming L-17

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data...... L-17 4.2 List of Special Devices...... L-19 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit ...... L-20 4.4 Selection of Type K or J...... L-21 4.5 Temperature Measurement...... L-22 4.6 Averaging Time...... L-23 4.7 Error Status...... L-24 4.8 Model Code...... L-27 4.9 Basic Program Example...... L-28

5. Troubleshooting L-30

5.1 PLC Version Number Check...... L-30 5.2 Wiring Check...... L-30 5.3 Special Device Check ...... L-30 5.4 Program Check ...... L-31 5.5 Error Status Check...... L-31

18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

M. PID Instruction (FNC 88)

1. Outline M-3

1.1 Outline of function ...... M-3 1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)...... M-4

2. How to Use PID Instruction M-5

2.1 Explanation of function and operation...... M-5 2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning...... M-6

3. Parameter M-7

3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28 ...... M-7 3.2 Details of Parameters...... M-9 3.2.1 Sampling time (TS): (S3) ...... M-9 3.2.2 Operation setting (ACT):(S3)+1...... M-10 3.2.3 Input filter (α): (S3)+2 ...... M-12 3.2.4 Proportional gain (KP): (S3)+3...... M-13 3.2.5 Integral time (TI): (S3)+4 ...... M-13 3.2.6 Differential gain (KD): (S3)+5...... M-15 3.2.7 Differential time (TD): (S3)+6...... M-15 3.2.8 Alarm output flag: (S3)+24 ...... M-17

4. Auto-Tuning M-18

4.1 Limit Cycle Method...... M-18 4.1.1 Parameters set in auto-tuning (of limit cycle method) ...... M-18 4.1.2 Auto-tuning procedure...... M-19 4.1.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (limit cycle method)...... M-20 4.2 Step Response Method...... M-21 4.2.1 Parameters to be set by auto-tuning (step response method) ...... M-21 4.2.2 Auto-tuning procedure...... M-21 4.2.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (step response method)...... M-22 4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution...... M-22

5. Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) M-23

5.1 Example: System and operation ...... M-23 5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control...... M-24 5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)...... M-26

6. Troubleshooting M-28

6.1 Error Codes...... M-28

Warranty...... i Revised History ...... ii

19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Table of Contents

MEMO

20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control A Common Items 1. Introduction

This manual describes the analog products for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. B FX This chapter describes the analog control methods and applications. FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control -4AD

For the FX Series, there are 3 types of analog control: Voltage/Current input, Voltage/Current output, and Temperature Sensor input. C It is important to select products that are optimum for the purpose of use. FX 3U -4AD-ADP

FX3U Series PLC FX3UC Series PLC FX3G Series PLC FX3GC Series PLC

D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U

Voltage/current input Voltage/current Temperature sensor -4DA control type output control type input control type •FX3U-4AD •FX3U-4DA •FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP •FX3UC-4AD •FX3U-4DA-ADP •FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP •FX3U-4AD-ADP •FX3U-3A-ADP •FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP •FX3U-3A-ADP •FX3G-1DA-BD •FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP • 3G F FX -2AD-BD FX

→ Refer to Subsection → Refer to Subsection → Refer to Subsection 3U

1.1.1. 1.1.2. 1.1.3. -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G

Flowmeter, Inverter, etc. Thermocouple, -1DA-BD pressure sensor, etc. platinum resistance thermometer sensor H FX 3U -3A-ADP

In addition to the above applications, the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC can be used for various purposes. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control

1.1.1 Analog input control

Input the voltage/current signal from a flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. to the PLC to monitor the condition of the workpiece or equipment.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC A/D conversion Voltage or Analog input current data special function block, special adapter, expansion board

Check the flux rate using the PLC. Output the current or voltage data from the flux rate or the pressure.

→ To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC, refer to Chapter 3 "System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products."

FX3UC Series Analog input products FX3UC-4AD → For detailed description, refer to Section B.

FX3U Series Analog input products FX3U-4AD → For detailed description, refer to Section B. FX3U-4AD-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section C. FX3U-3A-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section H.

FX3G Series Analog input products FX3G-2AD-BD → For detailed description, refer to Section D.

Other Series Analog input products FX2NC-4AD • FX2N-4AD • FX2N-5A FX2N-8AD • FX2N-2AD • FX0N-3A → For a detailed description of the other analog input products, refer to the corresponding manuals.

A-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control A

1.1.2 Analog output control Common Items

Output the voltage/current signal from the PLC to an inverter, etc. to control the inverter frequency, etc.

Inverter, etc. FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC

D/A conversion Analog output Voltage or B FX data special function current FX block, special 3UC 3U -4AD

adapter, -4AD expansion board

Output the frequency data The frequency will be C

from the PLC. changed depending on FX

the input voltage/current. 3U -4AD-ADP → To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC, refer to Chapter 3 "System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products." Analog output products for FX3U Series D

FX3U-4DA FX

→ For detailed description, refer to Section E. 3G -2AD-BD FX3U-4DA-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section F. FX3U-3A-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section H. E FX

Analog output products for FX3G Series 3U -4DA FX3G-1DA-BD → For detailed description, refer to Section G. Other Series Analog output products F

FX2NC-4DA • FX2N-2DA • FX0N-3A FX 3U

FX2N-4DA • FX2N-5A -4DA-ADP → For a detailed description of the other analog output products, refer to the corresponding manuals. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1.1 Outline and Features of Analog Control

1.1.3 Temperature sensor input control

Use the PLC to check the workpiece/machine temperature measured with a thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer sensor.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC

Temperature data Temperature data (Analog data) Temperature (Digital value) sensor input, special function block or special adapter

Measure the temperature of the Check the temperature equipment. using the PLC.

→ To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC, refer to Chapter 3 "System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products."

FX3U Series Temperature sensor input products FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section I. FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section J. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section K. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP → For detailed description, refer to Section L. FX3U-4LC → For detailed description, refer to the FX3U-4LC User’s Manual.

Other Series Temperature sensor input products FX2N-8AD • FX2N-2LC FX2N-4AD-TC • FX2N-4AD-PT → For a detailed description of the other temperature sensor input products, refer to the corresponding manuals.

A-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products A Common Items 2. Description of Analog Products

B FX 2.1 Types of Analog Products FX 3UC 3U -4AD Analog input/output products are required to perform analog control using the FX Series PLC. -4AD There are 3 types of input/output products: the expansion board, special adapter and the special function block. Subsequent subsections explain differences among analog products. C FX

2.1.1 Expansion board 3U -4AD-ADP The analog expansion board uses PLC devices to send/receive data to/from the PLC.

1. FX3G Series PLC Connect analog expansion boards to option connectors of an FX3G PLC. D FX

Up to 2*1 analog expansion boards can be connected. 3G -2AD-BD

PLC

Analog expansion board E FX 3U -4DA

→ For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware FX

Edition. 3U -4DA-ADP *1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). When two analog expansion boards are connected to the FX3G Series PLC(40-point or 60-point type), analog special adapters are not available in the main unit. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products

2.1.2 Special adapter

The analog special adapter uses PLC devices to send/receive data to/from the PLC.

1. FX3U Series PLC Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3U Series PLC. An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s). Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. When using the high-speed input/output special adapter(s), be sure to connect the high-speed input/output special adapter(s) first, and then connect the analog special adapter(s). High-speed Analog special adapters input/output Expansion board PLC special adapters

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP

POWER POWER POWER POW ER

RDA RD RDB

SDA

SD SDB

FX3U-***-BD

"***" represents "422", "232", Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected. "485", "8AV", "CNV", or "USB." → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

2. FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC. Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. Analog special adapters PLC

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U-4AD-ADP

POWER POWER POWER POW ER

Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected. → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

A-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products A

3. FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC Common Items Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC. An expansion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s). Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. Analog special adapters Expansion board PLC B FX3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U-4AD-ADP FX 3U-4AD-ADP FX FX POWER POWER POWER POW ER 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

RD A RD RD B

SD A

SD SD B

FX3U-***-BD C FX 3U -4AD-ADP Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected. "***" represents "422", "232", "485", "8AV", "CNV", or "USB." → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. D

4. FX3G Series PLC FX Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3G Series PLC. 3G -2AD-BD A connector conversion board is needed to connect the special adapter(s). Up to 2*1 analog special adapters can be connected. Analog Connector conversion adapter PLC special adapters E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U FX3G-CNV-ADP -4DA-ADP

Up to 2 Analog adapters can be connected. → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. *1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). G When two analog expansion boards are connected to FX3G Series PLC(40-point or 60-point type), FX 3G

analog special adapters are not available in the main unit. -1DA-BD

5. FX3GC Series PLC Connect the special adapter(s) to the left side of the FX3GC Series PLC. H Up to 2 analog special adapters can be connected. FX 3U

Analog -3A-ADP PLC special adapters

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

Up to 2 Analog adapters can be connected. J -ADP FX

→ For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. 3U -4AD-PTW

A-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products

2.1.3 Special function block

The special function block uses buffer memory (BFM) to send/receive data to/from the PLC.

1. FX3U Series PLC Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3U Series PLC. Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected. PLC Analog special function block for FX3U, FX2N and FX0N

Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters). → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

2. FX3UC Series PLC Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3UC Series PLC. In some cases, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V may be needed for connection. Up to 8*1 special function blocks can be connected. PLC Analog special function block FX3UC-1PS-5V Analog special function block for FX3UC and FX 2NC or for FX3U, FX2N and FX0N FX2NC-CNV-IF

Up to 8*1 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters).

*1. Up to 7 special function units/blocks can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

Select either FX3UC-1PS-5V or FX2NC-CNV-IF considering the current components consumption. → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

3. FX3G Series PLC Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3G Series PLC. Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected.

PLC Analog special function block for FX3U and FX2N

Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters).

→ For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

A-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.1 Types of Analog Products A

4. FX3GC Series PLC Common Items Connect the special function block(s) to the right side of the FX3GC Series PLC. In some cases, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V may be needed for connection. Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected. PLC Analog special function block FX3UC-1PS-5V Analog special function block for FX3UC and FX 2NC or for FX3U and FX2N B FX FX2NC-CNV-IF FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

C FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Up to 8 special function units/blocks can be connected (excluding the special adapters).

Select either FX3UC-1PS-5V or FX2NC-CNV-IF considering the current components consumption. D → For a detailed description of the system configuration, refer to the PLC User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.2 List of Analog Product Models

2.2 List of Analog Product Models

The analog input/output products compatible with the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC are described below:

2.2.1 Expansion board

FX3G Series PLC

No. of Refer- Type Range Resolution Function channels ence Voltage/current input Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) Combined use of voltage and FX3G-2AD-BD 2ch D Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 8μA(11bits) current inputs is possible. Voltage/current output Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) FX3G-1DA-BD 1ch Voltage and current output. G Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 8μA(11bits)

2.2.2 Special adapter

No. of Refer- Type Range Resolution Function channels ence Voltage/current input Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) Combined use of voltage and FX3U-4AD-ADP 4ch C Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 10μA(11bits) current inputs is possible. Voltage/current output Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) Combined use of voltage and FX3U-4DA-ADP 4ch F Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 4μA(12bits) current outputs is possible. Voltage/current input/output mixture Input Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) 2ch Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 5μA(12bits) Combined use of voltage/ FX3U-3A-ADP current inputs and voltage/ H Output Voltage: 0V to 10V DC 2.5mV(12bits) current output is possible. 1ch Current: 4mA to 20mA DC 4μA(12bits) Temperature sensor input Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor (Pt100). FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP 4ch Pt100: -50°C to +250°C0.1°C I The product can be switched between "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor (Pt100). FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP 4ch Pt100: -100°C to +600°C0.2°C to 0.3°C J The product can be switched between "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." Compatible with the input Pt1000: -50°C to +250°C sensor (Pt1000 and Ni1000). FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP 4ch 0.1°C The product can be switched K Ni1000: -45°C to +115°C between "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." Compatible with Type K: -100°C to +1000°C0.4°C thermocouple types K and J. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP 4ch The product can be switched L Type J: -100°C to +600°C0.3°C between "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit."

A-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.2 List of Analog Product Models A

2.2.3 Special function block Common Items

No. of Refer- Type Range Resolution Function channels ence Voltage/current input Voltage: 0.32mV Combined use of voltage and -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible. The B FX *1 4ch *3 B FX FX3U-4AD offset/gain can be adjusted. 3UC 3U Current: 1.25μA The sampling function is -4AD -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 15 bits) -4AD incorporated. Voltage: 0.32mV Combined use of voltage and -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible. The FX3UC-4AD*2 4ch offset/gain can be adjusted.*3 B Current: 1.25μA C

The sampling function is FX -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 15 bits) incorporated. 3U Voltage: 0.32mV Combined use of voltage and -4AD-ADP -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 16 bits) current inputs is possible. The offset/gain can be FX2NC-4AD*2 4ch *5 Current: 1.25μA adjusted.*3 -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 15 bits) The sampling function is D incorporated. FX 3G

Voltage: 0.63mV Combined use of voltage, -2AD-BD -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 15 bits) current, and thermocouple is possible. The offset/gain can be FX2N-8AD*1 8ch *5 Current: 2.5μA adjusted.*3 -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 14 bits) The sampling function is incorporated. E FX

Voltage: 5mV 3U Combined use of voltage and -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 12 bits) -4DA FX2N-4AD*1 4ch current inputs is possible. *5 Current: 10μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 11 bits) Voltage: 2.5mV Combined use of voltage and 0V to 10V DC (12bits) current inputs is impossible. FX2N-2AD*1 2ch *5 F Current: 4μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. FX 4mA to 20mA DC (12bits) (Common to 2 input channels) 3U -4DA-ADP Voltage/current output Voltage: 0.32mV Combined use of voltage and -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 16 bits) FX3U-4DA*1 4ch current outputs is possible.*4 E Current: 0.63μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. G

0mA to 20mA DC (15bits) FX

Voltage: 5mV 3G

Combined use of voltage and -1DA-BD -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 12 bits) FX2NC-4DA*2 4ch current outputs is possible. *5 Current: 20μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. 0mA to 20mA DC (10bits) Voltage: 5 mV Combined use of voltage and -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 12 bits) H

FX2N-4DA*1 4ch current outputs is possible. *5 FX Current: 20μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. 3U

0mA to 20mA DC (10bits) -3A-ADP Voltage: 2.5 mV Combined use of voltage and 0V to 10V DC (12 bits) FX2N-2DA*1 2ch current outputs is possible. *5 Current: 4μA The offset/gain can be adjusted. 4mA to 20mA DC (12bits) I -ADP *1. To connect this block to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is FX required. 3U -4AD-PT *2. Connectable with the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC only. *3. The offset and gain of the FX3U-4AD, FX3UC-4AD, FX2NC-4AD and FX2N-8AD cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct indication mode. *4. The offset and gain of the FX3U-4DA cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value mV (or μA) J -ADP FX

specification mode. 3U -4AD-PTW *5. Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product.

A-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.2 List of Analog Product Models

No. of Refer- Type Range Resolution Function channels ence Voltage/current input/output mixture Voltage: 0.32mV Input -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 16 bits) Combined use of voltage and 4ch Current: 1.25μA current is possible. -20mA to +20mA DC (with sign, 15 bits) The offset/gain can be FX2N-5A*1 *2 Voltage: 5mV adjusted.*3 Output -10V to +10V DC (with sign, 12 bits) The scaling function is 1ch Current: 20μA incorporated. 0mA to 20mA DC (10bits) Voltage: 40mV Input 0V to 10V DC (8bits) 2ch Current: 64μA The input format is common to 2 4mA to 20mA DC (8bits) channels. FX0N-3A*4, *5 *2 Voltage: 40mV The offset/gain can be adjusted. Output 0V to 10V DC (8bits) (Common to 2 input channels) 1ch Current: 64μA 4mA to 20mA DC (8bits) Temperature sensor input Type K: Combined use of voltage, -100°C to +1200°C current, and thermocouple is Type J: possible. -100°C to +600°C Compatible with thermocouple FX2N-8AD*1 8ch 0.1°C types K, J, and T. *2 The unit can be switched between Type T: "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." -100°C to +350°C The sampling function is incorporated. Type K: Compatible with thermocouple 0.4°C -100°C to +1200°C types K and J. FX2N-4AD-TC*1 4ch *2 Type J: The unit can be switched between 0.3°C -100°C to +600°C "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100: FX2N-4AD-PT*1 4ch 0.2°C to 0.3°C (Pt100 or JPt100). *2 -100°C to +600°C The unit can be switched between "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." Compatible with thermocouple types K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, and L. Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor (Pt1000, Pt100, and JPt100). Example: The unit can be switched between Type K: 0.1°C or 1°C "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." -100°C to +1300°C FX3U-4LC*1 4ch (Depends on the Compatible with the micro *2 Example: sensor input range.) voltage input. Pt100: The temperature adjustment -200°C to +600°C function (PID operation, etc.) is incorporated. The peak disconnection detection function is incorporated. (A CT sensor is needed.)

*1. To connect this block to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required. *2. Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product. *3. The offset and gain of the FX2N-5A cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct indication mode or analog value mV (or μA) specification mode. *4. The FX0N-3A cannot be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. *5. To connect this block to the FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.

A-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2.2 List of Analog Product Models A Common Items No. of Refer- Type Range Resolution Function channels ence Temperature sensor input Example: Compatible with thermocouple Type K: types K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II, -600°C to +1300°C W5Re/W26Re, U, and L. B FX Compatible with the platinum FX

resistance thermometer sensor 3UC 3U -4AD

(Pt100, JPt100). -4AD 0.1°C or 1°C The unit can be switched between FX2N-2LC*1 2ch (Depends on the "Centigrade" and "Fahrenheit." *2 Example: sensor input range.) The temperature adjustment Pt100: function (PID operation, etc.) is -200°C to +600°C C incorporated. FX The peak disconnection 3U -4AD-ADP detection function is incorporated. (A CT sensor is needed.) *1. To connect this block to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, either the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is D

required. FX 3G

*2. Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product. -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.1 FX3U Series PLC

3. System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products

This section shows drawings to describe the configuration of analog units for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC.

3.1 FX3U Series PLC

3.1.1 Connection of special adapters

FX3U Series

A To connect special function blocks C , refer to the next page. B C

A ,, B and C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed installation description, refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC. Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. B A Analog input

RDA

RD RDB SDA European terminal block • Flowmeter SD SDB SG • Pressure sensor • Signal converter, etc. 1 FX3U-***-BD* FX3U-4AD-ADP

Analog output European terminal block • Inverter, etc.

FX3U-4DA-ADP

A Analog input • Flowmeter

European terminal block • Pressure sensor • Signal converter, etc.

Analog output FX3U-3A-ADP • Inverter, etc.

A Temperature sensor input • European terminal block Thermocouple (types K and J) Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. • Resistance thermometer FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ni1000) FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP • Platinum resistance FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP thermometer sensor (Pt100)

*1. An FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, or FX3U-CNV-BD is needed to connect the special adapters.

A-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.1 FX3U Series PLC A

3.1.2 Connection of special function blocks Common Items

FX3U Series A ,, B and C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC. A B C → Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. B FX FX 3UC 3U

To connect the special adapters A or the expansion boards B , -4AD refer to the previous page. -4AD

C Analog input FX 3U

C • Flowmeter -4AD-ADP • Pressure sensor • Signal converter, etc. Terminal block

Analog output D Special function FX • Inverter, etc. 3G block for FX3U, -2AD-BD FX2N and FX0N Temperature sensor input • Thermocouple • Platinum resistance thermometer E sensor (Pt100) FX 3U -4DA Up to 8 special functionUp blocks can be connected.

For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration: → Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. F FX

The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3U Series PLC: 3U -4DA-ADP

FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC the FX3U Analog special function blocks for FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-5A, G FX

the FX2N FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC 3G Analog special function blocks for -1DA-BD FX0N-3A the FX0N

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.2 FX3UC Series PLC

3.2 FX3UC Series PLC

3.2.1 Connection of special adapters

1. FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC

, C1 C2 To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D A D refer to Subsection 3.2.2-1.

A , C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. A Analog input •Flowmeter European terminal block •Pressure sensor •Signal converter, etc. FX3U-4AD-ADP

Analog output European terminal block •Inverter, etc.

FX3U-4DA-ADP

A Analog input •Flowmeter European terminal block •Pressure sensor •Signal converter, etc.

FX3U-3A-ADP Analog output •Inverter, etc.

A Temperature sensor input •Thermocouple European terminal block (types K and J) Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. Up •Resistance thermometer FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ni1000) FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP •Platinum resistance FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP thermometer sensor (Pt100)

A-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.2 FX3UC Series PLC A

2. FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC Common Items

To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D , A C1 D C2 B refer to Subsection 3.2.2-2.

A , B , and C represent the connecting positions. B FX For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with to FX your PLC. 3UC 3U -4AD

→ Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. -4AD B A

RDA RD Analog input RDB SDA European terminal block SD SDB •Flowmeter SG C •Pressure sensor FX 3U *1 •Signal converter, etc. FX3U-***-BD FX3U-4AD-ADP -4AD-ADP

Analog output European terminal block D

•Inverter, etc. FX 3G -2AD-BD FX3U-4DA-ADP

A Analog input •Flowmeter •Pressure sensor E

European terminal block FX

•Signal converter, etc. 3U -4DA Analog output FX3U-3A-ADP •Inverter, etc.

F A Temperature sensor FX 3U

input -4DA-ADP • Thermocouple European terminal block (types K and J) Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected. Up • Resistance thermometer FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and G FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ni1000) FX

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP • Platinum resistance 3G FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP thermometer -1DA-BD sensor (Pt100)

H FX 3U *1. An FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-8AV-BD, or FX3U-CNV-BD is -3A-ADP needed to connect the special adapters.

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.2 FX3UC Series PLC

3.2.2 Connection of special function blocks

1. FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC A ,, C and D represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with A C1 D C2 to your PLC. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

To connect the special adapters A refer to Subsection 3.2.1-1.

European terminal block

FX3UC-4AD

European terminal block Analog input Special function •Flowmeter block for FX2NC C1 •Pressure sensor •Signal converter, etc. European terminal block Analog output •Inverter, etc. FX3UC-4AD Temperature sensor C1 input •Thermocouple D •Platinum resistance thermometer European terminal block sensor (Pt100)

C1 or C2 Special function

Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected. block for FX2NC

FX3UC-1PS-5V C2

Terminal block

Special function block for FX3U, FX2NC-CNV-IF FX2N and FX0N For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration: → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. Use the FX3UC-1PS-5V (extension power supply unit) if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC: FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for the FX3UC FX3UC-4AD Analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, Analog special function blocks for the FX2N FX2N-5A, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC Analog special function blocks for the FX0N FX0N-3A

A-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.2 FX3UC Series PLC A

2. FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC Common Items

A ,, B C , and D represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with A C1 D C2 B your PLC. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. To connect the special adaptersA or the expansion boards B , refer to Subsection 3.2.1-2. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD

C1 -4AD

European terminal block C FX

FX3UC-4AD 3U -4AD-ADP

European terminal block D Analog input FX Special function •Flowmeter 3G -2AD-BD block for FX2NC C1 •Pressure sensor •Signal converter, etc. European terminal block Analog output E

•Inverter, etc. FX 3UC FX -4AD 3U Temperature sensor -4DA C1 input •Thermocouple D •Platinum resistance thermometer European terminal block sensor (Pt100) F FX

C1 or C2 3U

Special function -4DA-ADP

Up to 7 special function blocks can be connected. block for FX2NC

FX3UC-1PS-5V C2 G

D FX 3G

Terminal block -1DA-BD

Special function block for FX3U, FX2NC-CNV-IF FX2N and FX0N H For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration: FX 3U

→ Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. -3A-ADP Use the FX3UC-1PS-5V (extension power supply unit) if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3UC Series PLC: I -ADP FX Series Type FX 3U

Analog special function blocks for the FX3UC FX3UC-4AD -4AD-PT

Analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC

Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA

FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, Analog special function blocks for the FX2N FX2N-5A, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC J -ADP FX

Analog special function blocks for the FX0N FX0N-3A 3U -4AD-PTW

A-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.3 FX3G Series PLC

3.3 FX3G Series PLC

3.3.1 Connection of expansion boards, special adapters

1. FX3G Series PLC (14-point, 24-point type)

FX3G Series and represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC.

Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

Board A Analog input Flowmeter European terminal block Pressure sensor Signal converter, etc.

FX3G-2AD-BD

Board A

European terminal block Analog output Inverter, etc.

FX3G-1DA-BD

1st adapter Analog input Flowmeter European terminal block Pressure sensor Signal converter, etc.

FX3G-CNV-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP

1st adapter Analog output European terminal block Inverter, etc.

FX3U-4DA-ADP

1st Analog input Up to 1 analog expansion board, special adapter can be connected. adapter Flowmeter European terminal block Pressure sensor Signal converter, etc. Analog output FX3U-3A-ADP Inverter, etc.

Temperature sensor 1st input adapter Thermocouple European terminal block (types K and J) Resistance thermometer sensor FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (Pt1000 and Ni1000) FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Platinum resistance FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP thermometer FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP sensor (Pt100)

A-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.3 FX3G Series PLC A

2. FX3G Series PLC (40-point, 60-point type) Common Items A , B , and C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with to BC AA your PLC. Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. B FX Only either AC or FX 3UC 3U

can be used as 2nd. -4AD European -4AD B Board A terminal Analog input C Board B block Flowmeter Pressure sensor European Signal converter, C terminal FX

block etc. 3U FX3G-2AD-BD -4AD-ADP

FX3G-2AD-BD B Board A European terminal block C Board B Analog output D Inverter, etc. FX

European 3G

terminal -2AD-BD FX3G-1DA-BD block

FX3G-1DA-BD

Any one can be E FX

selected. 3U

A -4DA 2nd European adapter terminal Analog input A 1st block Flowmeter adapter B Pressure sensor European Signal converter, F FX FX3U-4AD-ADP terminal etc. block 3U -4DA-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP A 2nd adapter European FX3G-CNV-ADP terminal A 1st block Analog output adapter Inverter, etc. European G FX

FX3U-4DA-ADP terminal 3G

block -1DA-BD

Up to 2 analog expansion boards, special adapters can be connected. Analog input FX3U-4DA-ADP A 2nd Flowmeter adapter European Pressure sensor terminal A 1st Signal converter, block H adapter etc. FX 3U

Analog output -3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP European terminal Inverter, etc. block FX3U-3A-ADP Temperature A 2nd sensor input I -ADP adapter Thermocouple FX

(types K and J) 3U

A -4AD-PT 1st Resistance adapter European terminal thermometer FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP block sensor (Pt1000 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP and Ni1000) FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP European Platinum FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP J -ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP terminal resistance FX

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP block thermometer 3U

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP -4AD-PTW sensor (Pt100)

A-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.3 FX3G Series PLC

3.3.2 Connection of special function blocks

FX3G Series A ,, B and C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC. A B C → Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

To connect the special adapters A or the connector conversion adapter B , refer to the previous page.

Analog input C • Flowmeter • Pressure sensor • Signal converter, etc. Terminal block

Analog output Special function • Inverter, etc. block for FX3U and FX2N Temperature sensor input • Thermocouple Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected. Up

For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration: → Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC:

FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC the FX3U Analog special function blocks for FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, FX2N-5A, the FX2N FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC

A-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.4 FX3GC Series PLC A 3.4 FX3GC Series PLC Common Items

3.4.1 Connection of special adapters

1. FX3GC Series PLC B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD , C1 C2 To connect the special function blocks C or the conversion adapters D A D refer to Subsection 3.4.2-1.

A , C represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with to C

your PLC. FX

→ Refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. 3U -4AD-ADP A Analog input •Flowmeter European terminal block •Pressure sensor •Signal converter, etc. D FX

FX3U-4AD-ADP 3G -2AD-BD

Analog output European terminal block •Inverter, etc. E FX 3U FX3U-4DA-ADP -4DA

A Analog input •Flowmeter European terminal block •Pressure sensor F •Signal converter, etc. FX 3U -4DA-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP Analog output •Inverter, etc.

A Temperature sensor G input FX 3G

•Thermocouple -1DA-BD European terminal block

Up to 2 analog special adapters can be connected. (types K and J) •Resistance thermometer FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP sensor (Pt1000 and FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Ni1000) FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP H •Platinum resistance FX FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP thermometer 3U

sensor (Pt100) -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3.4 FX3GC Series PLC

3.4.2 Connection of special function blocks

1. FX3GC Series PLC A ,, C and D represent the connecting positions. For a detailed description of installation, refer to the following manual supplied with A C1 D C2 to your PLC. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

To connect the special adapters A refer to Subsection 3.4.1-1.

European terminal block

FX3UC-4AD

C1 or C2 Special function

Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected. block for FX2NC

FX3UC-1PS-5V C2

Terminal block

Special function block for FX3U FX2NC-CNV-IF and FX 2N For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration: → Refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. Use the FX3UC-1PS-5V (extension power supply unit) if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3GC Series PLC is deteriorated. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3GC Series PLC: FX Series Type

Analog special function blocks for the FX3UC FX3UC-4AD Analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC

Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA

FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-2DA, Analog special function blocks for the FX2N FX2N-5A, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC

A-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input A Common Items 4. Comparison of Performance Specifications

The analog product performance specifications are shown in the following tables. Select the optimal product B FX for your equipment. FX 3UC 3U -4AD 4.1 Analog Input -4AD

4.1.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP C FX 3U

FX3U-4AD-ADP -4AD-ADP Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC Analog input range D

(Input resistance: 194 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) FX

Absolute maximum input -0.5V,+15V -2mA,+30mA 3G -2AD-BD Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital output 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary E

Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 10μA(16mA×1/1600) FX 3U

Ambient temperature -4DA ±0.5%(±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5%(±80μA) for 16mA full scale :25±5°C

Ambient temperature ±1.0%(±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0%(±160μA) for 16mA full scale :0 to 55°C F FX Overall accuracy

Time required for A/D FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) 3U -4DA-ADP conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)

4080 1640 4000 1600 G FX 3G

Input characteristics -1DA-BD 20.4mA Digital output 10.2V output Digital 0 10V 0 4mA 20mA Analog input Analog input H FX 3U

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. -3A-ADP Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.) occupied I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input

4.1.2 FX2N-2AD

FX2N-2AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch 0V to 5V DC 4mA to 20mA DC *1 0V to 10V DC Analog input range (Input resistance: 250Ω) (Input resistance: 200 kΩ) Absolute maximum input -0.5V,+15V -2mA,+60mA Offset If the digital value is "0":0V to 1V*2,*3 If the digital value is "0":0mA to 4mA*2,*3 If the digital value is "4000": Gain If the digital value is "4000":20mA*2,*3 5V to 10V*2,*3 Digital output 12 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000)*3 4.00μA(16mA×1/4000)*3

Ambient temperature: -- 25±5°C

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0%(±160μA) for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C Overall accuracy Time required for A/D 2.5ms × number of selected channels conversion (Operation synchronized with sequence program)

4095 4095 4000 4000

Input characteristics Digital input Digital output 10.238V 20.380mA 0 10V 0 4mA 20mA Analog input Analog input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*1. For FX2N-2AD, combined use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible. *2. Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N-2AD. *3. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution.

A-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input A

4.1.3 FX3U-4AD Common Items

FX3U-4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch -20mA to +20mA DC B FX -10V to +10V DC FX Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC (Input resistance: 200 kΩ) 3UC 3U

(Input resistance: 250 Ω) -4AD -4AD Absolute maximum input ±15V ±30mA Offset -10V to +9V*1,*2 -20mA to +17mA*1,*3 Gain -9V to +10V*1,*2 -17mA to +30mA*1,*3 C Digital output With sign, 16 bits, binary With sign, 15 bits, binary FX 3U -4AD-ADP *4 0.32mV(20V×1/64000) 1.25μA(40mA×1/32000) Resolution 2.5mV(20V×1/8000) 5.00μA(40mA×1/8000)

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.3%(±60mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D FX

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±400μA) for 40mA full scale 3G ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale -2AD-BD 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Overall

Time required for A/D *5 conversion 500μs × number of selected channels

zWhen the input mode is set to "6": E zWhen the input mode is set to "0": FX

+32640 +16320 3U +32000 +16000 -4DA +10.2V -10V 0 -20mA 0 +20.4mA +10V +20mA F FX 3U

*4 -4DA-ADP -10.2V Input characteristics -32000 -20.4mA -16000 -32640 -16320 zWhen the input mode is set to "3": 16400 16000 G FX 3G 20.4mA -1DA-BD

0 4mA 20mA

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. H Channels are not insulated from each other. FX 3U

Number of I/O points -3A-ADP 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: -4AD-PT 3mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30mA *4. The resolution and the input/output characteristics depend on the selected mode. *5. If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s), the time required for A/D conversion will be "5 ms × number of selected channels." J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input

4.1.4 FX2N-4AD

FX2N-4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch -20mA to +20mA DC -10V to +10V DC Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC (Input resistance: 200kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) Absolute maximum input ±15V ±32mA Offset -5V to +5V*1,*2 -20mA to +20mA*1,*3 Gain -4V to +15V*1,*2 -16mA to +32mA*1,*3 Digital output With sign, 12 bits, binary With sign, 11 bits, binary Resolution 5mV(20V×1/4000)*1 20μA(40mA×1/2000)*1

Ambient temperature: -- 25±5°C

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±400μA) for 40mA full scale ±1.0%(±200mV) for 20V full scale 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Time required for A/D Normal conversion mode:15ms × number of selected channels conversion High-speed conversion mode: 6ms × number of selected channels

zWhen the input is set from -20 mA to +20 mA: +2047 +2000 +1600 +1000

-10V 0 +10.235V +10V -20mA 0 +32mA +20mA

-10.240V -2000

Input characteristics -32mA -2048 -1000 -1600 zWhen the input is set from 4 mA to 20 mA: 1750 1000 32mA 0 4mA 20mA

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 15V *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 4mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 32mA

A-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input A

4.1.5 FX3UC-4AD Common Items

FX3UC-4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch -20mA to +20mA DC B FX -10V to +10V DC FX Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC (Input resistance: 200 kΩ) 3UC 3U

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.3%(±60mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D FX

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±400μA) for 40mA full scale 3G ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale -2AD-BD 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Overall

Time required for A/D *5 conversion 500μs × number of selected channels

zWhen the input mode is set to "6": E zWhen the input mode is set to "0": FX

+32640 +16320 3U +32000 +16000 -4DA +10.2V -10V 0 -20mA 0 +20.4mA +10V +20mA F FX 3U

*4 -4DA-ADP -10.2V Input characteristics -32000 -20.4mA -16000 -32640 -16320 zWhen the input mode is set to "3": 16400 16000 G FX 3G 20.4mA -1DA-BD

0 4mA 20mA

Number of I/O points -3A-ADP 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

A-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input

4.1.6 FX2NC-4AD

FX2NC-4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch -20mA to +20mA DC -10V to +10V DC Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC (Input resistance: 200kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) Absolute maximum input ±15V ±30mA Offset -10V to +9V*1,*2 -20mA to +17mA*1,*3 Gain -9V to +10V*1,*2 -17mA to +30mA*1,*3 Digital output With sign, 16 bits, binary With sign, 15 bits, binary

*4 0.32mV(20V×1/64000) 1.25μA(40mA×1/32000) Resolution 2.5mV(20V×1/8000) 5.00μA(40mA×1/8000)

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.3%(±60mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±400μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Overall

Time required for A/D *5 conversion 1ms × number of selected channels

zWhen the input mode is set to "0": zWhen the input mode is set to "6": +32640 +16320 +32000 +16000 +10.2V -10V 0 -20mA 0 +20.4mA +10V 20mA

*4 -10.2V Input characteristics -20.4mA -32000 -16000 -32640 -16320 zWhen the input mode is set to "3": 16400 16000 20.4mA

0 4mA 20mA The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the direct indication mode, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 3mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30mA *4. The resolution and the input/output characteristics depend on the selected mode. *5. If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s), the time required for A/D conversion will be "5 ms × number of selected channels."

A-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input A

4.1.7 FX2N-8AD Common Items

FX2N-8AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 8ch -20mA to +20mA DC B FX -10V to +10V DC FX

Analog input range 4mA to 20mA DC 3UC 3U (Input resistance: 200 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) -4AD -4AD Absolute maximum input ±15V ±30mA Offset -10V to +9V*1,*2 -20mA to +17mA*1,*3 Gain -9V to +10V*1,*2 -17mA to +30mA*1,*3 C FX

Digital output With sign, 15 bits, binary With sign, 14 bits, binary 3U -4AD-ADP *4 0.63mV(20V×1/32000) 2.50μA(40mA×1/16000) Resolution 2.5mV(20V×1/8000) 2.00μA(16mA×1/8000)

Ambient temperature: ±0.3%(±120μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.3%(±60mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input D FX 3G

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale -2AD-BD ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Overall Time required for A/D 500μs × number of selected channels*5 conversion E zWhen the input mode is set to "0": FX

zWhen the input mode is set to "6": 3U

+16320 -4DA +8160 +16000 +8000

-10V +10.2V

0 +20.4mA -20mA 0 +10V F +20mA FX 3U -4DA-ADP *4 -10.2V

Input characteristics -16000 -20.4mA -8000 -16320 Approx.-8160 zWhen the input mode is set to "3": G

8200 FX

8000 3G -1DA-BD 20.4mA

0 4mA 20mA The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. H Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. FX 3U

Channels are not insulated from each other. -3A-ADP Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied *1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the direct indication mode, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted. I -ADP FX *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 3U

1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) -4AD-PT *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 3mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30mA *4. The resolution and the input/output characteristics depend on the selected mode. *5. If 1 or more channels use the thermocouple input(s), the input voltage/current data conversion speed will be J -ADP "1 ms × number of selected channels." FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.1 Analog Input

4.1.8 FX3G-2AD-BD

FX3G-2AD-BD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC Analog input range (Input resistance: 198.7 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) Absolute maximum input -0.5V. +15V -2mA, +30mA Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital output 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 8μA(16mA×1/2000)

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5%(±80μA) for 16mA full scale 25±5°C

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0%(±160μA) for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C Overall accuracy Overall Time required for A/D 180μs (Data updated every scan time.) conversion

4080 2040 4000 2000

Input characteristics Digital output Digital output 0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.32mA Analog input Analog input

The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC. Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.) occupied

A-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output A 4.2 Analog Output Common Items

4.2.1 FX3U-4DA-ADP

FX3U-4DA-ADP B FX Specifications FX

Voltage output Current output 3UC 3U -4AD Number of output points 4ch -4AD 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC Analog output range (External load: 5k to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change C Gain FX 3U

Digital input 12 bits, binary -4AD-ADP Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 4μA(16mA×1/4000) Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5%(±80μA) for 16mA full scale 25±5°C D

Ambient temperature: FX ±1.0%(±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0%(±160μA) for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C 3G -2AD-BD If the external load resistance (Rs) is less than 5kΩ, the accuracy increases as shown in the Reference following formula: (Increase: 100 mV per 1%) - Overall accuracy 47×100 -0.9(%) Rs+47 E FX

Time required for D/A FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) 3U -4DA conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)

10V 20mA F FX 3U

Output characteristics -4DA-ADP Analog output

4080 4mA 4080 Analog output 0 4000 0 4000 Digital input Digital input G FX 3G

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC. -1DA-BD Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.) occupied H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-33 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output

4.2.2 FX2N-2DA

FX2N-2DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 2ch 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 0V to 5V DC Analog output range (External load: 400Ω or less) (External load: 2k to 1MΩ)

*1,*2 If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": Offset 0V to 1V 4mA

*1,*2 If the digital value is "4000": If the digital value is "4000": Gain 5V to 10V 20mA Digital output 12 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000)*2 4μA(16mA×1/4000)*2 ±0.1V ±0.16mA Overall accuracy Does not include any load fluctuation. - Time required for D/A 4ms × number of selected channels conversion (Operation synchronized with sequence program)

10V 20mA

Output characteristics Analog output

4095 4mA 4095 Analog output 0 4000 0 4000 Digital input Digital input

If the input data consists of 13 bits or more, only the lower 12 bits will be valid, and the other bits will be ignored. The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC. Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*1. Use the adjustment volume to adjust the FX2N-2DA. *2. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution.

A-34 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output A

4.2.3 FX3U-4DA Common Items

FX3U-4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch B FX 0mA to 20mA DC FX -10V to +10V DC Analog output range 4mA to 20mA DC 3UC 3U

(External load: 1k to 1MΩ) -4AD

(External load: 500Ω or less) -4AD Offset -10V to +9V*1,*2 0mA to 17mA*1,*3 Gain -9V to +10V*1,*2 3mA to 30mA*1,*3 Digital input With sign, 16 bits, binary 15 bits, binary C FX

Resolution 0.32mV(20V×1/64000)*4 0.63μA(20mA×1/32000)*4 3U -4AD-ADP Ambient temperature: ±0.3%(±60μA) for 20mA full scale ±0.3%(±60mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±100μA) for 20mA full scale ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D Reference Includes corrective function by load fluctuation. - FX 3G Overall accuracy -2AD-BD Time required for D/A 1ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.) conversion

zWhen the output mode is set to "0": zWhen the output mode is "2": (The dotted line is for mode 3.) E +10.2V 20.4mA FX

+10V 3U

20mA -4DA +32640 Output characteristics -32000 0 +32000 output Analog F FX -32640

4mA 32640

-10V 3U -10.2V 0 32000 -4DA-ADP Digital input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output. Channels are not insulated from each other. G FX

Number of I/O points 3G

8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) -1DA-BD occupied *1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the analog value specification mode, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: H 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 10V FX 3U

*3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: -3A-ADP 3mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30mA *4. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-35 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output

4.2.4 FX2N-4DA

FX2N-4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch 0mA to 20mA DC -10V to +10V DC Analog output range 4mA to 20mA DC (External load: 2k to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) Offset -5V to +5V*1,*2 -20mA to +20mA*1,*3 15 V or less, and 32 mA or less, and Gain Gain - Offset ≥ 1V Gain - Offset ≥ 4mA Digital output With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary Resolution 5mV(10V×1/2000)*1 20μA(20mA×1/1000)*1 ±1.0%(±200μA) for 20mA full scale ±1.0%(±200mV) for 20V full scale Overall accuracy Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Does not include any load fluctuation. - Time required for D/A 2.1 ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.) conversion

zWhen the output mode is set to "0": zWhen the output mode is "2": (The dotted line is for mode 1.)

+10V 20mA

Output characteristics

-2000 0 +2047 +2000 Analog output -2048

4mA 1023 -10V 0 1000 Digital input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

A-36 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output A

4.2.5 FX2NC-4DA Common Items

FX2NC-4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch B FX 0mA to 20mA DC FX -10V to +10V DC Analog output range 4mA to 20mA DC 3UC 3U

(External load: 2k to 1MΩ) -4AD

(External load: 500Ω or less) -4AD Offset -5V to +5V*1,*2 -20mA to +20mA*1,*3 Gain -4V to +15V*1,*2 -16mA to +32mA*1,*3 Digital input With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary C FX

Resolution*1 5mV(20V×1/4000) 20μA(20mA×1/1000) 3U -4AD-ADP Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±100μA) for 20mA full scale ±0.5%(±100mV) for 20V full scale 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±200μA) for 20mA full scale ±1.0%(±200mV) for 20V full scale 0 to 55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D Reference Does not include any load fluctuation. - FX 3G Overall accuracy -2AD-BD Time required for D/A 2.1ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.) conversion

zWhen the output mode is set to "0": zWhen the output mode is "2": (The dotted line is for mode 1.) E FX

+10V 3U

20mA -4DA

Output characteristics -2000 0 +2047 +2000 output Analog

-2048 F FX

4mA 1023

-10V 3U

0 1000 -4DA-ADP Digital input

Number of I/O points 3G

8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) -1DA-BD occupied

*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 15V H *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: FX 3U

4mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 32mA -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-37 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.2 Analog Output

4.2.6 FX3G-1DA-BD

FX3G-1DA-BD Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 1ch 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC Analog output range (External load: 2k to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital input 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 8μA(16mA×1/2000) Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5%(±80μA) for 16mA full scale 25±5°C Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0%(±160μA) for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C Shipment adjustment is carried out by external load resistance 2kΩ. If external load resistance becomes larger than Reference -

Overall accuracy 2kΩ, the output voltage will increase slightly. When the load is 1MΩ, the output voltage is about 2% higher than the correct value. Time required for D/A 60μs (Data updated every scan time.) conversion

10V 20mA

Output characteristics Analog output

Analog output 4mA 0 4000 4080 0 2000 2040 Digital input Digital input

Caution: An area of dead band is located in the region of 0V. Therefore the output analog value may not represent the digital value accurately. Insulation method The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC. Number of I/O points 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum I/O points of the PLC.) occupied

A-38 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output A 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output Common Items

4.3.1 FX3U-3A-ADP

FX3U-3A-ADP Specifications B FX Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output FX 3UC 3U

Number of input/ -4AD 2ch 1ch -4AD output points 4mA to 20mA DC Analog input/ 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 0V to 10V DC (External load: output range (Input resistance:198.7kΩ) (Input resistance:250Ω) (External load:5k to 1MΩ) 500Ω or less) C Absolute -0.5V, -2mA, FX

--3U maximum input +15V +30mA -4AD-ADP Digital input/ 12 bits, binary output Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 5μA(16mA×1/3200) 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 4μA(16mA×1/4000) Ambient ±0.5%(±50mV) ±0.5%(±80μA) ±0.5%(±50mV) ±0.5%(±80μA) D temperature: FX

for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale 3G 25±5°C -2AD-BD Ambient ±1.0%(±100mV) ±1.0%(±160μA) ±1.0%(±100mV) ±1.0%(±160μA) temperature: for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C If the external load resistance (Rs) is less E FX

than 5kΩ, the accuracy 3U

increases as shown in the -4DA

Overall accuracy following formula: Reference - - - (Increase: 100 mV per 1%) 47×100 F

-0.9(%) FX Rs+47 3U -4DA-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 80μs for each selected input channel + 40μs for each selected output channel Time required (Operation synchronized with sequence program) for conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 90μs for each selected input channel + 50μs for each selected output channel G

(Operation synchronized with sequence program) FX 3G -1DA-BD 4080 3280 4000 3200 10V 20mA

I/O H

characteristics FX 3U Analog output -3A-ADP 4080 4080 20.4mA Digital output 10.2V Digital output 4mA Analog output 0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 4000 0 4000 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC. Insulation I -ADP The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output. FX

method 3U Channels are not insulated from each other. -4AD-PT Number of I/O 0 points points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-39 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output

4.3.2 FX2N-5A

1. Analog input

FX2N-5A Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch -10V to +10V DC -20mA to +20mA DC Analog input range -100mV to +100mV DC 4mA to 20mA DC (Input resistance: 200kΩ) (Input resistance: 250Ω) Absolute maximum input ±15V ±30mA -10V to +10V DC: -32V to +5V DC Offset -32mA to +10mA -100mV to +100mV DC: -320mV to +50mV DC -10V to +10V DC: -5V to +32V, and Gain - Offset > 1V -10mA to +32mA, and Gain -100mV to +100mV DC: Gain - Offset > 1 mA -50mV to +320mV, and Gain - Offset > 10mA -10V to +10V DC: With sign, 16 bits, binary Digital input/output With sign, 15 bits, binary -100mV to +100mV DC: With sign, 12 bits, binary 312.5μV(20V×1/64000) 1.25μA(40mA×1/32000) Resolution 50μV(200mV×1/4000) 10μA(40mA×1/4000) -10V to +10V DC: Ambient temperature: ±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale ±0.3%(±120μA) for 40mA full scale 25±5°C -100mV to +100mV DC: Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input ±0.5% (±1mV) for 200mV full scale -10V to +10V DC: Ambient temperature: ±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale 0±55°C -100mV to +100mV DC: Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy ±1.0% (±2mV) for 200mV full scale Time required for 1ms × number of selected channels conversion

zWhen the input mode is set to "0": zWhen the input mode is set to "2": +32767 +32767 +32000 +32000 +10.240V -10V 0 -20mA 0 +20.480mA +10V +20mA

-10.240V -32000 I/O characteristics -32000 -20.480mA -32768 -32768 zWhen the input mode is set to "1": +32767 +32000

2mA 20.383mA 0 4mA 20mA -4000

A-40 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output A

2. Analog output Common Items

FX2N-5A Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 1ch 0mA to 20mA DC -10V to +10V DC Analog output range 4mA to 20mA DC (External load: 5k to 1MΩ) B FX (External load: 500Ω or less) FX 3UC 3U

Offset -10V to +5V 0mA to 10mA -4AD -4AD -9V to +10V, and 3 mA to 30 mA or less, and Gain Gain - Offset ≥ 1V Gain - Offset ≥ 3mA Digital input/output With sign, 12 bits, binary 10 bits, binary Resolution 5mV(10V×1/4000) 20μA(20mA×1/1000) C FX

Ambient temperature: ±0.5%(±200μA) for 40mA full scale 3U ±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale -4AD-ADP 25±5°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output

Ambient temperature: ±1.0%(±400μA) for 40mA full scale ±1.0% (±200mV) for 20V full scale 0±55°C Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output

Overall accuracy D Time required for conversion 2ms FX 3G -2AD-BD zWhen the output mode is set to "0": zWhen the output mode is "4": (The dotted line is for mode 2.) +10V 20mA E FX

-32000 +32767 I/O characteristics 0 3U

+32000 -4DA Analog output -32768

-10V 4mA 32767 0 32000 Digital input F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

3. Other

Specifications FX2N-5A The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the G PLC. FX 3G

Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input -1DA-BD and output. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-41 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.3 Mixed Analog Input/Output

4.3.3 FX0N-3A

FX0N-3A Specifications Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Number of input/output 2ch 1ch points 0V to 10V DC 0V to 10V DC Analog input/ 4mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC 0V to 5V DC 0V to 5V DC output range*1 (Input resistance: 250Ω) (External load: 500Ω) (Input resistance: 200kΩ) (External load: 1k to 1MΩ) Absolute -0.5V, -2mA, maximum -- +15V +60mA input

*2*3 If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": If the digital value is "0": Offset 0V to 1V 0mA to 4mA 0V to 1V 4mA

*2*3 If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250": If the digital value is "250": Gain 5V to 10V 20mA 5V to 10V 20mA Digital input/ 0 to 250 0 to 250 output 8 bits, binary 8 bits, binary Resolution*3 40mV(10V×1/250) 64μA(16mA×1/250) 40mV(10V×1/250) 64μA(16mA×1/250) Overall ±0.1V ±0.16mA ±0.1V ±0.16mA accuracy Time required TO instruction processing time × 2 + FROM instruction processing time for conversion (operation synchronized with sequence program)

255 255 250 250 10V 20mA

I/O

characteristics Analog output 255 255 Digital output 20.320mA Digital output 10.200V 4mA Analog output 0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 250 0 250 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input

If the input data consists of 9 bits or more, only the lower 8 bits will be valid, and the other bits will be ignored. Insulation The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC. method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied *1. Combined use of voltage and current inputs is not possible. *2. Adjustment of the volume (offset or gain) value will change the resolution. *3. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution.

A-42 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input A 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input Common Items

4.4.1 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP B FX Specifications FX

Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) 3UC 3U -4AD

Number of input points 4ch -4AD 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) Input signal JIS C 1604-1997 Rated temperature range -50°C to +250°C-58°F to +482°F C Digital output -500 to +2500 -580 to +4820 FX 3U

Resolution 0.1°C0.18°F -4AD-ADP Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale Overall accuracy Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale Time required for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.) D FX 3G

+2550 +4910 -2AD-BD +2500 +4820 Digital output Input characteristics Digital output E FX 3U +491°F

-50°C +255°C -58°F -4DA 0 +250°C 0 +482°F Temperature Temperature -67°F -55°C -500 -580 -550 -670 The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. F Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. FX Channels are not insulated from each other. 3U -4DA-ADP Number of I/O points 0 points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-43 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input

4.4.2 FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) Input signal JIS C 1604-1997 Rated temperature range -100°C to +600°C-148°F to +1112°F Digital output -1000 to +6000 -1480 to +11120 Resolution 0.2°C to 0.3°C0.4°F to 0.5°F Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale Overall accuracy Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale Time required for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)

+6150 +11390 +6000 +11120 Digital output Input characteristics Digital output +1139°F -100°C +615°C -148°F 0 +600°C 0 +1112°F Temperature -1480Temperature

-1000 -175°F -115°C -1150 -1750

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 0 points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

A-44 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input A

4.4.3 FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Common Items

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch B FX Platinum resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Pt1000 FX

JIS C 1604-1997 3UC 3U

Input signal -4AD

Nickel resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Ni1000 -4AD DIN 43760-1987 Pt1000 -50°C to +250°C Pt1000 -58°F to +482°F Rated temperature range Ni1000 -40°C to +110°CNi1000 -40°F to +230°F C Pt1000 -500 to +2500 Pt1000 -580 to +4820 FX

Digital output 3U

Ni1000 -400 to +1100 Ni1000 -400 to +2300 -4AD-ADP Pt1000 Pt1000 Resolution 0.1°C 0.2°F Ni1000 Ni1000 Ambient temperature : 25°C±5°C ±0.5% for full scale Overall accuracy Ambient temperature : 0°C to 55°C ±1.0% for full scale D FX

Time required for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) 3G -2AD-BD conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.)

-Pt1000 -Pt1000 +2560 +4920 +2500 +4820 E FX 3U F ° C -4DA °

-50°C Approx. +256 0 -58°F 0 Approx. +492.8 +250°C +482°F C F ° ° -500 -580 Approx. -55 Approx. -67 F

-550 -670 FX

Input characteristics 3U -Ni1000 -Ni1000 -4DA-ADP +1150 +2390 +1100 +2300 C F

° ° G FX

-40°C 3G 0 Approx. +115 -40°F 0 Approx. +239 -1DA-BD +110°C +230°F C F ° ° -400 -400 Approx. -45 -450 Approx. -49 -490 H

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. FX

Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area. 3U Channels are not insulated from each other. -3A-ADP Number of I/O points 0 points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-45 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input

4.4.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP

FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J Input signal JIS C 1602-1995 Type K: -100°C to +1000°C Type K: -148°F to +1832°F Rated temperature range Type J: -100°C to +600°C Type J: -148°F to +1112°F Type K: -1000 to +10000 Type K: -1480 to +18320 Digital output Type J: -1000 to +6000 Type J: -1480 to +11120 Type K: 0.4°C Type K: 0.72°F Resolution Type J: 0.3°C Type J: 0.54°F Overall accuracy ±(0.5% for full scale +1°C) Time required for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (Data updated every scan time.) conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (Data updated every scan time.) Type K Type K

+10100 +18500 +10000 +18320 Digital output Digital output 1010°C 1850°F +

-110°C -148°F + 0 +1000°C 0 +1832°F Temperature Temperature

-1000 -166°F -1480 -110°C -1100 -1660 Input characteristics Type J Type J

+6100 +6000 +11300 +11120 Digital output Digital output 1130°F +610°C

-100°C -148°F + 0 +600°C 0 +1112°F Temperature Temperature

-110°C -1480 -1000 -166°F -1100 -1660 The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 0 points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

A-46 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input A

4.4.5 FX2N-4AD-PT Common Items

FX2N-4AD-PT Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch B FX 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) FX

DIN43760 3UC 3U

Input signal -4AD

Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997 -4AD JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981 Input signal current 1mA(Constant current system) Rated temperature range -100°C to +600°C -148°F to +1112°F C Digital output -1000 to +6000 -1480 to +11120 FX 3U

Resolution 0.2°C to 0.3°C0.36°F to 0.54°F -4AD-ADP Overall accuracy ±1.0% for full scale Time required for 60ms(15ms×4ch) conversion D FX +6000 +11120 3G -2AD-BD Digital output Digital output Input characteristics

° E

-100°C -148 F FX

0 +600°C 0 +1112°F 3U Temperature Temperature -4DA -1000 -1480

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. F

Channels are not insulated from each other. FX

Number of I/O points 3U 8 points (Count either the input or output points of the PLC.) -4DA-ADP occupied

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-47 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input

4.4.6 FX2N-4AD-TC

FX2N-4AD-TC Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J Input signal JIS C 1602-1995 Type K: -100°C to +1200°C Type K: -148°F to +2192°F Rated temperature range Type J: -100°C to +600°C Type J: -148°F to +1112°F Type K: -1000 to +12000 Type K: -1480 to +21920 Digital output Type J: -1000 to +6000 Type J: -1480 to +11120 Type K: 0.4°C Type K: 0.72°F Resolution Type J: 0.3°C Type J: 0.54°F Overall accuracy ±(0.5% for full scale +1°C) Time required for (240ms±2%)× number of selected channels conversion

+12000 +21920 (Type K) (Type K)

+6000 +11120 (Type J) (Type J) Digital output Digital output Input characteristics -100°C -148°F 0 +600°C +1200°C 0 +1112°F +2192°F (Type J) (Type K) (Type J) (Type K) -1000 -1480 Temperature Temperature

A-48 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input A

4.4.7 FX2N-8AD Common Items

FX2N-8AD Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 8ch Thermocouple type K, J, and T Input signal B FX JIS C 1602-1995 FX 3UC 3U

Type K -4AD

Type K -4AD -100°C to +1200°C -148°F to +2192°F Type J Type J Rated temperature range -100°C to +600°C -148°F to +1112°F Type T Type T C -100°C to +350°C -148°F to +662°F FX 3U

Type K Type K -4AD-ADP -1000 to +12000 -1480 to +21920 Type J Type J Digital output -1000 to +6000 -1480 to +11120 Type T Type T -1000 to +3500 -1480 to +6620 D FX

Resolution 0.1°C 0.1°F 3G -2AD-BD Type K: Type K: ±0.5%(±6.5°C) for full scale ±0.5%(±11.7°F) for full scale Ambient temperature: Type J: Type J: 0 to 55°C ±0.5%(±3.5°C) for full scale ±0.5%(±6.3°F) for full scale E

Type T: Type T: FX

±0.7%(±3.15°C) for full scale ° 3U

Overall accuracy ±0.7%(±5.67 F) for full scale -4DA Time required for 40ms × number of selected channels conversion

+12000 +21920 (Type K) (Type K) F FX 3U

+6000 +11120 -4DA-ADP (Type J) (Type J) Digital output Digital output Input characteristics +3500 +6620 (Type T) (Type T) ° +600°C +1112 F -100°C (Type J) -148°F (Type J) 0 +350°C +1200°C 0 +662°F +2192°F (Type T) (Type K) (Type T) (Type K) G FX

-1000 -1480 3G

Temperature Temperature -1DA-BD

8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) 3U occupied -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-49 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input

4.4.8 FX2N-2LC

FX2N-2LC*1*2 Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 2ch Thermocouple type K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N, PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, and L JIS C 1602-1995 Input signal 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997, JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981 Examples: Examples: Type K Type K Rated temperature range -100°C to +1300°C -100°F to +2400°F Type J Type J -100.0°C to +800.0°C -100°F to +2100°F Examples: Examples: Type K Type K Digital output -100 to +1300 -100 to +2400 Type J Type J -1000 to +8000 -100 to +2100 Resolution 1°C or 0.1°C 1°F or 0.1°F

Ambient temperature: ±0.3°C(±1digit) for full scale 23±5°C

Ambient temperature: ±0.7°C (±1digit) for full scale 0 to 55°C Overall accuracy ±1.0°C Cold junction temperature ±2.0°C if the input value is in the range from -150°C to -100°C compensation error ±3.0°C if the input value is in the range from -200°C to -150°C Time required for 500ms(Sampling period) conversion

zWhen type K (input mode 2) zWhen type K (input mode 4) is set: is set: +1300 +2400 Digital output

Input characteristics Digital output

-100°C -100°F 0 +1300°C 0 +2400°F Temperature Temperature -100 -100

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are insulated from each other. Number of I/O points 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) occupied

*1. For FX2N-2LC, the rated temperature range, digital output value, and resolution depend on the selected sensor and mode. *2. Accuracy is not guaranteed for the temperature range of 0°C to 399°C(0°F to 799°F) of the thermocouple -B input and for the temperature range of 0°F to 32°F of the PL II and WRe5-26 inputs.

A-50 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4.4 Temperature Sensor Input A

4.4.9 FX3U-4LC Common Items

FX3U-4LC*1*2 Specifications Centigrade(°C) Fahrenheit(°F) Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N JIS C 1602-1995 B FX PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, and L FX 3UC 3U

3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) -4AD Input signal Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997, JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981 -4AD 2-wire/3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor(s) Pt1000 JIS C 1604-1997 micro voltage input C

Examples: Examples: FX

Type K Type K 3U Rated temperature range -100°C to +1300°C -100°F to +2400°F -4AD-ADP Type J Type J -100.0°C to +800.0°C -100°F to +2100°F Examples: Examples: Type K Type K D FX

Digital output -100 to +1300 -100 to +2400 3G

Type J Type J -2AD-BD -1000 to +8000 -100 to +2100 Resolution 1°C or 0.1°C 1°F or 0.1°F Ambient temperature: Measurement accuracy differs depending on the type of input, and the input range. E 25±5°C For specification details, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual. FX 3U -4DA Ambient temperature: Measurement accuracy differs depending on the type of input, and the input range. 0 to 55°C For specification details, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual. Overall accuracy ±1.0°C Cold junction temperature ±2.0°C if the input value is in the range from -150°C to -100°C F compensation error FX

±3.0°C if the input value is in the range from -200°C to -150°C 3U

Time required for -4DA-ADP 250ms(Sampling period) conversion

zWhen type K (input mode 2) zWhen type K (input mode 4) is set: is set: +1300 +2400 G FX 3G -1DA-BD Digital output

Input characteristics Digital output

-100°C -100°F H

0 +1300°C 0 +2400°F FX

Temperature Temperature 3U

-100 -100 -3A-ADP

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs. Channels are insulated from each other. I -ADP Number of I/O points FX 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) 3U

occupied -4AD-PT

*1. For FX3U-4LC, the rated temperature range, digital output value, and resolution depend on the selected sensor and mode. *2. For a detailed description of the micro voltage input, refer to the FX3U-4LC User's Manual. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-51 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number Common Items 5.1 PLC Main Unit

5. Version Number

5.1 PLC Main Unit

5.1.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method

The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT" indicated on the front of the product. 1. Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product. Example nameplate (manufacture's serial number : 1010001)

Right side

* Actual product nameplate differs from the example shown above.

9Z0001 1 0 10001

Control number Control number Month (Example: Dec.): Month (Example: Jan.): 1 to 9 = January to September, 1 to 9 = January to September, X = October, Y = November, Z = December X = October, Y = November, Z = December Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year

A-52 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number Common Items 5.1 PLC Main Unit A

2. Checking the front of the product Common Items The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number "LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product. The "LOT" indication is adopted for products manufactured at the following times. Main unit "LOT" indication adoption time FX3U(C) Series PLC January 2009 and later B FX FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later FX 3UC 3U

3GC -4AD

FX Series PLC January 2012 and later (From first product) -4AD

Example: FX3U-48MR/ES C FX 3U -4AD-ADP

D FX

3G -2AD-BD 9Z 101

Month (Example: Dec.): Month (Example: Jan.): 1 to 9 = January to September, 1 to 9 = January to September, X = October, Y = November, Z = December X = October, Y = November, Z = December E Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year FX 3U -4DA 5.1.2 Version check

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. F D8001 2 4 1 0 0 FX 3U

PLC type and -4DA-ADP version number Version data (Example: Ver. 1.00)

PLC type Example: 24 = FX3U/FX3UC series ( 26 = FX3G/FX3GC series ) G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-53 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number Common Items 5.2 Special adapter

5.2 Special adapter

5.2.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method

1. Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the left side of the product.

Example: FX3U-4DA-ADP (manufacture's serial number: 1010001)

Left side

S/N 1010001

* Actual product nameplate differs from the example shown above.

9Z0001 1 0 10001

A-54 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) Common Items 6.1 How to Use the Manuals A Common Items 6. Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment)

This chapter describes the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC main unit instruction manual and the B FX various manuals of analog products. FX 3UC 3U -4AD 6.1 How to Use the Manuals -4AD

Various analog products can be connected to the FX Series PLC to control the analog inputs and outputs. C FX

PLC 3U -4AD-ADP

For PLC wiring and installation: •HARDWARE MANUAL Supplied (This manual is supplied with the product.) •User's Manual - Hardware Edition D

Supplied separately FX 3G

For sequence programs: -2AD-BD

•Programming manual Supplied separately E FX 3U -4DA

Analog products Depending on the product type, the "Installation Manual" or the "User's Manual" is supplied with the product. For a detailed description, refer to the separate manual "User's Manual - Analog Control Edition" as F

described below: FX

For installation and parts identification: 3U -4DA-ADP •Installation Manual Supplied (For a detailed description of the programming method, refer to the separate manual.)

For installation, parts identification, use, and examples of programs: •User's Manual Supplied G (Necessary information is in the user's manual, but for a detailed description, FX refer to the separate manual.) 3G -1DA-BD

Analog control H FX 3U

Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input -3A-ADP

For use of each analog control product: This •User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Supplied separately manual I -ADP For each analog product, use this manual for details on wiring/setup details, example FX

programs, and troubleshooting methods. 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-55 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals

6.2 Description of Related Manuals

The main manuals necessary for the use of analog products are described below. These manuals are classified into two groups: manuals necessary for the PLC main unit, and manuals necessary for analog products. The manuals specified as "supplied separately" are not supplied with the products. Other manuals are supplied with the corresponding products.

6.2.1 Analog control manuals

The following manuals are common manuals that can be used for any of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series analog products.

Supplied with Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Supplied This manual describes the details of the FX3G/FX3U/ Series User’s Manual JY997D16701 separately FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC analog products. - Analog Control Edition (This manual)

6.2.2 Manuals related to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC main unit

For a detailed description of the commands to be used for the sequence programs, refer to the programming manual. For a detailed description of the hardware, such as wiring of the PLC main unit, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

Supplied with Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately FX3G Series PLC This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3G Series Supplied with JY997D33401 hardware of the FX3G Series PLC main unit, such as HARDWARE MANUAL product specifications, wiring, and installation. This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3G Series User’s Manual Supplied FX3G Series PLC main unit and various items for the JY997D31301 - Hardware Edition separately hardware, such as extension specifications, wiring, and installation. FX3U Series PLC This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3U Series Supplied with JY997D18801 hardware of the FX3U Series PLC main unit, such as HARDWARE MANUAL product specifications, wiring, and installation. This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3U Series User’s Manual Supplied FX3U Series PLC main unit and various items for the JY997D16501 - Hardware Edition separately hardware, such as extension specifications, wiring, and installation. FX3GC Series PLC This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3GC Series Supplied with JY997D45201 hardware of the FX3GC Series PLC main unit, such as HARDWARE MANUAL product specifications, wiring, and installation. This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3GC Series User’s Manual Supplied FX3GC Series PLC main unit and various items for the JY997D45401 - Hardware Edition separately hardware, such as extension specifications, wiring, and installation.

A-56 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals A

Supplied with Common Items Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately FX3UC Series PLC The input/output specifications and the wiring and installation methods for the FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLC are B FX FX 3UC 3UC

FX (D, DS, DSS) Series Supplied with excerpted from the FX Series User's Manual (for 3UC 3U JY997D28601 HARDWARE MANUAL product Hardware). -4AD -4AD For details, refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual (for Hardware). This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 Supplied with JY997D31601 hardware of the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 PLC main unit, such HARDWARE MANUAL product C

as specifications, wiring, and installation. FX

Provides detailed information on the hardware, such as 3U FX3UC Series User’s Manual Supplied -4AD-ADP JY997D28701 the input/output specifications and detailed wiring, - Hardware Edition separately installation, and maintenance methods for the FX3UC PLC.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC This manual describes the basic and application D

Series Programming Manual Supplied FX JY997D16601 commands necessary for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC - Basic & Applied Instruction separately 3G

Series PLC. -2AD-BD Edition MELSEC-Q/L/F Supplied Programming methods, specifications, functions, etc. Structured Programming SH-080782 separately required to create structured programs. Manual (Fundamentals) FXCPU Structured E Supplied Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured projects FX

Programming Manual JY997D26001 3U separately of GX Works2. [Device & Common] -4DA FXCPU Structured Supplied Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of Programming Manual JY997D34701 separately GX Works2. [Basic & Applied Instruction] FXCPU Structured F

Supplied Application functions provided in structured projects of FX Programming Manual JY997D34801 separately GX Works2. 3U

[Application Functions] -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-57 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals

6.2.3 Manuals of analog units

The manuals of various analog units are described below:

Supplied with Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately Analog input unit

This manual describes the FX3G-2AD-BD analog input FX3G-2AD-BD Supplied with JY997D33501 expansion board hardware, such as specifications and INSTALLATION MANUAL product installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4AD analog input FX3U-4AD Supplied with JY997D20701 special function block hardware, such as specifications INSTALLATION MANUAL product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-ADP analog input FX3U-4AD-ADP Supplied with JY997D13901 special adapter hardware, such as specifications and USER’S MANUAL product installation.

This manual describes the FX2NC-4AD analog input FX2NC-4AD Supplied with JY997D07801 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S MANUAL product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-8AD analog input FX2N-8AD Supplied with JY992D86001 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S MANUAL product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-4AD analog input FX2N-4AD Supplied with JY992D65201 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S GUIDE product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-2AD analog input FX2N-2AD Supplied with JY992D74701 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S GUIDE product and installation, and also describes various programs. Analog output unit

This manual describes the FX3G-1DA-BD analog output FX3G-1DA-BD Supplied with JY997D33601 expansion board hardware, such as specifications and INSTALLATION MANUAL product installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4DA analog output FX3U-4DA Supplied with JY997D20801 special function block hardware, such as specifications INSTALLATION MANUAL product and installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4DA-ADP analog output FX3U-4DA-ADP Supplied with JY997D14001 special adapter hardware, such as specifications and USER’S MANUAL product installation.

This manual describes the FX2NC-4DA analog output FX2NC-4DA Supplied with JY997D07601 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S MANUAL product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-4DA analog output FX2N-4DA Supplied with JY992D65901 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S GUIDE product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-2DA analog output FX2N-2DA Supplied with JY992D74901 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S GUIDE product and installation, and also describes various programs. Analog input/output unit

This manual describes the FX3U-3A-ADP analog input/ FX3U-3A-ADP Supplied with JY997D35601 output special adapter hardware, such as specifications USER’S MANUAL product and installation.

This manual describes the FX2N-5A analog input/output FX2N-5A Supplied with JY997D11401 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S MANUAL product and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX0N-3A analog input/output FX0N-3A Supplied with JY992D49001 special function block hardware, such as specifications USER’S GUIDE product and installation, and also describes various programs.

A-58 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction (Types, Contents, and Obtainment) Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals A Common Items

Supplied with Document product or Manual type Description number supplied separately Temperature sensor unit B FX FX

This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP platinum 3UC 3U FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP Supplied with JY997D14701 resistance thermometer input special adapter hardware, -4AD USER’S MANUAL product -4AD such as specifications and installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP Supplied with JY997D29101 platinum resistance thermometer input special adapter USER’S MANUAL product hardware, such as specifications and installation. C This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP Supplied with 3U

JY997D29201 resistance thermometer input special adapter hardware, -4AD-ADP USER’S MANUAL product such as specifications and installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Supplied with JY997D14801 thermocouple input special adapter hardware, such as USER’S MANUAL product specifications and installation. D This manual describes the FX2N-4AD-PT platinum FX FX2N-4AD-PT Supplied with resistance thermometer input special function block 3G JY992D65601 -2AD-BD USER’S GUIDE product hardware, such as specifications and installation, and also describes various programs.

This manual describes the FX2N-4AD-TC thermocouple FX2N-4AD-TC Supplied with input special function block hardware, such as JY992D65501 USER’S GUIDE product specifications and installation, and also describes various E FX

programs. 3U -4DA This manual describes the FX3U-4LC temperature FX3U-4LC Supplied with JY997D38901 adjustment special function block hardware, such as INSTALLATION MANUAL product specifications and installation.

This manual describes the FX3U-4LC temperature FX3U-4LC Supplied adjustment special function block hardware, such as F

JY997D39101 FX USER’S MANUAL separately specifications and installation, and also describes various 3U

programs. -4DA-ADP

This manual describes the FX2N-2LC temperature FX2N-2LC Supplied with JY992D85601 adjustment special function block hardware, such as USER’S GUIDE product specifications and installation. This manual describes the FX2N-2LC temperature G FX2N-2LC Supplied adjustment special function block hardware, such as FX

JY992D85801 3G USER’S MANUAL separately specifications and installation, and also describes various -1DA-BD programs.

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

A-59 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals

7. Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual

1. Main unit Abbreviation, generic name Description PLC Generic name for the FX0, FX0S, FX1S, FX0N, FX1N, FX1, FX2(FX), FX2N, FX3G, FX Series PLC FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC Series PLC FX3G Series Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC FX3G Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC main unit FX3U Series Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC FX3U Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC main unit FX3GC Series Generic name for the FX3GC Series PLC FX3GC Series PLC or Generic name for the FX3GC Series PLC main unit main unit FX3UC Series Generic name for the FX3UC Series PLC FX3UC Series PLC or Generic name for the FX3UC Series PLC main unit main unit

2. Expansion board and special adapter Abbreviation, generic name Description Expansion board Generic name for analog expansion board, communication expansion board, special adapter connection expansion board and variable analog potentiometer expansion board. Expansion board The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of the main unit. To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system. Analog expansion board Generic name for 2AD-BD, 1DA-BD 2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD 1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD Communication expansion board Generic name for 232BD, 422BD, 485BD, and USBBD. 232BD FX3U-232-BD, FX3G-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD, FX1N-232-BD 422BD FX3U-422-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX2N-422-BD, FX1N-422-BD 485BD FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD USBBD FX3U-USB-BD Variable analog potentiometer Generic name for 8AV-BD expansion board 8AV-BD FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD Special adapter connection board Generic name for CNVBD. or connector conversion board CNVBD FX3U-CNV-BD, FX2N-CNV-BD, FX1N-CNV-BD Special adapter Generic name for high-speed input special adapter, high-speed output special adapter, communication special adapter, CF card special adapter, and analog special adapter. Special adapter The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of the main unit. To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system. High-speed input/output special Generic name for high-speed input special adapter and high-speed output adapter special adapter. 2HSY-ADP FX3U-2HSY-ADP 4HSX-ADP FX3U-4HSX-ADP

A-60 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals A

Abbreviation, generic name Description Common Items Communication special adapter Generic name for communication special adapter. 232ADP FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX2NC-232ADP, FX0N-232ADP, FX-232ADP 485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB), FX2NC-485ADP, FX0N-485ADP, FX-485ADP CF card special adapter Generic name for CF card special adapter. CF-ADP FX3U-CF-ADP B FX FX

Analog special adapter Generic name for analog special adapter. 3UC 3U -4AD 4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP -4AD 4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP 3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP C PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX 3U

PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP -4AD-ADP TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter or connection Generic name for CNVADP conversion adapter D FX

CNVADP FX3G-CNV-ADP 3G -2AD-BD 3. Extension unit Abbreviation, generic name Description Voltage/current input Generic name for the FX3U Series extension unit, FX3UC Series extension unit, E FX

FX2N Series extension unit, FX2NC Series extension unit, and FX0N Series 3U

extension unit. -4DA Extension unit The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of the main unit. To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system. FX3U Series extension unit Generic name for FX3U Series special function block. F FX3UC Series extension unit Generic name for FX3UC Series special function block. FX 3U

Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, FX2N Series -4DA-ADP FX2N Series extension unit input/output extension block, FX2N Series special function unit, and FX2N Series special function block. Generic name for FX2NC Series input/output extension block and FX2NC Series FX2NC Series extension unit special function block. G

Generic name for FX0N Series input/output extension block and FX0N Series FX FX0N Series extension unit special function block. 3G -1DA-BD Generic name for FX3U Series special function block, FX3UC Series special function block, FX2N Series special function unit, FX2N Series special function Special function unit/block block, FX2NC Series special function block, and FX0N Series special function block. FX3U Series special H FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3U-4LC, FX3U-2HC, FX3U-20SSC-H, FX3U-64CCL FX

function block 3U

FX3UC Series special -3A-ADP FX3UC-4AD function block FX2N Series special FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM, FX2N-1RM-E-SET, FX2N-1RM-SET function unit FX2N-232IF, FX2N-16CCL-M, FX2N-32CCL, FX2N-32ASI-M, FX2N-2AD, I -ADP FX2N-4AD, FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC, FX2N-2DA, FX 3U

FX2N Series special FX2N-4DA, FX2N-5A, FX2N-1HC, FX2N-1PG-E, FX2N-1PG, FX2N-10PG -4AD-PT function block The number of connectable units, however, depends on the type of main unit. To check the number of connectable units, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system. FX2NC Series special FX2NC-4AD, FX2NC-4DA, FX2NC-1HC J -ADP function block FX

FX0N Series special 3U

FX0N-3A -4AD-PTW function block

A-61 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual Common Items 6.2 Description of Related Manuals

4. Peripheral unit Abbreviation, generic name Description Peripheral unit Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel, Peripheral unit and display units. Programming tool Programming tool Generic name for programming software, and handy programming panel. Programming software Generic name for Programming software. Generic name for SWDNC-GXW2-J and SWDNC-GXW2-E programming GX Works2 software packages. Generic name for SWD5C-GPPW-J and SWD5C-GPPW-E programming GX Developer software packages. Handy programming panels Generic name for the following models (HPP) FX-30P, FX-20P(-E)-SET0, FX-20P(-E), FX-10P-SET0, FX-10P(-E)

5. Manual Abbreviation, generic name Description FX3G hardware manual FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition FX3U hardware manual FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition FX3GC hardware manual FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition FX3UC hardware manual FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic and Applied Programming manual Instruction Edition

A-62 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] B. FX3U-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) D FX

FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

Foreword This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD I -ADP special extension block (4-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to FX

install or use the unit. 3U Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward -4AD-PT it to the end user.

B-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input)

B-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD. B FX For common descriptions of the FX3U-4AD and FX3UC-4AD, these model names are referred to as the 4AD. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions

The FX3U-4AD is an analog special function block which is connectable with the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC C

Series PLC used to capture 4-ch voltage/current data. The FX3UC-4AD cannot be connected to the FX3G/ FX

FX3U Series PLC. 3U -4AD-ADP 1) Up to 8*1 units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. (including the other special function blocks). 2) Either "voltage input" or "current input" can be specified for each channel. 3) The A/D conversion values will be stored in the 4AD buffer memory (BFM). D FX

4) Set the digital filter to read out stable A/D conversion values. 3G -2AD-BD 5) For each channel, up to 1,700 A/D conversion values can be stored as history data.

System Point and section to be referred to E FX

Up to 8*1 units connect to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC 3U (including other types of special function blocks) -4DA Number of connectable units

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to F Section 1.3. FX • • • • • • • • • 3U -4DA-ADP

FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC Analog data For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. FX 3G -1DA-BD

For a detailed description of analog data reading programs, refer to Chapter 4, 6, and 7. For a detailed description of H Program Buffer memory the buffer memory, refer to FX

Transmission direction Section 5.3, and Section 5.4. 3U FROM(FNC 78) BFM#0 -3A-ADP TO(FNC 79) To use FROM/TO instruction or to directly specify the BFM, BFM direct refer to Section 5.2. specification(U\G)*2 BFM#6999

Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC User's Manual - Hardware Edition to I -ADP check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. FX 3U -4AD-PT *1. Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC. *2. This function is only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting to use the 4AD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Version number of compatible PLC • Version number of compatible programming tool Refer to Chapter 2.

Check of specifications Specifications: • Operation environment Refer to the common • Performance specifications pages. • Input characteristics

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the analog control common pages.) Refer to Chapter 3. • Selection of units

Wiring Wiring: • Power supply line • Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4.

Analog data reading (test program) Input mode specification: • Input mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5.

Buffer memory (BFM) check Buffer memory: • Buffer memory read/write method • List of buffer memories Refer to Chapter 6. • Details of buffer memory

Adjustment of input characteristics Adjustment of input characteristics: • Input characteristics change procedure

Refer to Chapter 7.

Program edit Program edit: • Basic program • Convenient function program

If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting."

B-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers A 1.3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers Common Items

FX3U-4AD is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 FX 3UC 3U

FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD -4AD FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product)

FX3UC-4AD is compatible with the following PLC. C Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX 3U

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 -4AD-ADP FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product)

1. Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. D → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. FX 3G 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number -2AD-BD The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the product. → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1. E FX 3U -4DA 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

Use a programming tool with the following version number to create 4AD programs for the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/ FX3UC Series PLC. F Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to FX each PLC version. 3U -4DA-ADP Some instructions and devices are not available in inapplicable versions.

1. Japanese versions

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) G FX

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 3G GX Works2 -1DA-BD Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-J GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *1 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) H

FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later FX Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) 3U

FX3G PLC -3A-ADP GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later *2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J I -ADP Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX

FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later 3U Model selection: FX3G(C)*3 (Offline mode) -4AD-PT FX3GC PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) J -ADP FX

*1. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. 3U -4AD-PTW *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

B-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-E GX Developer Ver. 8.18U or later *1 SWD5C-GPPW-E Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) FX3G PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later *2 SWDNC-GXW2-E Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-E Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*3 (Offline mode) FX3GC PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-E Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) *1. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

B-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 4AD. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

Ambient 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating 3U -4AD-ADP temperature -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) when stored Relative 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating humidity Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude 2 D (Hz) (m/s ) (mm) FX

10 times of testing in 3G

Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 each direction (X-, Y-, -2AD-BD DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - and Z-axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 - 57 - 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 - 150 9.8 - E Shock FX 2 147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z 3U resistance*1 -4DA Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min F voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal FX 3U

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working G

Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust FX atmosphere 3G -1DA-BD Working *4 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. The direct mounting method cannot be used with FX3UC-4AD. H When this block is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, the direct mounting method cannot be FX used. 3U -3A-ADP *3. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding I -ADP Best condition Good condition Not allowed FX 3U → For a detailed description of grounding, refer to Section 3.5. -4AD-PT *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 4AD; 4AD may malfunction. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

FX3U-4AD

Item Specifications A/D conversion 24V DC ±10%, 90mA circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block.) 5V DC, 110mA CPU drive power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply power externally.)

FX3UC-4AD

Item Specifications A/D conversion 24V DC ±10%, 80mA circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the power connector.) 5V DC, 100mA CPU drive power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply the power.)

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Voltage input Current input -10V to +10V DC -20mA to +20mA DC, 4mA to 20mA DC Analog input range (Input resistance: 200kΩ) (Input resistance: 250Ω) Offset*1 -10V to +9V*2 -20mA to +17mA*3 Gain*1 -9V to +10V*2 -17mA to +30mA*3 Absolute maximum ±15V ±30mA input Digital output With sign, 16bits, binary With sign, 15bits, binary

*4 0.32mV (20V × 1/ 64,000) 1.25μA (40mA × 1/ 32,000) Resolution 2.5mV (20V × 1/8000) 5.00μA (40mA × 1/8000) Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.5% (±200μA) for 40mA full scale ±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale Same accuracy (±200μA) for 4mA to 20mA input Overall accuracy Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale ±1% (±400μA) for 40mV full scale Same accuracy (±400μA) for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for 500μs × number of selected channels A/D conversion (If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s): 5ms × number of selected channels) The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the analog input area from the power supply unit. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) points occupied

*1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In the direct indication mode, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 3 mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30 mA *4. If 1 or more channels use the digital filter(s), the time required for A/D conversion will be "5 ms × number of selected channels."

B-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 A 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 Common Items

For the 4AD, there are two types of input characteristics: voltage (-10 to +10V) and current (4 to 20mA, -20 to +20mA) input characteristics. The input characteristics depend on the set input mode as described below. For each input range, there are 3 input modes. B FX 1. Voltage input characteristics [-10 to +10V] (Input mode: 0 to 2) FX 3UC 3U

Set input mode: 2 -4AD Set input mode: 0 Set input mode: 1 -4AD Input type: Voltage input Input type: Voltage input Input type: Voltage input (analog value direct indication) Analog input range: -10 to +10V Analog input range: -10 to +10V Analog input range: -10 to +10V Digital output range: -32000 to +32000 Digital output range: -4000 to +4000 Digital output range: -10000 to +10000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible C FX

Digital value Digital value Digital value 3U -4AD-ADP +32640 +4080 +10200 +32000 +4000 +10000 +10.2V Input +10.2V Input +10.2V Input voltage -10V 0 voltage -10V 0 voltage -10V 0 D +10V +10V +10V FX 3G -2AD-BD -10.2V -10.2V -10.2V -32000 -4000 -10000 -32640 -4080 -10200 E

2. Current input characteristics [4 to 20mA] (Input mode: 3 to 5) FX

Set input mode: 5 3U Set input mode: 3 Set input mode: 4 -4DA Input type: Current input Input type: Current input Input type: Current input (analog value direct indication) Analog input range: 4 to 20mA Analog input range: 4 to 20 mA Analog input range: 4 to 20 mA Digital output range: 0 to 16000 Digital output range: 0 to 4000 Digital output range: 4000 to 20000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible F FX

Digital value Digital value Digital value 3U -4DA-ADP 16400 4100 20400

16000 4000 20000 G FX 3G -1DA-BD 4000 20.4 mA 20.4 mA 20.4 20.4 mA

0 4mA 20mA Current 0 4mA 20mA Current 0 4mA 20mA Current input input input H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0

3. Current input characteristics [-20 to +20mA] (Input mode: 6 to 8) Set input mode: 8 Set input mode: 6 Set input mode: 7 Input type: Current input Input type: Current input Input type: Current input (analog value direct indication) Analog input range: -20 to +20mA Analog input range: -20 to +20mA Analog input range: -20 to +20mA Digital output range: -16000 to +16000 Digital output range: -4000 to +4000 Digital output range: -20000 to +20000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible

Digital value Digital value Digital value +16320 +4080 +20400 +16000 +4000 +20000 +20.4mA +20.4mA Current +20.4mA Current Current Input -20mA 0 Input -20mA 0 Input -20mA 0 +20mA +20mA +20mA -20.4mA -20.4mA -20.4mA -16000 -4000 -20000 -16320 -4080 -20400

B-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 Input Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 4AD wiring. B FX Observe the following cautions when wiring the 4AD. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

Do not wire vacant terminals externally. 3G Doing so may damage the product. -2AD-BD Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) to the grounding terminal on the main unit. Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions. E Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise: FX 3U

- Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input/output cable together with or lay it close to the main -4DA circuit, high-voltage line, or load line. Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit, high-voltage line, or load line. - Ground the shield of the analog input/output cable at one point on the signal receiving side. However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems. F Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions. FX 3U

Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or -4DA-ADP damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. - Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires. - Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends. G - Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size. FX 3G

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product. - The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual. - Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual. H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

FX3U-4AD

Signal Application 24+ 24V DC power supply 24- Ground terminal V+ VI- Channel-1 analog input I+ FG V+ Channel-2 analog input VI- I+ FG V+ Channel-3 analog input VI- I+ FG V+ Channel-4 analog input VI- I+

FX3UC-4AD

FX3UC-4AD Signal Application

PW V1+ V1+

I1+ I1+ 24V Channel-1 analog input

COM1 COM1

A/D SLD SLD

V2+ V2+

I2+ I2+ Channel-2 analog input

COM2 COM2

SLD SLD • • Do not connect any lines. • • V3+ V3+

I3+ I3+ Channel-3 analog input COM3 COM3

SLD SLD

V4+ V4+

I4+ I4+ Channel-4 analog input

COM4 COM4

SLD SLD Ground terminal

B-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

3.2.1 Power cable (FX3UC-4AD)

The power crossover cable (type "C" shown in the following table) is supplied with the FX3UC-4AD. B FX To connect the power cable, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit. FX 3UC 3U

There are 3 types of power cables as shown in the following table. Types "A" and "B" are supplied with the -4AD main unit, and type "C" is supplied with the input extension blocks or the special function blocks for FX3GC/ -4AD FX3UC Series. Type Application Model Length Cable supplied with 1m 2NC C A Power cable for main unit FX -100MPCB FX (3’ 3") FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC main unit 3U

Input power cable for input 1m -4AD-ADP B FX2NC-100BPCB extension block (3’ 3") Input power crossover cable 0.1m Input extension block for FX2NC Series C FX2NC-10BPCB1 for input extension block (0’ 3") Special function block for FX3UC/FX2NC Series D The crossover cable (type "C") can skip up to 4 16-point output blocks to connect units. FX 3G

If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input block, use cable type "B". -2AD-BD

To use self-made power cables, use the following wire rods and connectors: Specifications/model E 2 FX Wire size AWG24 (0.2mm ) 3U Crimp-style terminal 1602-0069 (manufactured by Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) -4DA For main unit 51030-0330 (manufactured by Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Housing For input extension block 51030-0230 (manufactured by Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

Supply the 24V DC power to FX3UC-4AD via the power supply connector. F FX 3U 3.2.2 Cable (FX3U-4AD) -4DA-ADP

The FX3U-4AD terminal block is designed for M3 screws. The end disposal of the cable shows blow. Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. G Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. FX 3G

Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. -1DA-BD When one wire is connected to one terminal Terminal Crimp 3.2(0.13") screw terminal 6.2mm(0.24") H FX

or less 3U -3A-ADP 3.2(0.13") 6.2mm(0.24") Terminal or less When two wires are connected to one terminal I -ADP FX

3.2(0.13") 3U

6.2mm(0.24") Terminal Crimp -4AD-PT or less screw terminal 6.3mm(0.25") or more

3.2(0.13") J -ADP FX

6.2mm(0.24") Terminal 3U or less 6.3mm(0.25") -4AD-PTW or more

B-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque

3.2.3 Cable (FX3UC-4AD)

Use the following cables to connect with counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below. 1. Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size (stranded/ Tightening Termination single-wire) torque 2 2 To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable Single wire 0.3mm to 0.5mm (AWG22 to 20) and then twist the core before connection. To connect a single-wire cable, peel the cover off the 2 Double wire 0.3mm (AWG22) cable before connection. 0.3mm2 to 0.5mm2 0.22 to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal (AWG22 to 20) 0.25N•m (recommended terminal) with (Refer to the external AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation view of rod terminal Caulking tool sleeve shown in the following CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact figure.) (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact)

*1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve. Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N•m. Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

To directly terminate end of stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" cannot protrude. - Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. 9mm To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve: (0.35") If the cable sheath is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable Insulation sleeve Contact area into the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable (Crimp area) while referring to the external view. 8mm (0.31") Manufacturer Model Caulking tool 2.6mm 14mm (0.1") CRIMPFOX 6*3 (0.55") Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4)

*3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a purchased small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure.

Note: If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not The head be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque should be shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an straight. appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")). 0.4mm 2.5mm Manufacturer Model (0.01") (0.09") Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5

B-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit A 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit Common Items

3.3.1 FX3U-4AD

Below are shown examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series B FX PLC. FX 3UC 3U -4AD

1) Sink input [- common] wiring -4AD

AC power 100 to 240 V C FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Class-D grounding L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24- D FX

+15V 3G -2AD-BD

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (main unit) -15V FX3U-4AD E Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "24V" terminal. FX 3U -4DA

2) Source input [+ common] wiring F

AC power FX

100 to 240 V 3U -4DA-ADP

Class-D grounding G FX

L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24- 3G -1DA-BD

+15V

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC H (main unit) -15V FX 3U

FX3U-4AD -3A-ADP

Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "0V" terminal.

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit

3.3.2 FX3UC-4AD

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

Terminal block Terminal block

FX3UC Series PLC FX2NC Series PLC FX3UC-4AD FX3UC-4AD (Main unit) (Input extension block*2)

+15V +15V

-15V -15V Power Power Power crossover Power crossover crossover connector connector connector connector Power connector 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24+ Power Power Black Red Green connector Black Red Black Red connector Black Red Black Red Black Red

Class-D FX2NC-10BPCB1 FX2NC-10BPCB1 grounding Power crossover cable Power crossover cable

24V DC Fuse FX2NC-100BPCB Power cable*1

For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External wiring". *1. The FX3UC-MT/D and FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) are supplied together with power cable. *2. The FX2NC-EX-DS and FX2NC-16EX-T-DS do not have a power connector, and receive power from the input connector.

3.3.3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables

Ground the " " terminal and " " terminal to the Class - D grounding line (100 Ω or less) together with the ground terminal of the main unit. To perform crossover wiring to connect the power line from FX3UC-4AD to a succeeding extension block, remove the resin cover from the power crossover connector using nippers. For the timing of power-on/off when using an external power supply, see the following manual of the connected PLC. → Refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. → Refer to the FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. → Refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

B-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.4 Analog Input Line A 3.4 Analog Input Line Common Items

The analog input type, "voltage input "or "current input", can be selected for each channel.

3.4.1 FX3U-4AD B FX FX 3UC 3U

External power supply FX3U-4AD -4AD wiring -4AD 24+ +15V 24V DC *1 24- -15V C Class-D grounding FX

*2 3U

If current input is -4AD-ADP selected ch 6.8k *3 Ω ch V+ *4 250Ω I+ D FX

VI- 3G

FG 200kΩ -2AD-BD If voltage input is *2 selected ch *3 6.8kΩ ch V+ *5 250Ω E

I+ FX 3U

VI- -4DA 200kΩ FG *2

ch : represents the channel number. F FX 3U

*1. For FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24V DC service power supply is also available. -4DA-ADP *2. The [FG] terminal and the [ ] terminal are connected internally. There is no “FG” terminal for ch1. When using ch1, connect directly to the [ ] terminal. *3. Use a 2-core twisted shield wire for analog input line, and separate it from other power lines or G inductive lines. FX 3G

*4. For the current input, short-circuit the [V+] terminal and the [I+] terminal. -1DA-BD *5. If there is voltage ripple in the input voltage or there is noise in the external wiring, connect a capacitor of approximately 0.1 to 0.47μF 25 V. H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 3.5 Grounding

3.4.2 FX3UC-4AD

If current input is FX3UC-4AD selected Terminal block *1 6.8kΩ ch V+ *2 250Ω I+ 200kΩ COM SLD *3 If voltage input is selected

*1 6.8kΩ ch V+ 250Ω I+ 200kΩ COM SLD

*4 •

Class-D grounding

V+, I+, ch : represents the channel number.

*1. Use the 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines, and separate the analog input lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines. *2. To use the current input, be sure to short circuit the line between the V + terminal and the I + terminal ( : channel number). *3. The SLD and " " terminals are connected to each other inside. *4. Do not connect any lines to the "•" terminal.

3.5 Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below. The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. Independent grounding should be performed for best results. When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following figure. → For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of each Series.

Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

Use the following grounding wire.

FX3U-4AD AWG14 (2mm2) FX3UC-4AD AWG22-20 (0.3 to 0.5mm2)

The PLC grounding point should be close, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

B-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Analog Input Procedures A Common Items

4. Analog Input

This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary to readout the 4AD analog data. B FX Follow the procedure below to confirm that the analog data can be properly read out. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 4.1 Analog Input Procedures C 1 Unit number check FX 3U

Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left. -4AD-ADP When units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned. Check the unit number assigned to the 4AD. Unit Unit Unit number: 0 number: 1 number: 2 D FX 3G -2AD-BD Main unit Input/output Input/output Special Special Special (FX3U Series extension extension function block function block function unit PLC) block block E FX 3U -4DA 2 Input mode (BFM #0) setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected, set the input mode (BFM #0) for each channel. F FX

Use hexadecimal numbers for input mode setting. Set the corresponding channel digit to the input 3U -4DA-ADP mode setting value specified in the following table: H ch4 ch1 G ch3 ch2 FX 3G -1DA-BD Setting Analog input Input mode Digital output range value range 0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -4000 to +4000 H FX

Voltage input 3U 2 -10V to +10V -10000 to +10000 Analog value direct indication mode -3A-ADP 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 Current input mode 5 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Analog value direct indication mode I -ADP FX

6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -16000 to +16000 3U -4AD-PT 7 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -4000 to +4000 Current input mode 8 -20mA to +20mA -20000 to +20000 Analog value direct indication mode F Channel not used J -ADP FX

→ For a detailed description of the standard input characteristics, refer to Section 2.4. 3U → For a detailed description of the input mode (BFM #0), refer to Subsection 5.4.1. -4AD-PTW

B-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Analog Input Procedures

3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to read analog signals. While referring to step 2, set the input mode "H****". While referring to step 1, set the unit number in *1 - Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs)

Input mode (step 2) Unit number (step 1) Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 H**** U\G0 Specify the input mode (BFM #0) for channels MOV P 1 to 4. RUN monitor M8000 T0 K50

T0 5 seconds after starting the PLC, the digital FNC 16 U\G10 D0 K4 values of channels 1 to 4 (BFM #10 through BMOV #13) will be read out to D0 to D3.

Unit number (step 1)

*1. Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs.

4 Sequence program transfer and data register check 1) Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC. 2) The 4AD analog data input mode will be stored in data registers (D0 to D3) of the PLC. 3) Check that the data is stored in D0 to D3. → If the data is not properly stored, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting."

B-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory A Common Items

5. Buffer Memory (BFM)

This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory -4AD

1. Assignment of unit numbers Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left. C When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned. FX 3U -4AD-ADP When connected to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC

Unit Unit Unit number: 0 number: 1 number: 2 D FX

Input/output Input/output 3G Main unit extension Special Special extension Special -2AD-BD block function block function block block function unit

E FX

When connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC 3U -4DA Unit number: 0 (Incorporated Unit Unit Unit CC-Link/LT) number: 1 number: 2 number: 3 F

Main unit Input/output Input/output FX Special Special Special (FX3UC-32MT extension extension 3U function block function block function unit -LT(-2)) block block -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory

2. Outline of buffer memory The analog signals input into the 4AD will be converted into digital values and then stored in the 4AD buffer memory. To switch the input mode between voltage input and current input, or to adjust the offset or gain, numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written/set in the 4AD buffer memory. To read/write data from/to the 4AD buffer memory, the buffer memory can be directly specified using the FROM/TO instruction or an applied instruction. Using this function, sequence programs can be easily created.

Main unit 4AD • BFM direct 4AD specification*1 • TO instruction Buffer memory • BFM direct • BFM direct specification*1 specification*1 • TO instruction Sequence Buffer • FROM instruction program memory Digital • BFM direct Digital value specification*1 value • FROM A/D A/D instruction conversion conversion

Analog data Analog data

Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc.

*1. Since buffer memory direct specification (U\G) can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction, programs can be created efficiently. (This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.) → For a detailed description of buffer memory reading/writing, refer to Section 5.2. → For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4.

B-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method A 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method Common Items

To read or write to the 4AD buffer memory, use the FROM/TO instructions or buffer memory direct specifications*1. *1 However, to use buffer memory direct specification , software compatible with FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs is required. B FX FX

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 3UC 3U -4AD → For a detailed description of software compatible with the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC, -4AD refer to Section 1.4.

5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U, FX3UC PLC only) C When directly specifying the buffer memory, specify the following device in the source or destination area of FX 3U

the applied instruction as follows: -4AD-ADP

U\G Enter a numeric value in Unit number (0 to 7) Buffer memory number (0 - 6999) D 1. Example 1 FX 3G

If the following program is created, data in buffer memory (BFM #10) of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data -2AD-BD (K10), and then the multiplication result will be output to data registers (D10, D11). READ command FNC 22 U1\G10 K10 D10 MUL E Multiplication result FX Unit number 3U Buffer memory number Multiplier -4DA 2. Example 2 If the following program is created, the value in data register (D20) is added to K10 and written to buffer memory (BFM #6) of unit 1. F WRITE command FX FNC 20 D20 K10 U1\G6 3U ADD -4DA-ADP Addition Unit number result ( Buffer memory number ) Augend Addend G 5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC PLC) FX 3G -1DA-BD 1. FROM instruction (Reading out BFM data to PLC) Use the FROM instruction to read the data from the buffer memory. In a sequence program, use this instruction as follows: READ command H FNC 78 K1 K10 D10 K1 FX FROM 3U -3A-ADP Number of transfer Unit number data points Buffer memory number Destination register If the above program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM #10 of unit No.1 to data register D10. I -ADP FX 3U

2. TO instruction (Writing PLC data into BFM) -4AD-PT Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory. In a sequence program, use this instruction as follows: WRITE command FNC 79 K1 K0 H3300 K1 TO J -ADP Number of transfer FX Unit number 3U

data points -4AD-PTW Buffer memory number Transfer source If the above program is created, 1 point of data (H3300) will be written to buffer memory BFM #0 of unit No.1. B-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

4AD incorporates the following buffer memories. → For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4 and subsequent sections.

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Hexadeci- Subsection *1 Input mode setting for channels 1 to 4 *2 H0000 at delivery #0 mal 5.4.1 #1 Not used ---- #2 Averaging time units for channel 1 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal

#3 Averaging time units for channel 2 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal Subsection #4 Averaging time units for channel 3 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal 5.4.2 #5 Averaging time units for channel 4 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal #6 Channel-1 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal #7 Channel-2 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal Subsection #8 Channel-3 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal 5.4.3 #9 Channel-4 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 K0 Decimal #10 Channel-1 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal

#11 Channel-2 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal Subsection #12 Channel-3 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal 5.4.4 #13 Channel-4 data (current data or average data) - - Decimal #14 to #18 Not used ---- Data change disable Disables adjustment of the following buffer memory locations: Input mode specification (BFM #0) To enable data Initialization function (BFM #20) change: K2080 Input characteristics writing (BFM #21) Subsection *1 To disable data K2080 at delivery Decimal #19 Convenient functions (BFM #22) 5.4.5 change: Value Offset data (BFM #41 to #44) other than K2080 Gain data (BFM #51 to #54) Automatic transfer-to data register specification (BFM #125 to #129) Data history sampling time setting (BFM #198) Initialization function: Set "K1" in this buffer memory to perform Subsection #20 initialization. At the completion of initialization, K0 or K1 K0 Decimal 5.4.6 buffer memory will be automatically reset to "K0". Input characteristics writing: Write the input characteristics offset/gain value. Hexadeci- Subsection #21 At the completion of writing, buffer memory will *3 H0000 mal 5.4.7 be automatically reset to "H0000" (b0 to b3: OFF). *1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain its data. *2. To specify the input mode of each channel, set each digit using hexadecimal numbers 0 to 8 and F. *3. Use b0 to b3.

B-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) A Common Items

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Convenient function setting: Convenient functions:Automatic send Hexadeci- Subsection *1 function, data addition, upper/lower limit *2 H0000 at delivery #22 mal 5.4.8 detection, abrupt change detection, peak B FX FX

value holding 3UC 3U -4AD

#23 to #25 Not used ---- -4AD Upper/lower limit value error status (Valid if b1 Hexadeci- Subsection #26 - H0000 of BFM #22 is set to ON) mal 5.4.9 Abrupt change detection status (Valid if b2 of Hexadeci- Subsection #27 - H0000 BFM #22 is set to ON) mal 5.4.10 C FX

Hexadeci- Subsection 3U

#28 Over-scale status - H0000 -4AD-ADP mal 5.4.11 Hexadeci- Subsection #29 Error status - H0000 mal 5.4.12 Subsection #30 Model code K2080 - K2080 Decimal 5.4.13 D FX

#31 to #40 Not used ---- 3G -2AD-BD #41*1 Channel-1 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Voltage input: K0 at delivery Decimal BFM #21 -10000 to *1 Channel-2 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) will be K0 at delivery Decimal #42 +9000*3 Subsection used for *1 Current input: 5.4.14 #43 Channel-3 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) writing K0 at delivery Decimal -20000 to data. *1 Channel-4 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) *4 K0 at delivery Decimal E #44 +17000 FX 3U

#45 to #50 Not used ---- -4DA

#51*1 Channel-1 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Voltage input: K5000 at delivery Decimal BFM #21 -9000 to *1 Channel-2 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) will be K5000 at delivery Decimal #52 +10000*3 Subsection used for *1 Current input: 5.4.14 #53 Channel-3 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) writing K5000 at delivery Decimal -17000 to F data. FX #54*1 Channel-4 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) *4 K5000 at delivery Decimal +30000 3U #55 to #60 Not used ---- -4DA-ADP Channel-1 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM #22 #61 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal is set to ON) Channel-2 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM #22 #62 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal is set to ON) Subsection G FX

Channel-3 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM #22 5.4.15 3G #63 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal is set to ON) -1DA-BD Channel-4 addition data (Valid if b0 of BFM #22 #64 -16000 to +16000 K0 Decimal is set to ON) #65 to #70 Not used ---- Minimum digital H Channel-1 lower limit value error setting (Valid if FX #71 value in input Decimal b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) 3U

range -3A-ADP Minimum digital Channel-2 lower limit value error setting (Valid if #72 From minimum value in input Decimal b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) digital value in range Subsection input range to Minimum digital 5.4.16 Channel-3 lower limit value error setting (Valid if upper limit value I -ADP #73 value in input Decimal FX b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) error setting value range 3U -4AD-PT Minimum digital Channel-4 lower limit value error setting (Valid if #74 value in input Decimal b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) range #75 to #80 Not used ---- J -ADP *1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain its data. FX

*2. Use b0 to b7. 3U *3. The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions: Gain value - Offset value ≥ 1000 -4AD-PTW *4. The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions: 30000 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 3000

B-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Channel-1 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital #81 Decimal (Valid if b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) value in input range Channel-2 upper limit value error setting From lower limit Maximum digital #82 value error setting Decimal (Valid if b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) value in input range Subsection value to maximum Channel-3 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital 5.4.16 #83 digital value in Decimal (Valid if b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) input range value in input range Channel-4 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital #84 Decimal (Valid if b1 of BFM #22 is set to ON) value in input range #85 to #90 Not used ---- Channel-1 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of #91 5% of full scale Decimal (Valid if b2 of BFM #22 is set to ON) full scale Channel-2 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of #92 5% of full scale Decimal (Valid if b2 of BFM #22 is set to ON) full scale Subsection Channel-3 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of 5.4.17 #93 5% of full scale Decimal (Valid if b2 of BFM #22 is set to ON) full scale Channel-4 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50% of #94 5% of full scale Decimal (Valid if b2 of BFM #22 is set to ON) full scale #95 to #98 Not used ---- Clear of upper/lower limit error data or abrupt Subsection #99 *1 H0000 - change error data 5.4.18 #100 Not used ---- Channel-1 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of #101 --Decimal BFM #22 is set to ON) Channel-2 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of #102 --Decimal BFM #22 is set to ON) Subsection Channel-3 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of 5.4.19 #103 --Decimal BFM #22 is set to ON) Channel-4 minimum peak value (Valid if b3 of #104 --Decimal BFM #22 is set to ON) #105 to #108 Not used ---- Hexadeci- Subsection #109 Minimum peak value resetting *3 H0000 mal 5.4.20 #110 Not used ---- Channel-1 maximum peak value (Valid if b3 #111 --Decimal of BFM #22 is set to ON) Channel-2 maximum peak value (Valid if b3 #112 --Decimal of BFM #22 is set to ON) Subsection Channel-3 maximum peak value (Valid if b3 5.4.19 #113 --Decimal of BFM #22 is set to ON) Channel-4 maximum peak value (Valid if b3 #114 --Decimal of BFM #22 is set to ON) #115 to #118 Not used ---- Hexadeci- Subsection #119 Maximum peak value resetting *3 H0000 mal 5.4.20 #120 to #124 Not used ---- Peak values (Minimum: BFM #101 to #104 / Maximum: #111 to #114) automatic transfer- Subsection *2 to first data register specification (Valid if b4 of 0 to 7992 K200 at delivery Decimal #125 5.4.21 BFM #22 is set to ON / Occupies of 8 consecutive points) *1. Use b0 to b2. *2. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain its data. *3. Use b0 to b3.

B-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) A BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Common Items Upper/lower limit error status data (BFM #26) Subsection *1 automatic transfer-to data register specification 0 to 7999 K208 at delivery Decimal #126 5.4.22 (Valid if b5 of BFM #22 is set to ON) Abrupt change detection status data (BFM #27) Subsection *1 automatic transfer-to data register specification 0 to 7999 K209 at delivery Decimal #127 5.4.23 B FX (Valid if b6 of BFM #22 is set to ON) FX Over-scale status data (BFM #28) automatic 3UC 3U -4AD

Subsection -4AD *1 transfer-to data register specification (Valid if b7 0 to 7999 K210 at delivery Decimal #128 5.4.24 of BFM #22 is set to ON) Error status data (BFM #29) automatic transfer- Subsection *1 to data register specification (Valid if b8 of BFM 0 to 7999 K211 at delivery Decimal #129 5.4.25 #22 is set to ON) C FX

#130 to #196 Not used ---- 3U

Selection of cyclic data update function (function Hexadeci- Subsection -4AD-ADP #197 *2 H0000 for data history) mal 5.4.26 Subsection *1 Data history sampling time setting (Unit: ms) 0 to 30000 K15000 Decimal #198 5.4.27 Hexadeci- Subsection D

#199 Data history resetting/stoppage *3 H0000 FX mal 5.4.28 3G

#200 Channel-1 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal -2AD-BD

~ ~ ~ ~ Decimal #1899 Channel-1 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal #1900 Channel-2 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal

~ ~ ~ ~ E

Decimal FX

#3599 Channel-2 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal 3U Subsection -4DA #3600 Channel-3 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal 5.4.29

~ ~ ~ ~ Decimal #5299 Channel-3 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal #5300 Channel-4 data history (initial value) - K0 Decimal F FX ~ ~ ~ ~

Decimal 3U -4DA-ADP #6999 Channel-4 data history (1,700th value) - K0 Decimal #7000 to #8063 System area ---- *1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain its data. *2. Use b0 to b3. G *3. Use b0 to b3 and b8 to b11. FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.1 BFM #0: Input mode specification

Initial value (at delivery): H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

Specify the input modes of channel 1 to 4. 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the input modes of the 4 channels. Change the value of each digit to change the input mode of each channel. 0 to 8 or F can be set for each digit. H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2

The different types of input modes are shown in the following table: → For a detailed description of input characteristics, refer to Section 2.4.

Set value Analog input Digital output Input mode [HEX] range range 0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -4000 to +4000 Voltage input *1 -10V to +10V -10000 to +10000 2 Analog value direct indication mode 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 Current input *1 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 5 Analog value direct indication mode 6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -16000 to +16000 7 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -4000 to +4000 Current input *1 -20mA to +20mA -20000 to +20000 8 Analog value direct indication mode 9 to E Setting not possible - - F Channel not used - - *1. The offset/gain values cannot be changed. 1. Cautions regarding input mode setting If the input mode is set (changed), the analog input characteristics will be changed automatically. Furthermore, when the offset/gain value is changed, the characteristics can be set to the desired values. (The resolution cannot be changed.) If the analog value direct indication (*1) is specified, the offset/gain value cannot be changed. It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the input mode. For this reason, after changing the input mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before writing other data. HFFFF (no channels used) cannot be set. 2. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM).

B-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.2 BFM #2 to #5: Averaging time Common Items

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

To change the channel data type from the immediate data (channels 1 to 4: BFM #10 to #13) to the average B FX FX

data, set the desired averaging time (channels 1 to 4 : BFM #2 to 5). 3UC 3U -4AD

The relation between the set averaging time and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table. -4AD → For a detailed description of channel data update timing, refer to Subsection 5.4.4.

Averaging time (BFM Channel data (BFM #10 to #13) type Error descriptions C #2 to #5) FX 3U

Immediate data K0 will be set, and the averaging time -4AD-ADP 0 or less (Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the channel setting error (b10 of BFM #29) will data will be updated.) occur. Immediate data 1 (initial (Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the channel - value) D

data will be updated.) FX

Average data 3G -2AD-BD (Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the average 2 to 400 - value will be calculated and the channel data will be updated.) Average data (Each time the A/D conversion data reaches the averaging E 401 to 4095 - FX

time, the average data will be calculated and the channel 3U

data will be updated.) -4DA Average data 4096 will be set, and the averaging (Each time the A/D conversion data reaches the averaging 4096 or more time setting error (b10 of BFM #29) will time, the average data will be calculated and the channel occur. data will be updated.) F FX 3U -4DA-ADP 1. Application If the measurement signal contains comparatively reduced ripple noise, such as supply voltage frequency, averaging will result in obtaining of stable data. G

2. Cautions regarding averaging time setting FX 3G

To use the averaging function, be sure to set the digital filter of the corresponding channel to "0". (Digital -1DA-BD filter setting: BFM #6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) To use the digital filter function, be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to "1". (Averaging time: BFM #2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4) If the averaging time is set to a value other than "1" and the digital filter (BFM #6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) is set to a value other than "0", the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM #29) will occur. H FX

If one of the channels uses the digital filter, the A/D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels. 3U -3A-ADP If the averaging time is out of the setting range, the averaging time setting error (b10 of BFM #29) will occur. If the averaging time is set, the data history function cannot be used. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.3 BFM #6 to #9: Digital filter setting

Setting range: 0 to 1600 Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

To use the digital filter for channel data (BFM #10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4), set the digital filter value in the corresponding buffer memory (BFM #6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4). → For a detailed description of channel data update timing, refer to Subsection 5.4.4. If the digital filter function is used, the relation between the analog input value and the set digital filter value or the digital output value (channel data) will be as follows: Digital filter value (BFM #6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) > Fluctuation of analog signal (fluctuation width: less than 10 times of sampling) If the fluctuation of the analog signal (input value) is less than the set digital filter value, the analog input value will be converted into a stabilized digital output value and stored in the corresponding buffer memory (BFM #10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4). Digital filter value (BFM #6 to #9 for channels 1 to 4) < Fluctuation of analog signal If the fluctuation of the analog signal (input value) is more than the set digital filter value, the digital output value will follow the analog input value, and the digital output value equal to the analog input value will be stored in the corresponding buffer memory (BFM #10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4).

Analog input value The digital output value will Digital output value follow the analog input value.

Set digital filter value

Set digital filter value Analog input value Analog Converted into stabilized digital output value (Fluctuation width is less than 10 times of sampling) Time The relation between the set value and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table:

Set value Operation Less than 0 Disables the digital filter function. A setting error will occur (b11 of BFM #29 will be set to ON). 0 Disables the digital filter function. 1 to 1600 Enables the digital filter function. 1601 or more Disables the digital filter function. A setting error will occur (b11 of BFM #29 will be set to ON).

1. Application If the measurement signal contains steep spike noise, use the digital filter instead of the averaging function. The digital filter produces more stabilized data results. 2. Cautions regarding digital filter setting To use the digital filter function, be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to "1". (Averaging time: BFM #2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4) If the averaging time is set to a value other than "1" and the digital filter is set to a value other than "0", the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM #29) will occur. If one of the channels uses the digital filter, the A/D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels. If the digital filter set value is not in the range from 0 to 1600, the digital filter setting error (b11 of BFM #29) will occur.

B-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.4 BFM #10 to #13: Channel data Common Items

Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use these buffer memories to store the A/D converted digital values. The channel data (BFM #10 to #13 for channels 1 to 4) and the data update timing will depend on the set averaging time (BFM #2 to #5 for channels 1 to 4) or the digital filter setting condition (BFM #6 to #9 for B FX FX

channels 1 to 4) as shown in the following table. 3UC 3U -4AD → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Subsection 5.4.2. -4AD → For a detailed description of digital filter functions, refer to Subsection 5.4.3.

Averaging Digital filter Channel data (BFM #10 to #13) update timing time function C (BFM #2 to #5) (BFM #6 to #9) Channel data type Update timing FX 3U -4AD-ADP Immediate data Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the 0 (The digital filter "0" will be set, and the 0 or less data will be updated. will not be used.) averaging time setting error The update timing will be as follows: (b10 of BFM #29) will occur. *1 0 (The digital filter Update time = 500μs × Number of D

Immediate data FX will not be used.) selected channels 3G

Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the -2AD-BD 1 1 to 1600 Immediate data data will be updated. (The digital filter The digital filter function will The update timing will be as follows: will be used.) be used. Update time = 5ms × Number of selected channels E FX

Each time the A/D conversion is performed, the 3U

data will be updated. -4DA 2 to 400 Average data The update timing will be as follows: Update time = 500μs*1× Number of 0 (The digital filter selected channels will not be used.) F 401 to 4095 Average data Each time the A/D conversion is performed for FX

the set averaging time, the data will be updated. 3U

Average data -4DA-ADP The update timing will be as follows: "4096" will be set, and the 4096 or more averaging time setting error Update time = 500μs*1 × Number of (b10 of BFM #29) will occur. selected channels × Averaging time *1. "500μs" represents the A/D conversion time. G However, if one of the channels uses the digital filter function, the A/D conversion time will be 5 ms for FX 3G

all the channels. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.5 BFM #19: Data change disable

Setting range: K2080, or value other than K2080 Initial value (at delivery): K2080 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) Disables adjustment of the following BFMs: Input mode specification (BFM #0) Initialization function (BFM #20) Input characteristics writing (BFM #21) Convenient functions (BFM #22) Offset data (BFM #41 to #44) Gain data (BFM #51 to #54) Automatic transfer-to data register specification (BFM #125 to #129) Data history sampling time setting (BFM #198) Set the value of BFM #19 (Data change disable) as follows: Set value Description K2080 Data change enabled. Value other than K2080 Data change disabled.

1. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

5.4.6 BFM #20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status)

Setting range: K0 or K1 Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use this function to initialize all data in BFM #0 to #6999, to the factory default status. Set value Description K0 Normal K1 Initializes all data Set "K1" to initialize all data. When initialization is complete, "K0" will be set automatically. 1. Caution regarding initialization function setting It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data. Priority is given to BFM #19 which prevents a data from being changed. To initialize, set K2080 in BFM #19.

5.4.7 BFM #21: Input characteristics writing

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

Channel numbers are assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM #21. If any of these bits are turned on, the offset data (BFM #41 to #44) and gain data (BFM #51 to #54) of the corresponding channel will be written to the internal memory (EEPROM). When written to the internal memory, the data will become valid. 1. BFM #21 bits channel number assignment Bit No. Description b0 Channel-1 offset data (BFM #41) and gain data (BFM #51) writing b1 Channel-2 offset data (BFM #42) and gain data (BFM #52) writing b2 Channel-3 offset data (BFM #43) and gain data (BFM #53) writing b3 Channel-4 offset data (BFM #44) and gain data (BFM #54) writing b4 to b15 Not used. The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time. (Set "H000F" to write all channel data to the EEPROM.) When writing is complete, "H0000" (b0 to b3: OFF) will be set automatically.

B-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.8 BFM #22: Convenient function setting Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) Turn on each bit (b0 to b8) of BFM #22 to enable the function assigned to each bit (refer to the following B FX table). Turn off each bit to disable the function of each bit. FX 3UC 3U -4AD

1. Function assigned to each bit of BFM #22 -4AD Bit No. Function Description Reference The channel data (BFM #10 to #13), peak data (BFM #101 to #104, #111 to #114), and data history (BFM #200 to #6999) will be subject to change (the addition data (BFM #61 to #64) will be C Subsection FX

b0 Data addition function added to the measurement data). 3U 5.4.15 When setting the lower limit error data (BFM #71 to #74) or the -4AD-ADP upper limit error data (BFM #81 to #84), add the addition data (BFM #61 to #64) to the error data to be set. If the A/D conversion data of a channel is outside the range set Upper/lower limit by the lower limit error data (BFM #71 to #74) and the upper limit Subsection b1 D detection function error data (BFM #81 to #84), the result will be written to BFM 5.4.16 FX #26 as the upper/lower limit error status data. 3G -2AD-BD When channel data (BFM #10 to #13) is updated, if the difference between the previous value and the new value is Abrupt change Subsection b2 larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in detection function 5.4.17 BFM #91 to #94), the result will be written to BFM #27 as the abrupt change detection status data. E FX

The minimum value of channel data written to BFM #10 to #13 3U will be written to BFM #101 to #104 as the minimum peak value, -4DA Peak value holding Subsection b3 and the maximum value of channel data written to BFM #10 to function 5.4.19 #13 will be written to BFM #111 to #114 as the maximum peak value. If the automatic transfer-to first data register is specified in BFM F

Subsection FX #125, the minimum peak value (BFM #101 to #104) and the Peak value automatic 5.4.19 3U

b4 maximum peak value (BFM #111 to #114) will be automatically -4DA-ADP transfer function Subsection written to the specified data registers (8 points (registers) 5.4.21 starting from the first data register specified). If the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to Subsection Upper/lower limit error data register is specified in BFM #126, the upper/lower limit error 5.4.16 b5 status data automatic G

status data (BFM #26) will be automatically written to the Subsection FX transfer function

specified data register. 5.4.22 3G -1DA-BD Abrupt change If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to Subsection detection status data data register is specified in BFM #127, the abrupt change 5.4.17 b6 automatic transfer detection status data (BFM #27) will be automatically written to Subsection function the specified data register. 5.4.23 Over-scale status If the over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register is H Subsection FX

b7 data automatic specified in BFM #128, the over-scale status data (BFM #28) will 3U 5.4.24 transfer function be automatically written to the specified data register. -3A-ADP Error status data If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is Subsection b8 automatic transfer specified in BFM #129, the error status data (BFM #29) will be 5.4.25 function automatically written to the specified data register. b9 to b15 - Not used. - I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-33 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

2. Caution regarding convenient function setting Even if the data addition function is used, the value before adding the addition data (BFM #61 to #64) will be checked to detect the over-scale error. To use the peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM #22), be sure to enable the peak value holding function (b3 of BFM #22). To use the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM #22), be sure to enable the upper/lower limit value detection function (b1 of BFM #22). To use the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM #22), be sure to enable the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM #22). 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

B-34 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.9 BFM #26: Upper/lower limit error status Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) If channel data (BFM #10 to #13) is out of the range set by the lower limit error data (BFM #71 to #74) and the upper limit error data (BFM #81 to #84), the following operation will be performed: B FX FX

If "channel data < lower limit error set value": 3UC 3U -4AD

The lower limit error bit will turn on. -4AD If "channel data > upper limit error set value": The upper limit error bit will turn on. → For a detailed description of upper/lower limit error status data resetting, refer to Subsection 5.4.18. C FX 3U

1. BFM #26 bit assignment -4AD-ADP The upper and lower limit error values of each channel are assigned as shown in the following table:

Bit No. Channel number Description b0 Lower limit error value D

ch1 FX b1 Upper limit error value 3G

b2 Lower limit error value -2AD-BD ch2 b3 Upper limit error value b4 Lower limit error value ch3 b5 Upper limit error value E b6 Lower limit error value FX ch4 3U b7 Upper limit error value -4DA b8 to b15 Not used.

2. Cautions regarding use of upper/lower limit error status data F To use the upper/lower limit error status data, be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit detection function (b1 FX of BFM #22). 3U -4DA-ADP Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit: - Turn the power off and on. - Turn on b0 or b1 of BFM #99 to reset the upper/lower limit error status. - Write "H0000" in BFM #26 as the upper/lower limit error status data. G FX

Even if an error is detected, channel data (BFM #10 to #13) will be continuously updated. 3G -1DA-BD 3. Upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM #22) If the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM #126, the data in BFM #26 can be transferred to the specified data register. When the upper/lower error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For H this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scanning time of the PLC can be FX 3U

shortened. -3A-ADP : Represents a numeric value. Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer-to data register specification ON = Valid Transfer-from buffer memory I -ADP (BFM #126: K) FX 3U

BFM #22 b1:ON -4AD-PT BFM #26 → D BFM #22 b5:ON

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-35 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.10 BFM #27: Abrupt change detection status

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) When channel data (BFM #10 to #13) is updated, if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in BFM #91 to #94), the following operation will be performed: If "(new value) - (previous value) > (abrupt change detection value)": The "+" direction bit will turn on. If "(previous value) - (new value) > (abrupt change detection value)": The "-" direction bit will turn on. → For a detailed description of abrupt change detection status data resetting, refer to Subsection 5.4.18. 1. Assignment of each bit of BFM #27 For the abrupt change detection function of each channel, the "+" and "-" directions are assigned as shown in the following table:

Bit No. Channel number Description b0 "-" direction for abrupt change detection ch1 b1 "+" direction for abrupt change detection b2 "-" direction for abrupt change detection ch2 b3 "+" direction for abrupt change detection b4 "-" direction for abrupt change detection ch3 b5 "+" direction for abrupt change detection b6 "-" direction for abrupt change detection ch4 b7 "+" direction for abrupt change detection b8 to b15 Not used. 2. Caution regarding use of abrupt change detection status data To use the abrupt change status data, be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM #22). Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit: - Turn the power off and on. - Turn on b2 of BFM #99 to reset the abrupt change detection error status. - Write "H0000" in BFM #27 as the abrupt change detection status data. Even if abrupt change is detected, channel data (BFM #10 to #13) will be continuously updated. 3. Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM #22) If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM #127, the data in BFM #27 can be transferred to the specified data register. When abrupt change is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. : Represents a numeric value. Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer-to data register specification ON = Valid Transfer-from memory (BFM #127: K) BFM #22 b2:ON BFM #27 → D BFM #22 b6:ON

B-36 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.11 BFM #28: Over-scale status Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) If the input analog value is out of the A/D conversion range, the following operation will be performed: If "(analog input value) (lower limit value in A/D conversion range)": B FX < FX

The over-scale lower limit bit will turn on. 3UC 3U -4AD If "(analog input value) < (upper limit value in A/D conversion range)": -4AD The over-scale upper limit bit will turn on. 1. A/D conversion range C Input type A/D conversion range FX 3U

Voltage input -10.2V to +10.2V -4AD-ADP Current input -20.4mA to +20.4mA

2. Assignment of each bit of BFM #28 D FX

Bit No. Channel number Description 3G b0 Over-scale (lower limit) -2AD-BD ch1 b1 Over-scale (upper limit) b2 Over-scale (lower limit) ch2 b3 Over-scale (upper limit) E FX

b4 Over-scale (lower limit) 3U

ch3 -4DA b5 Over-scale (upper limit) b6 Over-scale (lower limit) ch4 b7 Over-scale (upper limit) b8 to b15 Not used. F FX 3U

3. Caution regarding use of over-scale status data -4DA-ADP Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit: - Turn the power off and on. - Write "H0000" in BFM #28 as the over-scale status data. G Even if over scale is detected, channel data (BFM #10 to #13) will continuously be updated. FX 3G

4. Over-scale status data automatic transfer function (b7 of BFM #22) -1DA-BD If the over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM #128, the data in BFM #28 can be transferred to the specified data register. When over-scale is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. H : Represents a numeric value. FX 3U

Convenient function -3A-ADP Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer-to data register specification ON = Valid Transfer-from memory (BFM #128: K) BFM #22 b7:ON BFM #28 → D I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-37 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.12 BFM #29: Error status

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) Error data is assigned to the bits of BFM #29. 1. BFM #29 Bit Assignment Bit No. Item Description b0 Error detection If any bits between b2 and b4 are turned on, b0 will turn on. b1 - - The 24 V power is not supplied properly. Check the wiring condition b2 Power supply error or the voltage supplied.

FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD may be defective. Please contact your local b3 Hardware error Mitsubishi Electric representative. The A/D conversion value is abnormal. b4 A/D conversion error Check the over-scale status data (BFM #28) to localize the error channel. b5 - - BFM reading/writing If change in the input characteristics is started, this bit will turn on. If b6 impossible this bit (b6) is on, A/D conversion data cannot be read out correctly. b7 - - b8 Data setting error detection If any bits between b10 and b15 are turned on, b8 will turn on. b9 - - The averaging time (BFM #2 to #5) is not set correctly. b10 Averaging time setting error Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095. The digital filter value (BFM #6 to #9) is not set correctly. b11 Digital filter setting error Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600. The abrupt change detection value (BFM #91 to #94) is not set Abrupt change detection b12 correctly. value setting error Correctly set the value again. The lower limit error detection value (BFM #71 to #74) or the upper Upper/lower limit error b13 limit error detection value (BFM #81 to #84) is not set correctly. detection value setting error Correctly set the value again. b14 - - The addition data (BFM #61 to #64) is not set correctly. b15 Addition data setting error Set the addition data again in the range from -16000 to +16000.

2. Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated, the error bit will turn off. Do not directly write "H0000" in BFM #29 using a sequence program. 3. Error status data automatic transfer function (b8 of BFM #22) If the error status data automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM #129, the data in BFM #29 can be transferred to the specified data register. When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. : Represents a numeric value. Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer-to data register specification ON = Valid Transfer-from memory (BFM #129: K) BFM #22 b8:ON BFM #29 → D

B-38 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.13 BFM #30: Model code Common Items

Initial value: K2080 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) "K2080" (fixed value) is stored as the model code. B FX FX

5.4.14 BFM #41 to #44: Offset data / BFM #51 to #54: Gain data 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

Setting range: See below. Initial value: See below. Numeric data type: Decimal (K) C FX

If the input mode is specified in BFM #0, the offset data and the gain data of each channel will be 3U

automatically stored. The initial offset data and gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following -4AD-ADP table: Offset data: Analog input value when the digital value is "0" (reference offset value) Gain data: Analog input value when the digital value is equal to the reference gain value (The reference gain value depends on the set input mode.) D FX 3G

1. Reference offset/gain value and initial value set at delivery -2AD-BD Offset Gain Input mode (BFM #0) (Channels 1 to 4: BFM #41 to (Channels 1 to 4: BFM #51 to #44) #54) Set Reference Reference E Description Initial value Initial value FX

value value value 3U

Voltage input -4DA 0 0 0mV 16000 5000mV (-10V to +10V:-32000 to +32000) Voltage input 1 0 0mV 2000 5000mV (-10V to +10V:-4000 to +4000) Voltage input 0 0mV 5000 5000mV F FX

2 Analog value direct indication mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change 3U

(-10V to +10V:-10000 to +10000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible) -4DA-ADP 3 Current input (4mA to 20mA:0 to 16000) 0 4000μA 16000 20000μA 4 Current input (4mA to 20mA:0 to 4000) 0 4000μA 4000 20000μA Current input 4000 4000μA 20000 20000μA G

5 Analog value direct indication mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change FX

(4mA to 20mA:4000 to 20000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible) 3G -1DA-BD Current input 6 00μA 16000 20000μA (-20mA to +20mA:-16000 to +16000) Current input 7 00μA 4000 20000μA (-20mA to +20mA:-4000 to +4000) H Current input 0 0μA 20000 20000μA FX 8 Analog value direct indication mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change 3U -3A-ADP (-20mA to +20mA:-20000 to +20000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible)

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-39 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

2. Offset/gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the input characteristics. The offset and gain data can be set for each channel. If the voltage input mode is set, write the offset and gain data in mV. If the current input mode is set, write the offset and gain data in μA. To change the offset data or gain data, turn on the corresponding bit of BFM #21 (buffer memory for input characteristics writing). The data setting range is shown in the following table:

Voltage input (mV) Current input (μA) Offset data -10000 to +9000*1 -20000 to +17000*2 Gain data -9000 to +10000*1 -17000 to +30000*2 *1. The offset and gain values should meet the following condition: Gain value - Offset value ≥ 1000

*2. The offset and gain values should meet the following condition: 30000 ≥ Gain value - Offset value ≥ 3000 3. Cautions regarding offset/gain data change If the analog value direct indication mode is used, the input characteristics cannot be changed. Even if the input characteristics are changed, the actual valid input range will not be changed: from -10V to +10V for the voltage input mode, and from -20mA to +20mA for the current input mode. Even if the input characteristics are changed, the resolution will not increase. → For a detailed description of input characteristics change, refer to Chapter 6.

5.4.15 BFM #61 to #64: Addition data

Setting range: -16000 to +16000 Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

If the addition data (BFM #61 to #64) is set, the set data will be added before storing the channel data (BFM #10 to #13), peak data (BFM #101 to #104, BFM #111 to #114), or data history (BFM #200 to #6999). 1. Cautions regarding addition data setting To use the addition data, be sure to turn on the data addition function (b0 of BFM #22). When setting the lower limit error data (BFM #71 to #74) or the upper limit error data (BFM #81 to #84), add the addition data (BFM #61 to #64) to the error data to be set.

B-40 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.16 BFM #71 to #74: Lower limit error setting / BFM #81 to #84: Upper limit error setting Common Items

Setting range: See below. Initial value: See below. Numeric data type: Decimal (K) B FX Set the upper/lower limit error data so that the upper/lower limit error status (BFM #26) can be detected. FX

The data setting range depends on the input mode set in BFM #0. 3UC 3U -4AD

The following table shows the data setting range for each input mode: -4AD

Input mode (BFM #0) Initial value

Set Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value Description (Channels 1 to 4: (Channels 1 to 4: C

value FX BFM #71 to #74) BFM #81 to #84) 3U

Voltage input -4AD-ADP 0 -32768 to +32767 -32768 32767 (-10V to +10V: -32000 to +32000) Voltage input 1 -4095 to +4095 -4095 4095 (-10V to +10V: -4000 to +4000) Voltage input D 2 Analog value direct indication mode -10200 to +10200 -10200 10200 FX 3G

(-10V to +10V:-10000 to +10000) -2AD-BD Current input 3 -1 to +16383 -1 16383 (4mA to 20mA:0 to 16000) 4 Current input (4mA to 20mA:0 to 4000) -1 to +4095 -1 4095 Current input E 5 Analog value direct indication mode 3999 to 20400 3999 20400 FX 3U

(4mA to 20mA:4000 to 20000) -4DA Current input 6 -16384 to +16383 -16384 16383 (-20mA to +20mA:-16000 to +16000) Current input 7 -4096 to +4095 -4096 4095 (-20mA to +20mA:-4000 to +4000) F FX

Current input 3U

8 Analog value direct indication mode -20400 to +20400 -20400 20400 -4DA-ADP (-20mA to +20mA:-20000 to +20000) 1. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit error setting To use the set upper/lower limit error data, be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit error detection function G

(b1 of BFM #22). FX To use the data addition function (b0 of BFM #22) together with this function, be sure to add the addition 3G -1DA-BD data (channels 1 to 4: BFM #61 to #64) to the upper/lower limit values to be set. In addition, observe the data setting range. H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-41 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.17 BFM #91 to #94: Abrupt change detection value setting

Setting range: See below. Initial value: See below. Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

When channel data (BFM #10 to #13) is updated, if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value (value set in BFM #91 to #94), the system will judge that the channel data is changed abruptly. The result of abrupt change detection will be written to BFM #27 as the abrupt change detection status data. The abrupt change detection value setting range depends on the set input mode (BFM #0) as shown in the following table: Input mode (BFM #0) Set Setting range Initial value Description value Voltage input 0 1 to 32767 3200 (-10V to +10V:-32000 to +32000) Voltage input 1 1 to 4095 400 (-10V to +10V:-4000 to +4000) Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 10000 1000 (-10V to +10V:-10000 to +10000) 3 Current input (4mA to 20mA:0 to 16000) 1 to 8191 800 4 Current input (4mA to 20mA:0 to 4000) 1 to 2047 200 Current input 5 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 8191 800 (4mA to 20mA:4000 to 20000) Current input 6 1 to 16383 1600 (-20mA to +20mA:-16000 to +16000) Current input 7 1 to 4095 400 (-20mA to +20mA:-4000 to +4000) Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 20000 2000 (-20mA to +20mA:-20000 to +20000)

1. Caution regarding abrupt change detection value setting To use the abrupt change detection value, be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM #22).

B-42 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.18 BFM #99: Clearance of upper/lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) Three error data clearance commands (lower limit error data clearance command, upper limit error data clearance command, and abrupt change detection data clearance command) are respectively assigned to the B FX 3 lower bits of BFM #99. FX 3UC 3U

Turning on each bit (batch turning on for all channels) will reset the corresponding error status flag (#26 or -4AD -4AD #27 of BFM). 1. BFM #99 bits command assignment Bit No. Description Buffer memory to be cleared C b0 Lower limit error data clearance command FX BFM #26 3U b1 Upper limit error data clearance command -4AD-ADP b2 Abrupt change detection data clearance command BFM #27 b3 to b15 Not used. - Two or more data clearance commands can be turned on at the same time. D FX

2. Operation after resetting BFM #26, #27 3G -2AD-BD Each bit will turn off automatically.

5.4.19 BFM #101 to #104: Minimum peak value / BFM #111 to #114: Maximum peak value E FX 3U

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) -4DA

The minimum channel data (channels 1 to 4) value written to BFM #10 to #13 will be written to BFM #101 to #104 as the minimum peak value, and the maximum channel data value will be written to BFM #111 to #114 as the maximum peak value. F 1. Caution regarding peak value FX 3U

To use the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value, be sure to turn on the peak value holding -4DA-ADP function (b3 of BFM #22). Note: If the data addition function (b0 of BFM #22) is used together with this function, the addition data will be G added to the measurement data. FX 3G

If the value holding function is not used, the peak value will be "K0". -1DA-BD 2. Peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM #22) If the automatic transfer-to first data register is specified in BFM #125, the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value will be automatically written to the specified data registers (8 points (registers) starting from the first data register specified). H FX

When the peak value is updated, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this 3U

reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be -3A-ADP shortened. : Represents a numeric value. Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting I -ADP Transfer-to data register specification FX 3U

(BFM #125: K) -4AD-PT ON = Valid Transfer-from buffer memory (8 points (registers) starting from the specified data register) BFM #22 b4:ON BFM #101 to 104 D to D+3 → BFM #22 b3:ON BFM #111 to 114 D+4 to D+7 J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-43 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.20 BFM #109: Minimum peak value resetting / BFM #119: Maximum peak value resetting

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) BFM #109 can reset the minimum peak value (BFM #101 to #104), and BFM #119 can reset the maximum peak value (BFM #111 to #114). Channel numbers are assigned to the bits of BFM #109 and #119 to specify the channel to be subject to peak value resetting. Turn on each bit to reset the peak value of the corresponding channel. 1. BFM #109/#119 bits Channel number assignment

Description Bit No. BFM #109 BFM #119 b0 Channel-1 minimum peak value (BFM #101) resetting Channel-1 maximum peak value (BFM #111) resetting b1 Channel-2 minimum peak value (BFM #102) resetting Channel-2 maximum peak value (BFM #112) resetting b2 Channel-3 minimum peak value (BFM #103) resetting Channel-3 maximum peak value (BFM #113) resetting b3 Channel-4 minimum peak value (BFM #104) resetting Channel-4 maximum peak value (BFM #114) resetting b4 to b15 Not used. Two or more bits can be turned on at a time.

5.4.21 BFM #125: Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification

Setting range: 0 to 7992 Initial value (at delivery) : K200 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM #125, the minimum peak value (BFM #101 to #104) and the maximum peak value (BFM #111 to #114) will be automatically transferred to the specified data registers (8 points (registers) starting from the first data register specified). When the peak value is updated, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the minimum peak value (BFM #101 to #104) and the maximum peak value (BFM #111 to #114), refer to Subsection 5.4.19. 1. If "BFM #125 = K200 (initial value)" Data will be transferred to D200 to D207 (8 points). Specified data register Description D200 Channel-1 minimum peak value (BFM #101) D201 Channel-2 minimum peak value (BFM #102) D202 Channel-3 minimum peak value (BFM #103) D203 Channel-4 minimum peak value (BFM #104) D204 Channel-1 maximum peak value (BFM #111) D205 Channel-2 maximum peak value (BFM #112) D206 Channel-3 maximum peak value (BFM #113) D207 Channel-4 maximum peak value (BFM #114)

2. Caution regarding peak value automatic transfer-to first data register specification If data registers are already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data registers. Be sure to turn on the peak value automatic transfer function (b4 of BFM #22) and the peak value holding function (b3 of BFM #22). The data written to BFM #125 will be retained in the EEPROM.

B-44 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing Common Items If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

5.4.22 BFM #126: Upper/lower error status data automatic transfer-to data register B FX specification FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value (at delivery) : K208 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) C

Use this function to automatically transfer the upper/lower limit error status data (BFM #26) to the data FX

register specified in BFM #126. 3U When the upper/lower limit error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. -4AD-ADP For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the upper/lower limit error status data (BFM #26), refer to Subsection 5.4.9. D FX 3G

1. If "BFM #126 = K208 (initial value)" -2AD-BD Specified data register Description D208 Upper/lower limit error status data in BFM #26

2. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register E FX

specification 3U If a data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same -4DA data register. Be sure to turn on the upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function (b5 of BFM #22) and the upper/lower limit detection function (b1 of BFM #22). F The data written to BFM #126 will be retained in the EEPROM. FX 3U 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing -4DA-ADP If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-45 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.23 BFM #127: Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer-to data register specification

Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value (at delivery) : K209 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use this function to automatically transfer the abrupt change detection status data (BFM #27) to the data register specified in BFM #127. When abrupt change is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the abrupt change detection status data (BFM #27), refer to Subsection 5.4.10. 1. If "BFM #127 = K209 (initial value)" Specified data register Description D209 Abrupt change detection status data in BFM #27

2. Caution regarding abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification If a data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data register. Be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function (b6 of BFM #22) and the abrupt change detection function (b2 of BFM #22). The data written to BFM #127 will be retained in the EEPROM. 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

B-46 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.24 BFM #128: Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification Common Items

Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value (at delivery) : K210 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) B FX Use this function to automatically transfer the over-scale status data (BFM #28) to the data register specified FX

in BFM #128. 3UC 3U -4AD

When over-scale is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, -4AD the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the over-scale status data (BFM #28), refer to Subsection 5.4.11. 1. If "BFM #128 = K210 (initial value)" C FX

Specified data register Description 3U -4AD-ADP D210 Over-scale status data in BFM #28

2. Cautions regarding over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register specification If a data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same D

data register. FX 3G

Be sure to turn on the over-scale status data automatic transfer function (b7 of BFM #22). -2AD-BD The data written to BFM #128 will be retained in the EEPROM. 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD E

EEPROM. FX

→ For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1. 3U -4DA

5.4.25 BFM #129: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification Setting range: 0 to 7999 F

Initial value (at delivery) : K211 FX

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) 3U -4DA-ADP Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data (BFM #29) to the data register specified in BFM #129. When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need any program for reading the data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. G → For a detailed description of the error status data (BFM #29), refer to Subsection 5.4.12. FX 3G -1DA-BD 1. If "BFM #129 = K211 (initial value)" Specified data register Description D211 Error status data in BFM #29 H 2. Cautions regarding error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification FX 3U

If a data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same -3A-ADP data register. Be sure to turn on the error status data automatic transfer function (b8 of BFM #22). The data written to BFM #129 will be retained in the EEPROM. I -ADP FX

3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing 3U If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD -4AD-PT EEPROM. → For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-47 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.26 BFM #197: Selection of cyclic data update function (function for data history)

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) Use this function to update the data history in BFM #200 to #6999. Channel numbers are respectively assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM #197. Turn each bit on or off to select the data history update function. ON: If a bit is turned on, the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number, but when 1,700 points of data are stored, data will be then overwritten in the buffer memories starting from the smallest BFM numbers. OFF: If a bit is turned off, the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number, but when 1,700 points of data are stored, data storage will stop. 1. Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM #197 Bit No. Description History data stored in b0 Selection of channel-1 data update function BFM #200 to #1899, 1,700 points b1 Selection of channel-2 data update function BFM #1900 to #3599, 1,700 points b2 Selection of channel-3 data update function BFM #3600 to #5299, 1,700 points b3 Selection of channel-4 data update function BFM #5300 to #6999, 1,700 points b4 to b15 Not used. -

5.4.27 BFM #198: Data history sampling time setting

Setting range: 0 to 30000 Initial value (at delivery) : K15000 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use this function to set the data history sampling time. If one of the channels uses the digital filter function, set a multiple of 5. 1. Sampling cycle As shown in the following table, the sampling cycle depends on whether the digital filter function is used.

Value set in Whether digital filter function is used Sampling cycle BFM #198 0.5 ms × number of selected channels (number of 0 channels using the digital filter function) None of the channels use the digital filter function. Set value (ms) in BFM #198 × number of selected 1 or more channels (number of channels using the digital filter function) 5 ms × number of selected channels (number of 9 or less channels using the digital filter function) One or more channels use the digital filter *1 function. Set value (ms) in BFM #198 × number of selected 10 or more channels (number of channels using the digital filter function) *1. Only multiples of 5 are valid. (If any value from 10 to 14 is set, the sampling cycle will be 10 ms. If any value from 15 to 19 is set, the sampling cycle will be 15 ms.) 2. Caution regarding use of data history function If the averaging time is set, the data history function cannot be used. 3. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #19, #21, #22, #125 to #129, or #198, the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM. → For a detailed description of cautions regarding EEPROM writing, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

B-48 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.28 BFM #199: Data history resetting/stoppage Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) The data history resetting function and the data history stoppage function are assigned to the bits of BFM #199. B FX 1. Data history resetting function (b0 to b3) FX 3UC 3U

The sampled history data can be reset for each channel. -4AD Turn on a bit to reset all the history data (1st to 1,700th) of the corresponding channel. (Note that two or more -4AD bits can be turned on at a time.) When the data reset is complete, the corresponding bit will turn off automatically. 2. Data history stoppage function (b8 to b11) C FX

Data sampling can be temporarily stopped for each channel. 3U Turn on a bit to temporarily stop sampling history data for the corresponding channel. (Note that two or more -4AD-ADP bits can be turned on at a time.) Turn off the bit to restart sampling of history data. 3. Function assignment to each bit of BFM #199 D Bit No. Channel number Description FX 3G

b0 ch1 -2AD-BD b1 ch2 Data history resetting function b2 ch3 b3 ch4 E b4 to b7 Not used. FX 3U

b8 ch1 -4DA b9 ch2 Data history stoppage function b10 ch3 b11 ch4 b12 to b15 Not used. F FX 3U

4. Caution regarding data history resetting -4DA-ADP When a bit is turned on, the corresponding data history will be reset.

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-49 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.29 BFM #200 to #6999: Data history

Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) Use this function to sample the A/D conversion data of each channel and to write the sampled data to the buffer memories. The 4AD can sample up to 1,700 points of A/D conversion data of each channel at the sampling cycle specified in BFM #198, and can store the sampled data as history data in the buffer memories as shown in the following table. Buffer memories are assigned to the 4 channels as shown in the following table, and data is stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number. Use BFM #199 to stop or reset the data history.

Number of data BFM number samples ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 1st #200 #1900 #3600 #5300 2nd #201 #1901 #3601 #5301 3rd #202 #1902 #3602 #5302 … … … … … 1,700th #1899 #3599 #5299 #6999

1. Caution regarding data history reading If a large amount of history data is collectively read out to the PLC main unit using the FROM instruction, the watchdog timer error may occur in the PLC main unit. Therefore, when programming, separate the history data and then read it out using the FROM instruction. Set WDT (watchdog timer refresh) instruction between the separated data.

B-50 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics A Common Items

6. Changing Input Characteristics

For the 4AD, the standard input characteristics are provided for each input mode (BFM #0) at the time of B FX factory shipment. FX 3UC 3U

Changing the offset data (BFM #41 to #44) or gain data (BFM #51 to #54), however, can change the input -4AD -4AD characteristics of each channel. This chapter describes how to change the input characteristics.

6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics C FX 3U 1 Determine the input mode (BFM #0) -4AD-ADP Determine the optimum input mode (BFM #0) for the selected channels and the voltage/current specifications. D FX

Set value 3G Input mode Analog input range Digital output range (HEX) -2AD-BD 0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V -4000 to +4000 Voltage input analog value direct indication 2 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted. E

mode FX

3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 3U -4DA 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 Current input analog value direct indication 5 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted. mode 6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -16000 to +16000 F FX

7 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA -4000 to +4000 3U -4DA-ADP Current input analog value direct indication 8 The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted. mode 9 to E Not used. -- F Channel not used -- G FX

Example: Enter "HFF00" in BFM #0 to set input mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and 3G

4. -1DA-BD

Caution regarding data setting: If a channel is set to the value "2", "5", "8" or "F", the input characteristics of the channel cannot be changed. H Set the optimum input mode for the analog signal to be input. FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-51 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics

2 Determine the input characteristics to be changed. Determine the digital value to be output according to the input voltage/current.

Example: To output digital values in the range from 0 to 32000 by inputting the voltage in the range from 1V DC to 5V DC:

Input mode 0 Input characteristics provided at the time Input characteristics newly provided of factory shipment Digital value Digital value +32640 +32000 +32000

Gain reference value Gain reference value (+16000) (+16000)

Input voltage 0 +10.2 V -10V Offset reference value (0) +5V +10V Input voltage +1V +3V +5V -10.2 V

-32000 -32640

3 Determine the offset data. Determine the analog input value (offset data) for digital output value of "0". Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode, and set the analog input value in μA for the current input mode. Example: To set the offset value of 1 V, set 1,000 mV. → For a detailed description of offset data, refer to Subsection 5.4.14.

4 Determine the gain data. Determine the analog input value so that the digital output value is equal to the gain reference value of each input mode. The following table shows the gain reference value of each input mode:

Numeric Input mode Analog input range Gain standard value Initial value value 0 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V 16000 5000mV 1 Voltage input mode -10V to +10V 2000 5000mV 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 16000 20000μA 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 4000 20000μA 6 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA 16000 20000μA 7 Current input mode -20mA to +20mA 4000 20000μA

Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode, and set the analog input value in μA for the current input mode. Example: To set the gain value of 3 V, set 3000 mV. → For a detailed description of gain data, refer to Subsection 5.4.14.

B-52 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics A Common Items 5 Create a sequence program. To change the input characteristics, write the offset data (BFM #41 to #44) and the gain data (BFM #51 to #54) in the sequence program, and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM #21 for the corresponding channel. The following example shows a program for the unit number 0. B FX FX Example: Program for changing the input characteristics of channels 1 and 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series 3UC 3U

PLCs): -4AD -4AD

Command for writing input characteristics X000 Input mode specification FNC 12 HFF00 U0\G0 MOV P for channels 1 to 4 C FX

M0 3U

SET M0 -4AD-ADP

*1 T0 K50

T0 FNC 16 Offset value of D

K1000 U0\G41 K2 FX FMOV P channels 1 and 2 3G -2AD-BD Gain value of FNC 16 K3000 U0\G51 K2 FMOV P channels 1 and 2

Batch writing of offset and gain FNC 12 H0003 U0\G21 MOV P values of channels 1 and 2 E FX

RST M0 3U -4DA

*1. It takes approximately 5 seconds to change the input mode (BFM #0). This is because all the set values should be changed. After changing the input mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before setting other data. F FX

The input characteristics of each channel can be written in BFM #21. It is also possible to perform 3U -4DA-ADP batch writing of input characteristics for two or more channels.

6 Transfer the sequence program to change the input characteristics. G

Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC. FX 3G

Start the PLC, and turn on the command (X000) to write the input characteristics. In approx. 5 sec- -1DA-BD onds, the offset data and the gain data will be written. Since the offset data and the gain data are stored in the 4AD EEPROM, it is possible to delete the sequence program. H FX 3U

7 Read out the analog data to check the data. -3A-ADP

Create the following program to check the stored data (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs):

RUN monitor The digital values set for I -ADP M8000 FX FNC 16 channels 1 to 4 will be read U0\G10 D0 K4 out to D0 to D3. 3U

BMOV -4AD-PT

→ If data is not stored properly, refer to Chapter 8 "Troubleshooting". J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-53 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time

7. Examples of Practical Programs

Use the functions incorporated in the 4AD to create practical programs. This chapter describes the examples of practical programs. Program that uses the averaging time Program that uses convenient functions Program that uses the data history function Program that initializes 4AD (to the factory default status)

7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time

This section describes a program that uses the analog data averaging time input to the 4AD or the digital filter function of the 4AD. 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions. 1) System configuration The FX3U-4AD (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage input, -10V to +10V → -32000 to +32000). Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 (current input, 4mA to 20mA → 0 to 16000). 3) Averaging time For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time should be set to "10". 4) Digital filter function For channels 1 to 4, the digital filter function should be disabled (default). 5) Device assignment Device Description D0 A/D converted digital value for channel 1 D1 A/D converted digital value for channel 2 D2 A/D converted digital value for channel 3 D3 A/D converted digital value for channel 4

2. Example of sequence program For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1 H3300 U0\G0 to 4 will be specified.*1 RUN monitor MOV P M8000 *1 T0 K50

T0 For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time FNC 16 K10 U0\G2 K4 FMOV P will be set to "10".

FNC 16 The digital filter function of channels 1 K0 U0\G6 K4 *2 FMOV P to 4 will be disabled.

The digital values set for channels FNC 15 U0\G10 D0 K4 BMOV 1 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3.

*1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After specifying the input mode, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50). *2. To use the default value set for the digital filter function, it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program. B-54 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.1 Program That Uses Averaging Time A For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs Common Items Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 Input modes of channels 1 K0 K0 H3300 K1 to 4 will be specified.*1 RUN monitor TO P M8000 *1 T0 K50 B FX FX

T0 3UC 3U For channels 1 to 4, the averaging time FNC 79 -4AD

K0 K2 K10 K4 -4AD TO P will be set to "10".

FNC 79 The digital filter function of channels 1 K0 K6 K0 K4 *2 TO P to 4 will be disabled.

FNC 78 The digital values set for channels C K0 K10 D0 K4 1 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3. FX

FROM 3U -4AD-ADP *1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After specifying the input mode, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50). D *2. To use the default value set for the digital filter function, it is not necessary to set the digital filter FX 3G

function in the sequence program. -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-55 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions

7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions

This section describes a program that uses the 4AD convenient functions (BFM #22). 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions. 1) System configuration The FX3U-4AD (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage input, -10V to +10V → -32000 to +32000). Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 (current input, 4mA to 20mA → 0 to 16000). 3) Averaging time For all the channels, the averaging time should be set to "1" (default). (To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program.) 4) Digital filter function For all channels, the digital filter function should be disabled (default). (To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program.) 5) Convenient functions The upper/lower limit detection function, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer function, over-scale status data automatic transfer function, and error status data automatic transfer function should be used. 6) Device assignment Device Description X000 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data Input X001 Clearance of over-scale data Y000 Output of channel-1 lower limit error data Y001 Output of channel-1 upper limit error data Y002 Output of channel-2 lower limit error data Y003 Output of channel-2 upper limit error data Y004 Output of channel-3 lower limit error data Y005 Output of channel-3 upper limit error data Y006 Output of channel-4 lower limit error data Y007 Output of channel-4 upper limit error data Y010 Output of channel-1 over-scale (lower limit) data Y011 Output of channel-1 over-scale (upper limit) data Y012 Output of channel-2 over-scale (lower limit) data Y013 Output of channel-2 over-scale (upper limit) data Output Y014 Output of channel-3 over-scale (lower limit) data Y015 Output of channel-3 over-scale (upper limit) data Y016 Output of channel-4 over-scale (lower limit) data Y017 Output of channel-4 over-scale (upper limit) data Y20 Output of error detection signal Y21 Output of setting error detection signal D0 A/D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A/D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A/D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A/D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 Upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register D101 Over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register D102 Error status data automatic transfer-to data register

B-56 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions A 2. Example of sequence program Common Items For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be H3300 U0\G0 specified. *2 RUN monitor MOV P B FX FX M8000 K50 *1 3UC 3U T0 -4AD -4AD T0 FNC 12 H01A2 U0\G22 The convenient functions will be set. *2 MOV P

FNC 12 The upper/lower limit error status data automatic C

K100 U0\G126 FX MOV P transfer-to data register will be set to D100. *2 3U

The over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data -4AD-ADP FNC 12 K101 U0\G128 MOV P register will be set to D101. *2

FNC 12 The error status data automatic transfer-to data register K102 U0\G129 *2 MOV P will be set to D102. D FNC 15 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM#10 FX

U0\G10 D0 K4 3G BMOV to #13 into D0 to D3. -2AD-BD Clearance of upper/lower limit error data X000 FNC 12 H0003 U0\G99 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data MOV P Clearance of over-scale E

data FX

X001 3U FNC 12 K0 U0\G28 Clearance of over-scale data -4DA MOV P

RUN monitor M8000 FNC 12 The upper/lower limit error status data of each channel D100 K2Y000 will be output to Y000 to Y007. F MOV FX 3U

The over-scale status data of each channel will be output -4DA-ADP FNC 12 D101 K2Y010 MOV to Y010 to Y017. Error detection D102.0 Y020 The error detection signal will be output to Y020. G Setting error detection FX D102.8 3G -1DA-BD Y021 The setting error detection signal will be output to Y021.

*1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each H setting. FX After this, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time 3U -3A-ADP (T0 K50) again. *2. The set input mode, convenient functions, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register number, over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register number, and error status data automatic transfer-to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. For this I -ADP reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-57 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions

For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be K0 K0 H3300 K1 specified. *2 RUN monitor TO P M8000 *1 T0 K50

T0 FNC 79 K0 K22 H01A2 K1 The convenient functions will be set. *2 TO P

FNC 79 The upper/lower limit error status data automatic K0 K126 K100 K1 *2 TO P transfer-to data register will be set to D100.

FNC 79 The over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data K0 K128 K101 K1 *2 TO P register will be set to D101.

FNC 79 The error status data automatic transfer-to data register K0 K129 K102 K1 *2 TO P will be set to D102.

FNC 78 K0 K10 D0 K4 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from FROM P BFM#10 to #13 into D0 to D3. Clearance of upper/ lower limit error data X000 FNC 79 K0 K99 H0003 K1 Clearance of upper/lower limit error data TO P Clearance of over-scale data X001 FNC 79 K0 K28 K0 K1 Clearance of over-scale data TO

RUN monitor M8000 The upper/lower limit error status data of each channel FNC 12 D100 K2Y000 MOV will be output to Y000 to Y007.

The over-scale status data of each channel will be FNC 12 D101 K2Y010 MOV output to Y010 to Y017.

FNC 12 D102 K4M0 MOV Error detection M0 Y020 The error detection signal will be output to Y020. Setting error detection M8 Y021 The setting error detection signal will be output to Y021.

*1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. After this, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50) again. *2. The set input mode, convenient functions, upper/lower limit error status data automatic transfer-to data register number, over-scale status data automatic transfer-to data register number, and error status data automatic transfer-to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. For this reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid.

B-58 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function A 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function Common Items

This section describes a program that uses the data history function of the 4AD. 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following functions. B FX 1) System configuration FX 3UC 3U

The FX3U-4AD (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. -4AD -4AD 2) Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage input, -10V to +10V → -32000 to +32000). Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 (current input, 4mA to 20mA → 0 to 16000). 3) Averaging time C FX

For all the channels, the averaging time should be set to "1" (default). 3U (To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program.) -4AD-ADP 4) Digital filter function For all channels, the digital filter function should be disabled (default). (To use the default value, it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program.) D

5) Data history function FX

For all channels, the data sampling time should be set to 100 ms. 3G The sampling cycle should be 100 ms × 4 (number of selected channels) = 400 ms. -2AD-BD For all channels, data will be sampled 100 times, and the sampled data will be stored as data history in the data registers. 6) Device assignment E Device Description FX 3U

X000 Clearance of data history -4DA Input X001 Temporarily stoppage of data history D0 A/D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A/D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A/D converted digital value of channel 3 F FX

D3 A/D converted digital value of channel 4 3U Data register -4DA-ADP D100 to D199 Channel-1 data history(100 data samples) D200 to D299 Channel-2 data history(100 data samples) D300 to D399 Channel-3 data history(100 data samples) D400 to D499 Channel-4 data history(100 data samples) G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-59 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function

2. Example of sequence program For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be H3300 U0\G0 specified.*2 RUN monitor MOV P M8000 *1 T0 K50

T0 FNC 12 K100 U0\G198 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms.*2 MOV P

FNC 15 The digital values set for channels 1 U0\G10 D0 K4 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3. Clear data BMOV history X000 Data history of all the channels will be FNC 12 H000F U0\G199 MOV P erased. Temporarily stop data history X001 Data history of all the channels will be FNC 12 H0F00 U0\G199 MOV P temporarily stopped. Temporarily stop data history X001 Temporary stoppage of data history will be FNC 12 H0000 U0\G199 MOV P canceled for all the channels.

T0 Channel-1 history data (100 data samples) FNC 15 U0\G200 D100 K100 BMOV will be read out to D100 to D199.

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT

Channel-2 history data (100 data samples) FNC 15 U0\G1900 D200 K100 BMOV will be read out to D200 to D299.

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT

Channel-3 history data (100 data samples) FNC 15 U0\G3600 D300 K100 BMOV will be read out to D300 to D399.

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT

Channel-4 history data (100 data samples) FNC 15 U0\G5300 D400 K100 BMOV will be read out to D400 to D499.

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT

*1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. After this, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50) again. *2. The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. Therefore, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. *3. If a large amount of history data is read out, the scan time of the PLC will be become longer. If the scan time exceeds 200 ms, the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate, and the PLC will stop. Insert WDT instruction (watchdog timer refresh) between BMOV instructions.

B-60 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.3 Program That Uses Data History Function A For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs Common Items

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 K0 K0 H3300 K1 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified.*2 RUN monitor TO P M8000 *1 T0 K50 B FX FX

T0 3UC 3U -4AD FNC 79 K0 K198 K100 K1 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms.*2 -4AD TO P

FNC 78 The digital values set for channels 1 K0 K10 D0 K4 to 4 will be read out to D0 to D3. Clear data FROM P history C X000 FX FNC 79 K0 K199 H000F K1 Data history of all the channels will be 3U TO P erased. -4AD-ADP Temporarily stop data history X001 FNC 79 K0 K199 H0F00 K1 Data history of all the channels will be TO P temporarily stopped. Temporarily stop D

data history FX

X001 3G

Temporary stoppage of data history will be -2AD-BD FNC 79 K0 K199 H0000 K1 TO P canceled for all the channels.

T0 FNC 79 K0 K200 D100 K100 Channel-1 history data (100 data samples) TO will be read out to D100 to D199. E FX 3U

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 -4DA WDT

FNC 79 Channel-2 history data (100 data samples) K0 K1900 D200 K100 TO will be read out to D200 to D299. F FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 FX

WDT 3U -4DA-ADP

FNC 79 Channel-3 history data (100 data samples) K0 K3600 D300 K100 will be read out to D300 to D399. TO

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT G FX 3G

FNC 79 K0 K4300 D400 K100 Channel-4 history data (100 data samples) -1DA-BD TO will be read out to D400 to D499.

FNC 07 The watchdog timer will be refreshed.*3 WDT H *1. After setting the input mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each FX 3U

setting. -3A-ADP After this, if the same input mode is used, it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time (T0 K50) again. *2. The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM. Therefore, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. I -ADP *3. If a large amount of history data is read out, the scan time of the PLC will be become longer. If the FX 3U

scan time exceeds 200 ms, the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate, and the PLC will stop. -4AD-PT Insert WDT instruction (watchdog timer refresh) between BMOV instructions.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-61 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default)

7.4 Initialization Program for 4AD (Factory Default)

Execution of the following program will reset the input mode (BFM #0), offset data (BFM #41 to #44), gain data (BFM #51 to #54), etc. to the factory default status. 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section runs under the following conditions. 1) System configuration The FX3U-4AD (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Device assignment Device Description X000 4AD initialization command

2. Example of sequence program For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

4AD initialization command X000 FNC 12 K1 U0\G20 The 4AD will be initialized. MOV P (BFM #0 to #6999 will be cleared.)

For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs

4AD initialization command X000 FNC 79 K0 K20 K1 K1 The 4AD will be initialized. TO P (BFM #0 to #6999 will be cleared.)

3. Cautions It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization. Do not write any data to the buffer memory in this time. When initialization is complete, the value of BFM #20 will be reset to "K0". Priority is given to the data change disable (BFM #19). To initialize, write K2080 to BFM #19.

B-62 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

8. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error codes. B FX If the A/D conversion data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following items: FX 3UC 3U -4AD

PLC version number -4AD Wiring Program Error status C FX 3U 8.1 PLC Version Number Check -4AD-ADP

Verify that the PLC being used is of the following version or later.

FX3U-4AD D FX

Compatible PLC Version number 3G

FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later -2AD-BD FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later E FX

FX3UC-4AD 3U -4DA Compatible PLC Version number FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later F

→ For a detailed description of version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. FX 3U 8.2 Wiring Check -4DA-ADP

Check the wiring as follows: 1. Power G FX

The 4AD needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the 24 3G V indicator lamp of the 4AD is on. -1DA-BD 2. Analog input line Use the 2-core twisted shielded cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog input line from any other power lines or inductive lines. H FX

3. Use of current input mode 3U -3A-ADP To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to short-circuit the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal of the channel. Without short circuiting the terminals, it is impossible to obtain the correctly converted digital values. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 4. I -ADP FX 3U

8.3 Program Check -4AD-PT

Check the program as follows: 1. Storage devices J -ADP Check whether the device holding digital values contains any values written by other programs. FX 3U

2. Setting of averaging time and digital filter function -4AD-PTW Check if the averaging time or the digital filter function is set for the same channel. It is not possible to set both functions for the same channel. B-63 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.4 Error Status Check

8.4 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 4AD, the corresponding bit of BFM #29 (error status buffer memory) will turn on. To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below:

Bit No. Items Bit No. Items b0 Error detection b8 Data setting error detection b1 - b9 - b2 Power supply error b10 Averaging time setting error b3 Hardware error b11 Digital filter setting error b4 A/D conversion error b12 Abrupt change detection value setting error b5 - b13 Upper/lower limit detection setting error b6 BFM reading/writing impossible b14 - b7 - b15 Addition data setting error

1. Error detection (b0) 1) Description of error If any bits from b2 to b4 are turned on, this bit (b0) will turn on. 2. Power supply error (b2) 1) Description of error The 24 V power is not being supplied properly. 2) Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage. 3. Hardware error (b3) 1) Description of error 4AD may be defective. 2) Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 4. A/D conversion error (b4) 1) Description of error The A/D conversion value is abnormal. 2) Remedy Check the over-scale status data (BFM #28) to localize the error channel. After that, check to make sure the input analog data is in the specified range. 5. BFM reading/writing impossible (b6) 1) Description of error While voltage input characteristics are being changed, this bit will turn on. If this bit (b6) is on, A/D conversion data cannot be read out correctly or cannot be written to the BFM correctly. 2) Remedy Check the sequence program and confirm that the input characteristics (BFM #21 b0 to b3) are not being written continuously. 6. Data setting error detection (b8) 1) Description of error If any bits from b10 to b15 are turned on, this bit (b8) will turn on. 7. Averaging time setting error (b10) 1) Description of error The averaging time (BFM #2 to #5) is not set correctly. 2) Remedy Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095.

B-64 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program A 8. Digital filter setting error (b11) Common Items 1) Description of error The digital filter value (BFM #6 to #9) is not set correctly. 2) Remedy Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600. Also check that the averaging is not set for the selected channel. B FX FX 3UC 3U

9. Abrupt change detection value setting error (b12) -4AD -4AD 1) Description of error The abrupt change detection value (BFM #91 to #94) is not set correctly. 2) Remedy Check that the abrupt change detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode. If the C FX

value is out of the range, correct it. 3U -4AD-ADP 10. Upper/lower limit detection setting error (b13) 1) Description of error The lower limit error detection value (BFM #71 to #74) or the upper limit error detection value (BFM #81 to #84) is not set correctly. D FX

2) Remedy 3G

Check that the upper/lower limit error detection value is in the range specified for the selected input -2AD-BD mode. If the value is out of the range, correct it. 11. Addition data setting error (b15) 1) Description of error E The addition data (BFM #61 to #64) is not set correctly. FX 3U

2) Remedy -4DA Set the addition data again in the range from -16000 to +16000.

8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program F FX

If the remedies above cannot solve the problem, initialize and then check the conditions of the 4AD using the 3U -4DA-ADP test program. → For a detailed description of 4AD initialization program, refer to Section 7.4. → For a detailed description of the test program, refer to Chapter 4. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

B-65 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD/FX3UC-4AD (4-channel Analog Input) 8.5 4AD Initialization and Test Program

MEMO

B-66 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] C. FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-ADP special adapter (4-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the I -ADP unit. FX

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward 3U it to the end user. -4AD-PT

C-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input)

C-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3U-4AD-ADP (referred to as the 4AD-ADP). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions

The FX3U-4AD-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/ C

FX3GC Series PLC to read 4 channels of voltage/current data. FX

1) Up to 4 4AD-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. 3U -4AD-ADP *1 Up to 2 4AD-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. (including the other analog special adapters). 2) Either "voltage input" or "current input" can be specified for each channel. 3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U/ D FX

FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. 3G -2AD-BD

System Point and section to be referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum *1 FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2 maximum E

Number of connectable FX (including other analog special adapters) units 3U

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC -4DA Series PLC To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3. + + F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

*2 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. FX 3G -1DA-BD

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description H Contents Special devices of special devices, refer to FX *3 Transfer direction M/D8260 to M/D8269 3U •Analog data 1st adapter Chapter 4. -3A-ADP 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279*3 For a detailed description •Switching of input mode of a basic program, refer to •Setting of averaging 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 Section 4.8. time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3

Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units I -ADP and to configure the entire system. FX 3U -4AD-PT *1.Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type). *2.The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC. For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used. *3.FX3G and FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. J -ADP 1st adapter : M/D8280 to M/D8289 FX 2nd adapter : M/D8290 to M/D8299 3U -4AD-PTW 3rd and 4th adapters : Cannot be connected

C-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the 4AD-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Compatible PLC version number • Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: • Operation environment • Performance specifications Refer to the • Input characteristics common pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) • Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: • Selection of sensor cable • Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4. • Analog input line

Programming Programming: • Details of special devices • Examples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 5.

Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change: • Convenient function program • How to use scaling instruction

If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting."

C-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number Common Items

The 4AD-ADP is compatible with the following PLCs.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later*1 After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX *1

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later After April 2004 3UC 3U -4AD

FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product)

*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later supports the under-scale detection. C

1. Version check FX

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. 3U → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. -4AD-ADP 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the product. D → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, FX 3G

refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1. -2AD-BD

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for 4AD-ADP of the FX3G/ E FX

FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. 3U Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to -4DA each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting F "FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC. FX 3U 1. Japanese versions -4DA-ADP

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs G GX Works2 FX

Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC 3G SWDNC-GXW2-J -1DA-BD GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *2 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) FX3G PLC H FX

GX Works2 *3 3U

Ver. 1.07H or later -3A-ADP SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*4 (Offline mode) I -ADP FX

FX3GC PLC 3U

GX Works2 -4AD-PT Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) *2. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. J -ADP FX

*3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. 3U -4AD-PTW *4. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

C-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

C-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 4AD-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

Tests 10 times in each 3G

Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 direction (X-, Y-, and Z- -2AD-BD DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 to 57 − 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 to 150 9.8 − E Shock FX 2 147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z 3U resistance*1 -4DA Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min F voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal FX 3U

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working G

Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts FX environment 3G -1DA-BD Working *4 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If 4AD-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H *3. FX Other Other Other 3U PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment -3A-ADP

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. FX 3U

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 4AD-ADP. -4AD-PT The 4AD-ADP may malfunction.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

Item Specifications A/D conversion circuit 24V DC +20%-15%, 40mA driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block.) 5V DC, 15mA Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not necessary to supply the power.)

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Voltage input Current input Analog input 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC range (Input resistance: 194 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) Absolute input -0.5V, +15V -2mA, +30mA maximum Digital output 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV (10V/4000) 10μA (16mA/1600) ±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) Total accuracy ±1.0% (±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0% (±160μA) for 16mA full scale (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) A/D conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.

4080 1640

4000 1600

Input characteristics Digital output Digital output 0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.4mA Analog input Analog input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) points occupied

C-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time A 2.4 A/D Conversion Time Common Items

This section describes the A/D conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC B FX FX

1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing 3UC 3U -4AD A/D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. -4AD During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers.

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC C n'th 1st FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command D

conversion FX

Digital value reading 3G

200μs/4ch -2AD-BD A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200μs/4ch E FX 3U -4DA

2. A/D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. F 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected FX 3U

During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of -4DA-ADP 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter).

4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) G

During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200μs, and FX

the data read out will be written to the special data registers. 3G END instruction execution time will be "200μs × number of connected analog adapters." -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing A/D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers.

FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch

2. A/D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 3. If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter). 4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250μs, and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. END instruction execution time will be "250μs × number of connected analog adapters."

C-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 4AD-ADP wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the 4AD-ADP. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 4AD-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4AD-ADP

POWER

Signal Application

24+ 24+ External power

24- 24- Grounding terminal

VI+ V1+ I1+ I1+ Channel 1 analog input

COM1 COM1

V2+ V2+ I2+ I2+ Channel 2 analog input

COM2 COM2

V3+ V3+

I3+ I3+ Channel 3 analog input

COM3 COM3

V4+ V4+ I4+ I4+ Channel 4 analog input

COM4 COM4

C-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable ends as shown below. 1. Cables B FX FX

Applicable cable and tightening torque 3UC 3U -4AD Wire size (stranded/ Tightening -4AD Termination single-wire) torque 2 2 To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable Single-wire 0.3mm to 0.5mm (AWG22 to 20) and then twist the core before connection. C

To connect a single-wire cable, just strip the cover off the FX 2-wire 2 0.3mm (AWG22) cable before connection. 3U -4AD-ADP 0.22 to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 2 2 Rod terminal 0.3mm to 0.5mm 0.25Nm (recommended terminal) with (AWG22 to 20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation (Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool external view shown in the sleeve CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact D

following figure.) FX (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) 3G -2AD-BD *1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end E

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. FX

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 Nm. 3U Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures -4DA or malfunctions.

To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" F

cannot protrude. FX

- Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. 3U 9mm -4DA-ADP (0.35") To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve: Insulation sleeve Contact area If the cable cover is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into (Crimp area) the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while G referring to the external view. FX 8mm (0.31") 3G

-1DA-BD 2.6mm 14mm (0.1") Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) H *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 FX 3U

*4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 -3A-ADP 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right. I -ADP FX

Note: 3U -4AD-PT If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not The head be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque should be shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an straight. appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")). J -ADP 0.4mm 2.5mm FX Manufacturer Model 3U

(0.01") (0.09") -4AD-PTW Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5

C-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4AD-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

4AD-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series 4AD-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +15V +15V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block

Fuse Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounded power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

4AD-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +15V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounded power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit.

C-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 3.4 Analog Input Line A 3.4 Analog Input Line Common Items

For analog input, "voltage input" or "current input" can be selected for each channel.

If current input is selected: 4AD-ADP Terminal B FX block FX *1 147kΩ ch 3UC 3U

V+ -4AD *2 250Ω -4AD I+ 47kΩ COM

If voltage input is selected: C FX

*1 3U 147kΩ ch -4AD-ADP V+ 250Ω I+ 47kΩ COM

Connection of external +15V D power supply line FX 3G

24+ -2AD-BD 24V DC 24-

Class-D E grounding FX 3U

V+, I+, ch : represents the channel number. -4DA

*1. Use the 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines, and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines. F *2. If "current input" is selected, be sure to short the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal. FX 3U

(: Channel number). -4DA-ADP

3.5 Grounding G FX

Grounding should be performed as stated below. 3G The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. -1DA-BD Independent grounding should be performed for best results. When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following figure. H

→ For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC Series. FX 3U

Other Other Other -3A-ADP PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP 2 FX The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm ). 3U -4AD-PT The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 4AD-ADP.

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. 2) If the data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Communic FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD -ation FX3U-4AD -ADP -ADP -ADP special -ADP *1 adapter FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: M8260 to M8269 A/D Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 A/D Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: M8280 to M8289 A/D Special data registers: D8280 to D8289.

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. However, in this case, do not include the high- speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, and the CF card special adapter. *1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

C-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items

Communi- cation FX3U-4AD special FX3U-4AD *2 -ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC 2nd*1 1st Special devices B FX FX

Special auxiliary relays: 3UC 3U

M8280 to M8289 -4AD A/D Special data registers: -4AD D8280 to D8289. Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: C D8290 to D8299. FX 3U -4AD-ADP The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. However, in this case, do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter. *1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). D FX

*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC. 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If the 4AD-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Switches the input mode of M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 R/W channel 1 Switches the input mode of M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W channel 2 Special Section 4.3 Switches the input mode of auxiliary M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 R/W channel 3 relay Switches the input mode of M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 R/W channel 4 M8264 to M8274 to M8284 to M8294 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel-2 input data R Section 4.4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel-3 input data R D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel-4 input data R Averaging time for channel-1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Special Averaging time for channel-2 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) register Section 4.5 Averaging time for channel-3 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel-4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.6 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 1 R Section 4.7

C-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.3 Switching of Input Mode A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W B FX M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W FX Section 4.3

Special 3UC 3U M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 R/W auxiliary -4AD -4AD relay M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 R/W M8284 to M8294 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8289 M8299 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R C D8281 D8291 Channel-2 input data R FX Section 4.4 3U D8282 D8292 Channel-3 input data R -4AD-ADP D8283 D8293 Channel-4 input data R Averaging time for channel-1 D8284 D8294 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Special Averaging time for channel-2 D data D8285 D8295 R/W FX

(Setting range: 1 to 4095) 3G register Section 4.5 Averaging time for channel-3 -2AD-BD D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel-4 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.6 E FX

D8289 D8299 Model code = 1 R Section 4.7 3U -4DA

4.3 Switching of Input Mode

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 4AD-ADP between the current input mode F and the voltage input mode. FX 3U

To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays: -4DA-ADP FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th G M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 FX 3G

M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF: Voltage input -1DA-BD M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON: Current input M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC H Special auxiliary relay FX

Description 3U

1st 2nd -3A-ADP M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF: Voltage input M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON: Current input M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 I -ADP FX 3U

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) -4AD-PT To switch the channel input mode, create a sequence program as follows: 1) To switch the input mode of channel 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the of the 1st analog special adapter to voltage input mode: the current input mode: J -ADP M8001 M8000 FX 3U

M8260 M8261 -4AD-PTW Normally OFF Normally ON

C-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.4 Input Data

4.4 Input Data

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) The data converted by the 4AD-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 input data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel-3 input data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel-4 input data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 input data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel-3 input data D8283 D8293 Stores the channel-4 input data

The converted A/D immediate data or averaged data (data average conforming to the specified averaging time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data. → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.5. 1. Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only. Do not change (rewrite) the input data using sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the programming tool.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 Stores the channel-1 input data FNC 12 D8260 D100 MOV of the 1st analog special Normally adapter in the D100. ON

FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 input data D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special MOV adapter in the D101. Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer/counter set value or in a PID instruction.

C-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.5 Averaging Time A 4.5 Averaging Time Common Items

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) If the averaging time is set for the 4AD-ADP, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging B FX FX

time can be set for each channel. 3UC 3U -4AD

Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: -4AD FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th C FX

D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data 3U D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data -4AD-ADP D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data D FX

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC 3G -2AD-BD Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data E FX

D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data 3U -4DA D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data

1. Cautions regarding averaging time setting F If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data is stored to the special data register. FX 3U

If the averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095, the average value will be calculated to conform to -4DA-ADP the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register. After turning the PLC power on, the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time. After this, the average data will be stored. G

Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, an error FX

signal will be output. 3G -1DA-BD If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1". If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096". → For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) H FX

Sets the averaging time for 3U

M8000 -3A-ADP FNC 12 K1 D8264 channel-1 of the 1st analog MOV special adapter to 1. Normally ON Sets the averaging time for FNC 12 K5 D8265 channel-2 of the 1st analog MOV special adapter to 5. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status

4.6 Error Status

If an error is detected in the 4AD-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors. → For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5.

Bit Description Bit Description b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b7 4AD-ADP communication data error b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*1 b2 Channel-3 over-scale detection b9 Channel-2 under-scale detection*1 b3 Channel-4 over-scale detection b10 Channel-3 under-scale detection*1 b4 EEPROM error b11 Channel-4 under-scale detection*1 b5 Averaging time setting error b12 to b15 Unused 4AD-ADP hardware error b6 -- (Power supply error included)

*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver.2.70 or later supports the under-scale detection function. The under- scale detection function is valid only for current input mode. The FX3G and FX3GC are not supported. 1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a 4AD-ADP hardware error (b6) or 4AD-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 Normally ON MOV M8002 Error status of 3rd*2 analog special adapter RST M6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse *2 RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog status register b7 = OFF (communication data error)

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV

*2. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

C-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status A For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Common Items

M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog status register b7 = OFF (communication data error) B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC) -4AD

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV C

M0 FX

Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of 3U the 3rd *1 adapter. -4AD-ADP M1 Y001 Detects over-scale in channel 2 of the 3rd *1 adapter.

M2 Detects over-scale in channel 3 of D Y002 FX *1 the 3rd adapter. 3G M3 -2AD-BD Y003 Detects over-scale in channel 4 of the 3rd *1 adapter. M4 Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd *1 adapter E FX

M5 3U Y005 Averaging time setting error in -4DA 3rd *1 adapter M6 Y006 4AD-ADP hardware error in 3rd *1 adapter F M7 FX

Y007 4AD-ADP communication data 3U

error in 3rd *1 adapter -4DA-ADP

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

2. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) G D8268.0 FX Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of 3G the 1st adapter. -1DA-BD D8268.1 Y001 Detects over-scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter.

D8268.2 H Y002 Detects over-scale in channel 3 of FX

the 1st adapter. 3U D8268.3 -3A-ADP Y003 Detects over-scale in channel 4 of the 1st adapter.

D8268.4 Y004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter I -ADP FX

D8268.5 3U Y005 Averaging time setting error in -4AD-PT 1st adapter

D8268.6 Y006 4AD-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter J -ADP D8268.7 FX

Y007 4AD-ADP communication data error 3U in 1st adapter -4AD-PTW

C-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.7 Model Code

4.7 Model Code

Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the 4AD-ADP is connected, model code "1" is stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether a 4AD-ADP is connected or not.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

FNC224 D8269 K1 Y007 Checks the model code of the 1st LD = analog special adapter

C-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example A 4.8 Basic Program Example Common Items

Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion (A/D conversion) data. For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current B FX input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data FX

into D101. 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD M8001 Sets the input mode of channel M8280 1 to the voltage input mode (0 V to 10 V). M8000 Sets the input mode of channel M8281 2 to the current input mode C (4 mA to 20 mA). FX

M8000 3U

FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 -4AD-ADP MOV M8002 RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF Initial pulse D

RST M7 Error status: b7 = OFF FX 3G -2AD-BD FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8000 Sets the averaging time to "5" FNC 12 K5 D8284 MOV for channel-1 data. E FX

Sets the averaging time to "5" 3U FNC 12 K5 D8285

MOV for channel-2 data. -4DA M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D100 Stores the A/D converted MOV channel-1 digital data into D100.

FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the A/D converted F

MOV channel-2 digital data into D101. FX 3U

Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used -4DA-ADP in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction. *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example

For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data into D101.

M8001 Sets the input mode of channel M8260 1 to the voltage input mode (0 V to 10 V). M8000 Sets the input mode of channel M8261 2 to the current input mode (4 mA to 20 mA). M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF

RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF

M8000 Sets the averaging time to "5" FNC 12 K5 D8264 MOV for channel-1 data.

Sets the averaging time to "5" FNC 12 K5 D8265 MOV for channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the A/D converted MOV channel-1 digital data into D100.

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted MOV channel-2 digital data into D101.

Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction.

C-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics A Common Items

5. Changing of Input Characteristics

Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the input B FX characteristics. FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence programs to FX 3UC 3U

change the input characteristics. -4AD -4AD → For a detailed description of scaling instruction, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition.

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics C FX 3U

In the example explained in this section, the voltage input data "1 to 5 V" (Digital output value: 400 to 2000) is -4AD-ADP changed to the digital output value "0 to 10000". 1. Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed D (product specifications) Y-axis FX 3G

4000 10000 -2AD-BD Digital output Digital

2000 Digital output to be calculated (D110) E FX 3U -4DA

400

0 X-axis 1V 5V 10V 0 400(1V) 2000(5V) Analog input Digital value actually obtained F by A/D conversion FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

2. Example of program 1 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode (0 V to 10 V) M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF

RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF

M8000 FNC 12 K1 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 data MOV M8002 FNC 12 K2 D50 Program for setting scaling instruction data table MOV Item Description Value Device FNC 12 K400 D51 Number of points Sets the number of points 2 D50 MOV X- A/D converted digital value 400 D51 Start coordinate start point data FNC 12 K0 D52 point Y- Digital output value of changed MOV coordinate X-axis value start point 0D52 FNC 12 X- A/D converted digital value end 2000 D53 K2000 D53 coordinate point data MOV End point Y- Digital output value of changed 10000 coordinate X-axis value end point D54 FNC 12 K10000 D54 MOV M8000 FNC259 D8260 D50 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100. SCL

C-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics A 3. Example of program 2 (For FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC) Common Items For example, create the following program to change the digital input data (D110) of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8280 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode B FX (0V to 10V). FX M8000 FNC 12

D8288 K4M0 3UC 3U MOV -4AD -4AD M8002 RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF

RST M7 Error status: b7 = OFF C FX

FNC 12 3U K4M0 D8288 -4AD-ADP MOV M8000 FNC 12 Sets the averaging scaling to "1" K1 D8284 MOV for the channel-1 data. M8000 FNC 12 D D8280 D110 FX

MOV 3G -2AD-BD Check to make sure the digital FNC230 D110 K400 FNC237 D110 K2000 M10 LD>= AND<= value (D110) is in range. M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 SUB E Calculation for changing input FX

FNC 22 3U D111 K10000 D112 characteristics. MUL -4DA Stores the operation result in D100.

FNC 23 D112 K1600 D100 DDIV F 4. Cautions regarding programming FX 3U

GX Developer version 8.13P or later supports scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259). -4DA-ADP If the A/D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the scaling instruction (SCL/ FNC259), the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error (error code: K6706). G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check

6. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses. If the A/D conversion data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following items: PLC version number Wiring Special devices Programs Error status

6.1 PLC Version Number Check

Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. Check the version number of the FX3UC Series PLC. The version number should be 1.20 or later. Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3.

6.2 Wiring Check

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power The 4AD-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 4AD-ADP is on. 2. Analog input line Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines. 3. Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to shortcircuit the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal ( : channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted into proper digital data. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3.

C-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.3 Special Device Check A 6.3 Special Device Check Common Items

Check whether the special devices for the 4AD-ADP are being used correctly: 1. Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly. B FX Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode FX to the current input mode. 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 2. Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. C 3. Averaging time FX 3U

Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range -4AD-ADP from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. 4. Error status Check that no error is detected in the 4AD-ADP. D

If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. FX

→ For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4. 3G -2AD-BD

6.4 Program Check

Check the following items for the program: E FX

1. Clearing of error status at power on 3U -4DA When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (b6 and b7 should turn off) using the program. 2. Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program. F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Error Status Check

6.5 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 4AD-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn ON. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Over-scale detection (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The input analog value (voltage or current value) is outside the specified range. Voltage input mode : The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10.2 V. Current input mode : The input current value is over the specified upper limit of 20.4 mA. 2) Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel. 4. 4AD-ADP hardware error (b6) 1) Description of error The 4AD-ADP is not operating properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the 4AD-ADP. Also check that the 4AD-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

C-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Error Status Check A 5. 4AD-ADP communication error (b7) Common Items 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the 4AD-ADP and the PLC. 2) Remedy Check that the 4AD-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric B FX FX

representative. 3UC 3U -4AD 6. Under-scale detection (b8 to b11) -4AD 1) Description of error The input analog value (current value) is below the specified lower limit. This error is only detected for the current input mode, and indicates the input current is less than 2 mA. C FX

2) Remedy 3U

Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring. -4AD-ADP

D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

C-33 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-ADP (4-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Error Status Check

MEMO

C-34 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] D. FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3G-2AD-BD analog input expansion board (2-channel analog input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or I -ADP use the unit. FX

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward 3U it to the end user. -4AD-PT

D-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input)

D-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3G-2AD-BD (referred to as the 2AD-BD). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions

The FX3G-2AD-BD is an analog expansion board. Connect the FX3G-2AD-BD to the FX3G Series PLC to read C

2 channels of voltage/current data. FX

*1 3U 1) Up to 2 2AD-BD units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC. -4AD-ADP (including the other analog expansion board, analog special adapters). 2) Either "voltage input" or "current input" can be specified for each channel. 3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3G Series PLC. D FX

Point and section to be 3G System -2AD-BD

referred to

*1 2 maximum ( including other analog expansion boards, ( analog special adapters. FX3G Series PLC …… Number of connectable units E FX

Board B Board A 3U

To check the connectable -4DA …… PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3.

Connected to the option connector 1 F FX 3U

Connected to the option connector 2 -4DA-ADP Analog data For a detailed …… description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. Flowmeter, pressure sensor, etc. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

For FX3G Series PLC Contents Special devices …… For a detailed description Transfer direction of special devices, refer to •Analog data Board A M/D8260 to M/D8269 Chapter 4. H FX

•Switching of input mode Board B M/D8270 to M/D8279 For a detailed description 3U •Setting of averaging of a basic program, refer to -3A-ADP time Section 4.8.

Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. I -ADP FX

*1.Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the 2AD-BD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3G-2AD-BD

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Compatible PLC version number • Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: • Operation environment • Performance specifications Refer to the • Input characteristics common pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) • Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: • Selection of sensor cable • Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4.

Programming Programming: • Details of special devices • Examples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 5.

Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change

If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting."

D-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number Common Items

The 2AD-BD is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.10 or later After October 2008 B FX FX 3UC 3U

1. Version check -4AD -4AD Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number C

The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the FX product. 3U -4AD-ADP → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1.

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number D FX 3G

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 2AD-BD of the FX3G -2AD-BD Series PLC. Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. E FX

1. Japanese versions 3U -4DA Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later *1 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC F GX Developer FX Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G 3U

SWD5C-GPPW-J -4DA-ADP Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*2 (Offline mode) *1. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. G *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. FX 3G 2. English versions -1DA-BD

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later *3 H SWDNC-GXW2-E Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC FX 3U

GX Developer -3A-ADP Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-E Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later *4 Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) I -ADP *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. FX 3U

*4. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for the 2AD-BD.

2.1 Generic Specifications

Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating temperature -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) when stored Relative 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating humidity Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude (Hz) (m/s2) (mm) Tests 10 times in each Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 direction (X-, Y-, and Z- DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 to 57 − 0.075 Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9.8 − Shock*1 147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment

Working *3 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. *3. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 2AD-BD. The 2AD-BD may malfunction.

D-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.2 Performance Specifications A 2.2 Performance Specifications Common Items

Specifications Item Voltage input Current input B FX FX

Analog input 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 3UC 3U -4AD

range (Input resistance: 198.7 kΩ) (Input resistance: 250 Ω) -4AD Absolute input -0.5V, +15V -2mA, +30mA maximum Digital output 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary C

Resolution 2.5mV (10V/4000) 8μA (16mA/2000) FX 3U

±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale -4AD-ADP (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) (when ambient temperature is 25°C ± 5°C) Total accuracy ±1.0% (±100mV) for 10V full scale ±1.0% (±160μA) for 16mA full scale (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) A/D conversion 180 μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) D

time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.3. FX 3G -2AD-BD

4080 2040

4000 2000 E Input FX 3U

characteristics -4DA Digital output Digital output 0 10V 10.2V 0 4mA 20mA 20.32mA Analog input F Analog input FX 3U

The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC. -4DA-ADP Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) points occupied G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 2.3 A/D Conversion Time

2.3 A/D Conversion Time

This section describes the A/D conversion time. 1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing A/D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers.

FX3G Series PLC

Sequence Program

END instruction

A/D conversion Digital value A/D conversion Digital value start command reading start command reading

A/D A/D conversion conversion 180μs 180μs /2ch /2ch

FX3G-2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD Board A Board B

2. A/D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 3. If two analog expansion boards are connected During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected boards (in the order of board A → board B). 4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 2 channels will be read out in 180μs, and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. END instruction execution time will be "180μs × number of connected analog boards."

D-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 2AD-BD wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the 2AD-BD. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 2AD-BD are arranged as follows:

Signal V1+ I1+ V2+ I2+ VI- Channel 1 Channel 2 COM Application analog input analog input terminal

D-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable ends as shown below. 1. Cables B FX FX

following figure.) FX (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) 3G -2AD-BD *1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end E

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. FX

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 Nm. 3U Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures -4DA or malfunctions. To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" F

cannot protrude. FX

-1DA-BD 2.6mm 14mm (0.1") Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) H *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 FX 3U

*4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 -3A-ADP 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right. I -ADP FX

(0.01") (0.09") -4AD-PTW Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5

D-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 3.3 Analog Input Line

3.3 Analog Input Line

For analog input, "voltage input" or "current input" can be selected for each channel.

If current input selected: 2AD-BD Terminal block *1 110kΩ ch V + *2 250Ω I + 88.7kΩ Class-D grounding If voltage input is selected:

*1 110kΩ ch V + 250Ω I + 88.7kΩ Class-D grounding VI- *3

V +, I +, ch : represents the channel number.

*1. Use the 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines, and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines. *2. If "current input" is selected, be sure to short the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal. (: Channel number). *3. Make sure to short-circuit the "V+" and "VI-" terminals when ch is not used.

3.4 Grounding

Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

D-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data A Common Items

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 2AD-BD. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data -4AD

1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G Series PLC. C 2) If the data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be FX 3U

specified. -4AD-ADP 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned respectively to the analog expansion board (board A) connected to option connector 1 and the analog expansion board (board B) connected to option connector 2 in this order. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. D FX3G Series PLC FX 3G -2AD-BD FX3G Series PLC

Sequence Program E FX

Special auxiliary relays: Special auxiliary relays: 3U M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279 -4DA Special data register: Special data register: D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279

Option connector 1 Option connector 2 F

A/D A/D FX 3U FX3G-2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD -4DA-ADP Board A Board B*1 The analog expansion board connected to option connector 1 is regarded as the "board A", and the analog expansion board connected to option connector 2 is regarded as the "board B". *1. Board B is not available in the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type). G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If the 2AD-BD is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: R: Read / W: Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference Board A Board B M8260 M8270 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W Section 4.3 M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W Special auxiliary relay M8262 to M8272 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 D8260 D8270 Channel-1 input data R Section 4.4 D8261 D8271 Channel-2 input data R D8262 D8272 Unused (Do not use.) - - D8263 D8273 Averaging time for channel-1 (Setting D8264 D8274 R/W range: 1 to 4095) Special data register Section 4.5 Averaging time for channel-2 (Setting D8265 D8275 R/W range: 1 to 4095) D8266 D8276 Unused (Do not use.) - - D8267 D8277 D8268 D8278 Error status R/W Section 4.6 D8269 D8279 Model code = 3 R Section 4.7

4.3 Switching of Input Mode

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 2AD-BD between the current input mode and the voltage input mode. To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays: Special auxiliary relay Description Board A Board B M8260 M8270 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF: Voltage input M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON: Current input

1. Program Example To switch the channel input mode, create a sequence program as follows: 1) To switch the input mode of channel 1 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2 of the board A to the voltage input mode: of the board A to the current input mode:

M8001 M8000 M8260 M8261 Normally OFF Normally ON

D-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.4 Input Data A 4.4 Input Data Common Items

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) The data converted by the 2AD-BD will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table: B FX FX

Special data register 3UC 3U

Description -4AD Board A Board B -4AD D8260 D8270 Stores the channel-1 input data D8261 D8271 Stores the channel-2 input data C FX

The converted A/D immediate data or averaged data (data average conforming to the specified averaging 3U

time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data. -4AD-ADP → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.5. 1. Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only. D

Do not change (rewrite) the input data using sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the FX

programming tool. 3G -2AD-BD

2. Program Example

M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 input data E MOV of the board A in the D100. FX Normally 3U

ON -4DA Stores the channel-2 input data FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV of the board A in the D101

Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer/counter set value or in a PID instruction. F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.5 Averaging Time

4.5 Averaging Time

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) If the averaging time is set for the 2AD-BD, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging time can be set for each channel. Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: Special data register Description Board A Board B D8264 D8274 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8265 D8275 Averaging time for channel-2 data

1. Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data is stored to the special data register. If the averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095, the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register. After turning the PLC power on, the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time. After this, the average data will be stored. Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, an error signal will be output. If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1". If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096". → For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5 2. Program Example

M8000 Sets the averaging time for FNC 12 K1 D8264 channel-1 of the board A MOV to 1. Normally ON Sets the averaging time for FNC 12 K5 D8265 channel-2 of the board A MOV to 5.

D-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status A 4.6 Error Status Common Items

If an error is detected in the 2AD-BD, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: B FX Special data register FX

Description 3UC 3U

Board A Board B -4AD -4AD D8268 D8278 Stores the error status data.

→ For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5. 3U -4AD-ADP Bit Description Bit Description b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b6 2AD-BD hardware error D

b2 Unused b7 2AD-BD communication data error FX 3G

b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused -2AD-BD b4 EEPROM error - -

1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a 2AD-BD hardware error (b6) or 2AD-BD communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear E the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC. FX 3U

For this reason, be sure to create the following program: -4DA

M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0 Normally ON MOV F

M8002 FX Error status of board A RST M6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) 3U Initial pulse -4DA-ADP

RST M7 Error status of board A b7 = OFF (communication data error)

FNC 12 K4M0 D8268 MOV G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.6 Error Status

2. Program Example

M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0 MOV Normally ON

M0 Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of the board A. M1 Y001 Detects over-scale in channel 2 of the board A. M4 Y004 EEPROM error in board A

M5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in board A M6 Y006 2AD-BD hardware error in board A

M7 Y007 2AD-BD communication data error in board A

D-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 4.7 Model Code A 4.7 Model Code Common Items

Initial value: K3 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the 2AD-BD is connected, model code "3" is stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: B FX FX 3UC 3U

Special data register -4AD

Description -4AD Board A Board B D8269 D8279 Model code C

Use the special data registers above to check whether a 2AD-BD is connected or not. FX 3U -4AD-ADP 1. Program Example

FNC224 D8269 K3 Y007 Checks the model code of the LD = board A D FX 3G 4.8 Basic Program Example -2AD-BD

Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion (A/D conversion) data. The following program will set the board A to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode, and will E

store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data into D101. FX 3U -4DA M8001 Sets the input mode of the 1st board M8260 to the voltage input mode Normally (0 V to 10 V). OFF F

M8000 Sets the input mode of the 2nd board FX

M8261 to the current input mode 3U

Normally (4 mA to 20 mA). -4DA-ADP ON M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0 MOV G

M8002 FX

RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF 3G

Initial -1DA-BD pulse RST M7 Error status: b7 = OFF

FNC 12 K4M0 D8268 MOV H FX

M8000 3U

Sets the averaging time to "5" -3A-ADP FNC 12 K5 D8264 MOV for channel-1 data.

Sets the averaging time to "5" FNC 12 K5 D8265 MOV for channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 I -ADP D8260 D100 Stores the A/D converted FX

MOV channel-1 digital data into D100. 3U -4AD-PT FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted MOV channel-2 digital data into D101. Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used J -ADP in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction. FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

5. Changing of Input Characteristics

The input characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3G Series PLCs.

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000 (when the voltage input is 1 to 5V) to the digital output range of 0 to 10000. 1. Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed (product specifications) Y-axis 4000 10000 Digital output Digital

2000 to output Digital be calculated (D110)

400

0 X-axis 1V 5V 10V 0 400(1V) 2000(5V) Analog input Digital value actually obtained by A/D conversion

2. Example of program For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the board A: M8001 M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the Normally OFF voltage input mode (0V to 10V). M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0 Normally ON MOV M8002 RST M6 Error status : b6=OFF Initial pulse

RST M7 Error status : b7=OFF

FNC 12 K4M0 D8268 MOV M8000 FNC 12 K1 D8264 Sets the averaging scaling to "1" for MOV the channel-1 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D110 MOV

Check to make sure the digital FNC 230 D110 K400 FNC 237 D110 K2000 M10 LD>= AND<= value (D110) is in range.

M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 SUB

FNC 22 Calculation for changing input D111 K10000 D112 characteristics. MUL Stores the operation result in D100. FNC 23 D112 K1600 D100 DDIV

D-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

6. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses. B FX If the A/D conversion data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following items: FX 3UC 3U -4AD

PLC version number -4AD Installation Wiring Special devices C FX

Programs 3U Error status -4AD-ADP

6.1 PLC Version Number Check D FX Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC. The version number should be 1.10 or later. 3G

→ For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. -2AD-BD

6.2 Checking Installation E

Confirm that the 2AD-BD is attached correctly to the main unit. Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp FX

of the 2AD-BD is lit correctly. 3U -4DA → For a detailed description of installing, refer to FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.

6.3 Wiring Check F Check the following items for wiring: FX 3U -4DA-ADP 1. Analog input line Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines. 2. Use of current input mode G FX

To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to shortcircuit the line between the V+ terminal and the 3G

I+terminal (: channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted -1DA-BD into proper digital data. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. H

6.4 Special Device Check FX 3U -3A-ADP Check whether the special devices for the 2AD-BD are being used correctly: 1. Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly. Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode I -ADP FX

to the current input mode. 3U -4AD-PT 2. Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. 3. Averaging time J -ADP FX

Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range 3U from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. -4AD-PTW

D-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.5 Program Check

4. Error status Check that no error is detected in the 2AD-BD. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

6.5 Program Check

Check the following items for the program: 1. Clearing of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (b6 and b7 should turn off) using the program. 2. Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program.

6.6 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 2AD-BD, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b6 2AD-BD hardware error b2 Unused b7 2AD-BD communication data error b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error - - To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Over-scale detection (b0, b1) 1) Description of error The input analog value (voltage or current value) is outside the specified range. The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode (0 to 4080) or outside the range specified for the current input mode (0 to 2040). 2) Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 2) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel.

D-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.6 Error Status Check A 4. 2AD-BD hardware error (b6) Common Items 1) Description of error The 2AD-BD is not operating properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 2AD-BD is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric B FX FX

representative. 3UC 3U -4AD 5. 2AD-BD communication data error (b7) -4AD 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the 2AD-BD and the PLC. 2) Remedy C FX

Check that the 2AD-BD is correctly connected to the PLC. 3U

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric -4AD-ADP representative.

D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

D-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-2AD-BD (2-channel Analog Input) 6.6 Error Status Check

MEMO

D-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] E. FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4DA special extension block (4-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the I -ADP unit. FX 3U

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward -4AD-PT it to the end user.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property J -ADP rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. FX 3U

E-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)

E-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3U-4DA. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

FX3U-4DA is an analog special function block which is connectable to the FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC or FX3UC Series PLC to convert 4-channel digital signal from the PLC to analog signal (voltage/current). C 1) Up to 8*1 units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. FX 3U

(including the other special function blocks). -4AD-ADP 2) Each channel has either Voltage Output or Current Output specification. 3) The block converts the digital values stored in the FX3U-4DA buffer memory (BFM) in FX3U-4DA to analog signals (voltage/current). D

4) A predetermined output pattern is set as data table, and analog signal can be output according to the FX

data table. 3G -2AD-BD

Point and section to be System referred to

Up to 8*1 units connect to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC E (including other types of special function blocks) FX Number of connectable units 3U -4DA

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3. • • • • • • • • • F FX FX3U -4DA FX3U -4DA 3U 24V 24V D/A D/A -4DA-ADP

FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC Analog data For a detailed description of Inverter etc. wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX 3G

For a detailed description of -1DA-BD analog data output programs, refer to Chapter 4, 7, and 8. For a detailed description of Program Buffer memory the buffer memory, refer to Transmission direction Section 5.3, and Section 5.4. H FROM(FNC 78) BFM#0 FX TO(FNC 79) To use FROM/TO instruction 3U or to directly specify the BFM, -3A-ADP BFM direct refer to Section 5.2. specification(U\G)*2 BFM#3098

Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. I -ADP FX

*1. Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC. 3U -4AD-PT *2. This function is only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting to use the FX3U-4DA, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4DA

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Version number of compatible PLC • Version number of compatible programming tool Refer to Chapter 2.

Check specifications Specifications: • Operation environment Refer to the common • Performance specifications pages. • Output characteristics

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the analog control common pages.) Refer to Chapter 3. • Selection of units

Wiring Wiring: • Power supply line • Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4.

Analog data output (test program) Output mode specification: • Output mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5.

Buffer memory (BFM) check Buffer memory: • Buffer memory read/write method • List of buffer memories • Details of buffer memory Refer to Chapter 6.

When the table output function is used Table output function: • Preparation of data table • Transfer of data table to buffer memory • Execution of table output function Refer to Chapter 7.

Adjustment of output characteristics Adjustment of output characteristics: • Output characteristics change procedure

Refer to Chapter 8.

Program edit Program edit: • Basic program • Convenient function program

If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting."

E-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers Common Items

FX3U-4DA is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 3UC 3U -4AD FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) 1. Version check C

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version. FX

→ For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. 3U -4AD-ADP 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the product. → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, D refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1. FX 3G -2AD-BD 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

Use a programming tool with the following version number to create FX3U-4DA programs for the FX3G/FX3U/ FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. E FX

Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to 3U each PLC version. -4DA Some instructions and devices are not available in inapplicable versions.

1. Japanese versions

Model name F Applicable version Remarks FX (Media model name is shown below.) 3U

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs -4DA-ADP GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-J GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *1 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) G Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later 3G

Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) -1DA-BD FX3G PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later *2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G H SWD5C-GPPW-J FX 3U

Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) -3A-ADP FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*3 (Offline mode) FX3GC PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J I -ADP Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX

FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later 3U Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) -4AD-PT *1. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

E-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the FX3U-4DA. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

Tests 10 times in each 3G

Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 direction (X-, Y-, and Z- -2AD-BD DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 - 57 - 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 - 150 9.8 - E Shock FX 2 147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z 3U resistance*1 -4DA Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min F voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal FX 3U

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working G

Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts FX environment 3G -1DA-BD Working *4 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. When this block is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, the direct mounting method cannot be H used. FX 3U

*3. -3A-ADP Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP FX

→ For a detailed description of grounding, refer to Section 3.5. 3U -4AD-PT *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the FX3U-4DA, as it may malfunction. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

Item Specifications D/A conversion 24V DC ±10%, 160mA circuit drive power (It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block.) 5V DC, 120mA CPU drive power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to supply power externally.)

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Analog output -10V to +10V DC 0mA to 20mA DC, 4mA to 20mA DC range (External load: 1kΩ to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) Offset*1 -10V to +9V*2 0mA to 17mA*3 Gain*1 -9V to +10V*2 3mA to 30mA*3 Digital input With sign, 16bits, binary 15bits, binary Resolution 0.32mV (20V / 64,000) 0.63μA (20mA / 32,000) Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C Ambient temperature: 25°C±5°C ±0.3% (±60mV) for 20V full scale ±0.3% (±60μA) for 20mA full scale Overall accuracy*4 Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C Ambient temperature: 0°C to 55°C ±0.5% (±100mV) for 20V full scale ±0.5% (±100μA) for 20mA full scale Time required for 1ms (The number of selected channels will not affect this value.) D/A conversion The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the analog output area from the power supply unit. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 8 points (Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC.) points occupied *1. Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution. In output mode 1 or 4, however, the offset/gain cannot be adjusted. *2. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 1V ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 10 V *3. The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition: 3 mA ≤ (Gain - Offset) ≤ 30 mA *4. When the external load is less than 30kΩ, please use the output corrective function by load resistance. → For a detailed description of the output corrective function by load resistance, refer to Subsection 5.4.17.

E-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 A 2.4 Output Mode (Characteristics) BFM #0 Common Items

For the FX3U-4DA, there are two types of output characteristics: voltage (-10 to +10V) and current (0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA) output characteristics. The output characteristics depend on the set output mode as described below. B FX 1. Voltage output characteristics [-10 to +10V] (Output mode: 0, 1) FX 3UC 3U

Set output mode: 1 -4AD Set output mode: 0 -4AD Output type: Voltage output Output type: Voltage output (Specification of analog value mV) Analog output range: -10 to +10V Analog output range: -10 to +10V Digital input range: -32000 to +32000 Digital input range: -10000 to +10000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible C FX

Output voltage (V) Output voltage (V) 3U -4AD-ADP 10.2 10.2 Digital 10 Digital 10 value value -32000 0 -10000 0 32640 10200 32000 10000 D FX 3G -32640 -10200

-10 -10 -2AD-BD -10.2 -10.2

2. Current output characteristics [0 to 20mA] (Output mode: 2, 4) E FX

Set output mode: 4 3U Set output mode: 2 Output type: Current output -4DA Output type: Current output (Specification of analog value μA) Analog output range: 0 to 20mA Analog output range: 0 to 20 mA Digital input range: 0 to 32000 Digital input range: 0 to 20000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible Offset/gain adjustment: Impossible F Current Current FX output (mA) output (mA) 3U -4DA-ADP 20.4 20.4

20 20 G FX 3G -1DA-BD

0 32000 32640 0 20000 20400 Digital value Digital value

3. Current Output characteristics [4 to 20mA] (Output mode: 3) H FX

Set output mode: 3 3U

Output type: Current output -3A-ADP Analog output range: 4 to 20mA Digital input range: 0 to 32000 Offset/gain adjustment: Possible

Current I -ADP output (mA) FX 3U

20.32 -4AD-PT 20

J -ADP 4 FX 3U

0 32000 32640 -4AD-PTW Digital value

E-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output)

3. Wiring

This chapter describes wiring of the FX3U-4DA. Observe the following cautions wiring the FX3U-4DA.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

E-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout A 3.1 Terminal Layout Common Items

The terminals of FX3U-4DA are arranged as follows:

Signal Application B FX 24+ FX 24V DC power supply 24- 3UC 3U -4AD Ground terminal -4AD V+ VI- Channel-1 analog output I+ • Do not connect any lines. C V+ FX 3U

VI- Channel-2 analog output -4AD-ADP I+ • Do not connect any lines. V+ VI- Channel-3 analog output D

I+ FX

• Do not connect any lines. 3G V+ -2AD-BD VI- Channel-4 analog output I+ E FX 3U -4DA 3.2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque

The FX3U-4DA terminal block is designed for M3 screws. The end disposal of the cable shown below. F

Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. FX Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specicified torque. 3U -4DA-ADP Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. When one wire is connected to one terminal

φ3.2 (0.13") Terminal Crimp 6.2 mm (0.24") screw terminal G FX

or less 3G -1DA-BD φ3.2 (0.13")

6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal’[Žq or less H

When two wires are connected to one terminal FX 3U

φ3.2 (0.13") -3A-ADP 6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal Crimp or less screw terminal 6.3 mm(0.25") or more I -ADP φ3.2 (0.13") FX 6.2 mm (0.24") Terminal 3U or less -4AD-PT 6.3 mm(0.25") or more J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals

3.3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals

3.3.1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit

Below are examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series PLC. 1) Sink input [- common] wiring

AC power 100 to 240 V

Class-D grounding L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-

+15V

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (main unit) -15V FX3U-4DA

Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "24V" terminal.

2) Source input [+ common] wiring

AC power 100 to 240 V

Class-D grounding L N S/S 0V 24V 24+ 24-

+15V

FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (main unit) -15V FX3U-4DA

Connect the "S/S" terminal of the main unit to the "0V" terminal.

3.3.2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals

Ground the " " terminal and " " terminal to the Class - D grounding line (100 Ω or less) together with the ground terminal of the main unit. For the timing of power-on/off when using an external power supply, see the following manual of the connected PLC. → Refer to the FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition. → Refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.

E-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Output Wiring A 3.4 Analog Output Wiring Common Items

The analog output mode, "voltage output "or "current output", can be selected for each channel.

External power supply FX3U-4DA wiring B FX +15V FX 24V DC 24+ 3UC 3U -4AD *1 24- -15V -4AD

Class-D grounding *2 If voltage output is selected C ch FX

Shield *3 3U

V+ -4AD-ADP I+ ch VI- *4 *5 D FX

If current output is 3G

selected ch -2AD-BD Shield *3 V+ I+ ch VI- E *5 FX 3U

ch : represents the channel number. -4DA

*1. For FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (AC power type), the 24V DC service power supply is also available. *2. Do not connect any wires to the " • " terminal. F FX

*3. Use a 2-core twisted shield wire for analog output wire, and separate it from other power lines or 3U

inductive lines. -4DA-ADP *4. If there is ripple or noise in the output voltage, connect a capacitor of approximately 0.1 to 0.47μF 25V in the vicinity of the signal receiving side. *5. Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side. G FX 3G

3.5 Grounding -1DA-BD

Grounding should be performed as stated below. The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. H

Independent grounding should be performed for best results. FX

When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following 3U figure. -3A-ADP → For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of each Series.

Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment I -ADP FX 3U

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding -4AD-PT Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG14 (2mm2.) The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Analog Output Procedures

4. Analog Output

This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary for analog output by the FX3U-4DA. Follow the procedure below to confirm that correct analog values can be output.

4.1 Analog Output Procedures

1 Unit number check Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left. When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, the unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned. Check the unit number assigned to the FX3U-4DA.

Unit Unit Unit number: 0 number: 1 number: 2

Main unit Input/output Special Special Input/output Special (FX3U Series extension extension PLC) block function block function block block function unit

2 Output mode (BFM #0) setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected, set the output mode (BFM #0) for each channel. Use hexadecimal numbers for output mode setting. Set the corresponding channel digit to the output mode setting value specified in the following table: H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2

Setting Output mode Analog output range Digital input range value 0 Voltage output mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 Voltage output 1 -10V to +10V -10000 to +10000 analog value mV specification mode 2 Current output mode 0mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 Current output 4 0mA to 20mA 0 to 20000 analog value μA specification mode F Channel not used → For a detailed description of the standard output characteristics, refer to Section 2.4. → For a detailed description of the output mode (BFM #0), refer to Subsection 5.4.1.

E-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Analog Output Procedures A Common Items 3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to output analog signals. While referring to step 2, set the output mode "H****". While referring to step 1, set the unit number in B FX *1 FX - Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs) 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Output mode (step 2) Unit number (step 1) Initial pulse M8002 C FNC 12 H**** U\G0 Specify the output mode (BFM #0) for channels FX

MOV P 1 to 4. 3U RUN monitor -4AD-ADP M8000 T0 K50 D Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0. FX Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. Data to be output to channels 1 to 4 are stored in 3G Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 to D3. -2AD-BD Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3.

T0 FNC 15 Data (BMF #1 to 4) to be output to channels 1 D0 U \G1 K4 to 4 are transferred from D0 to D3. E

BMOV FX 3U -4DA Unit number (step 1)

*1. Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G/FX3GC PLCs. F FX

Transfer of sequence program and analog output signal check 3U 4 -4DA-ADP 1) Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC. 2) Check that analog signals appropriate to the set output data are output. → If analog signals are not output correctly, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting." G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory

5. Buffer Memory (BFM)

This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in FX3U-4DA.

5.1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory

1. Assignment of unit numbers Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the left one. When the units/blocks are connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC, unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned.

When connected to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC

Unit Unit Unit number: 0 number: 1 number: 2

Input/output Input/output Main unit extension Special Special extension Special block function block function block block function unit

When connected to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC

Unit number: 0 (Incorporated Unit Unit Unit CC-Link/LT) number: 1 number: 2 number: 3

Main unit Input/output Input/output Special Special Special (FX3UC-32MT extension extension -LT(-2)) block function block function block block function unit

E-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method A 2. Outline of buffer memory Common Items The digital values set in FX3U-4DA will be converted to analog signals. To switch the output mode between voltage output and current output, or to adjust the offset or gain, numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written/set in the FX3U-4DA buffer memory. To read/write data from/into the buffer memory of FX3U-4DA, the buffer memory can be directly specified using FROM/TO instructions or an applied instruction. Using this function, sequence programs can be easily B FX created. FX 3UC 3U

BFM direct -4AD Main unit FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA -4AD specification*1 TO instruction Buffer memory BFM direct C

FX *1 BFM direct

specification 3U specification*1 TO instruction -4AD-ADP Sequence Buffer FROM instruction program memory Digital BFM direct Digital value specification*1 value D FROM D/A D/A FX

instruction conversion conversion 3G -2AD-BD

Analog data Analog data E FX

Inverter, DC motor, etc. 3U -4DA

*1. Since buffer memory direct specification (U\G) can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction, programs can be created efficiently. (This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.) F → For a detailed description of buffer memory reading/writing, refer to Section 5.2. FX 3U

→ For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4. -4DA-ADP

5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method G FX

To read or write the buffer memory of FX3U-4DA, use FROM/TO instructions or the buffer memory direct 3G specification function*1. -1DA-BD To use the buffer memory direct specification function*1, however, it is necessary to adopt the software compatible with the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. *1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. H

→ For a detailed description of the software compatible with the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC, FX

refer to Section 1.4. 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Buffer Memory Reading/Writing Method

5.2.1 Buffer memory direct specification (FX3U, FX3UC PLC only)

When directly specifying the buffer memory, specify the following device in the source or destination area of the applied instruction as follows:

U\G Enter a numeric value in Unit number (0 to 7) Buffer memory number (0 - 3098)

1. Example 1 If the following program is created, data in buffer memory (BFM #10) of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data (K10), and then the multiplication result will be output to the data registers (D10, D11).

READ command FNC 22 U1\G10 K10 D10 MUL

Multiplication result Unit number Buffer memory number Multiplier

2. Example 2 If the following program is created, the value in the data register (D20) is added to K10 and written to buffer memory (BFM #6) of unit 1.

WRITE command FNC 20 D20 K10 U1\G6 ADD Addition Unit number result ( Buffer memory number ) Augend Addend

5.2.2 FROM/TO instruction (FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC PLC)

1. FROM instruction (Reading out BFM data to PLC) Use FROM instruction to read out the data from the buffer memory. In a sequence program, use this instruction as follows:

READ command FNC 78 K1 K10 D10 K1 FROM Number of transfer Unit number data points Buffer memory number Transfer-to register

If the above program is created, 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM #10 of unit No.1 to the data register (D10). 2. TO instruction (Writing PLC data into BFM) Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory. In a sequence program, use this instruction as follows:

WRITE command FNC 79 K1 K0 H3300 K1 TO Number of transfer Unit number data points Buffer memory number Transfer source

If the above program is created, 1 point of data (H3300) will be written to buffer memory (BFM #0) of unit No.1.

E-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) A 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) Common Items

FX3U-4DA incorporates the following buffer memories. → For a detailed description of the buffer memory, refer to Section 5.4 and subsequent sections.

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference B FX FX

Hexadeci- Subsection 3UC 3U #0*1 Output mode setting for channels 1 to 4 *2 H0000 at delivery mal 5.4.1 -4AD -4AD #1 Channel 1 output data K0 Decimal

#2 Channel 2 output data Depending on the K0 Decimal Subsection #3 Channel 3 output data mode used K0 Decimal 5.4.2 C

#4 Channel 4 output data K0 Decimal FX

Hexadeci- Subsection 3U *1 Output setting upon PLC stop *3 H0000 -4AD-ADP #5 mal 5.4.3 Hexadeci- Subsection #6 Output status - H0000 mal 5.4.4 #7, #8 Not used --- - D

Command to write offset/gain setting value of Hexadeci- Subsection FX #9 *4 H0000 channels 1 to 4 mal 5.4.5 3G -2AD-BD #10*1 Channel-1 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal *1 #11 Channel-2 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection mode used the mode used 5.4.6 #12*1 Channel-3 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal *1 E #13 Channel-4 offset data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal FX 3U *1 #14 Channel-1 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal -4DA *1 #15 Channel-2 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection mode used the mode used 5.4.6 #16*1 Channel-3 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal #17*1 Channel-4 gain data (Unit: mV or μA) Decimal F #18 Not used ---- FX 3U

To permit data -4DA-ADP change: K3030 Subsection *1 Setting change prohibition To disable data K3030 at delivery Decimal #19 5.4.7 change: Value other than K3030 Initialization function: G FX

Set "K1" in this buffer memory to perform Subsection 3G #20 K0 or K1 K0 Decimal

initialization. At the completion of initialization, 5.4.8 -1DA-BD the "K0" will be automatically set. #21 to #27 Not used ---- Disconnection detection status (Valid only in Hexadeci- Subsection #28 - H0000 current mode selection) mal 5.4.9 H Hexadeci- Subsection FX #29 Error status - H0000 3U

mal 5.4.10 -3A-ADP Subsection #30 Model code K3030 - K3030 Decimal 5.4.11 #31 Not used ---- *1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain the data. I -ADP FX

*2. Specify the output mode of each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 4 and F in each digit. 3U -4AD-PT *3. Specify the data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in each digit. *4. Use b0 to b3. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM)

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Data to be output from channel 1 upon PLC stop Depending on the *1 K0 Decimal #32 (Valid only if BFM #5 = H2) mode used Data to be output from channel 2 upon PLC stop Depending on the #33*1 K0 Decimal (Valid only if BFM #5 = H2) mode used Subsection Data to be output from channel 3 upon PLC stop Depending on the 5.4.12 *1 K0 Decimal #34 (Valid only if BFM #5 = H2) mode used Data to be output from channel 4 upon PLC stop Depending on the *1 K0 Decimal #35 (Valid only if BFM #5 = H2) mode used #36, #37 Not used ---- Hexadeci- Subsection #38 Upper/lower limit function setting *2 H0000 mal 5.4.13 Hexadeci- Subsection #39 Upper/lower limit function status - H0000 mal 5.4.14 Hexadeci- Subsection #40 Clear of upper/lower limit function status *3 H0000 mal 5.4.15 #41 Channel-1 lower limit of upper/lower limit function K-32640 Decimal #42 Channel-2 lower limit of upper/lower limit function Depending on the K-32640 Decimal Subsection #43 Channel-3 lower limit of upper/lower limit function mode used K-32640 Decimal 5.4.16 #44 Channel-4 lower limit of upper/lower limit function K-32640 Decimal #45 Channel-1 upper limit of upper/lower limit function K32640 Decimal

#46 Channel-2 upper limit of upper/lower limit function Depending on the K32640 Decimal Subsection #47 Channel-3 upper limit of upper/lower limit function mode used K32640 Decimal 5.4.16 #48 Channel-4 upper limit of upper/lower limit function K32640 Decimal #49 Not used ---- Corrective function setting by load resistance Hexadeci- Subsection *1 *4 H0000 #50 (Valid only in voltage output mode) mal 5.4.17

#51*1 Load resistance value for channel 1 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal *1 #52 Load resistance value for channel 2 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal Subsection 5.4.17 #53*1 Load resistance value for channel 3 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal

#54*1 Load resistance value for channel 4 (Unit: Ω) K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal #55 to #59 Not used ---- Subsection *1 Status automatic transfer function setting *5 K0 Decimal #60 5.4.18 Error status data (BFM #29) automatic transfer- Subsection *1 to data register specification (Valid if b0 of BFM K200 Decimal #61 5.4.19 #60 is set to ON) K0 to 7999 (BFM Upper/lower limit function status data (BFM #39) #61, #62 and #63 Subsection *1 automatic transfer-to data register specification K201 Decimal #62 must have different 5.4.20 (Valid if b1 of BFM #60 is set to ON) values.) Disconnection detection status data (BFM #28) Subsection *1 automatic transfer-to data register specification K202 Decimal #63 5.4.21 (Valid if b2 of BFM #60 is set to ON) #64 to #79 Not used ---- *1. If power failure occurs, the EEPROM will retain the data. *2. Specify the use of the upper/lower limit function for each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in each digit. *3. Use b0 to b1. *4. Specify the use of the corrective function by load resistance for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit. *5. Use b0 to b2.

E-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.3 Buffer Memory List (BFM) A Common Items

BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Hexadeci- #80 Start/stop of table output function *1 H0000 mal #81 Channel-1 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal B FX #82 Channel-2 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal FX 3UC 3U

#83 Channel-3 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal -4AD -4AD #84 Channel-4 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal Number of times of output execution of table #85 K0 to K32767 K0 Decimal from channel 1

Number of times of output execution of table Chapter 6 C #86 K0 to K32767 K0 Decimal FX from channel 2 3U

Number of times of output execution of table -4AD-ADP #87 K0 to K32767 K0 Decimal from channel 3 Number of times of output execution of table #88 K0 to K32767 K0 Decimal from channel 4 Hexadeci- #89 Output completion flag of table output function - H0000 D mal FX 3G

#90 Table output error code - K0 Decimal -2AD-BD #91 Table output error occurrence number - K0 Decimal #92 to #97 Not used ---- #98 Head device number in data table K0 to K32767 K1000 Decimal Hexadeci- E #99 Data table transfer command *2 H0000 Chapter 6 FX

mal 3U

#100 to #398 Data table in pattern 1 - K0 Decimal -4DA #399 Not used ---- #400 to #698 Data table in pattern 2 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 #699 Not used ---- F #700 to #998 Data table in pattern 3 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 FX 3U

#999 Not used ---- -4DA-ADP #1000 to Data table in pattern 4 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 #1298 #1299 Not used ---- #1300 to G

Data table in pattern 5 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 FX #1598 3G

#1599 Not used ---- -1DA-BD #1600 to Data table in pattern 6 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 #1898 #1899 Not used ---- #1900 to H

Data table in pattern 7 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 FX #2198 3U

#2199 Not used ---- -3A-ADP #2200 to Data table in pattern 8 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 #2498 #2499 Not used ---- #2500 to I -ADP Data table in pattern 9 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 FX #2798 3U

#2799 Not used ---- -4AD-PT #2800 to Data table in pattern 10 - K0 Decimal Chapter 6 #3098 *1. Specify whether to start or stop the table output function for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit. J -ADP FX

*2. Specify the data table transfer command and the register type setting 0 or 1 in the last two digits of 3U the hex code. -4AD-PTW

E-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.1 BFM #0: Output mode specification

Initial value (at delivery): H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

Specify the output modes of channel 1 to 4. 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the output modes of the 4 channels. Change the value of each digit to change the output mode of each channel. 0 to 4 and F can be set for each digit. H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2 The different types of output modes are shown in the following table: → For a detailed description of output characteristics, refer to Section 2.4.

Set value Output mode Analog output range Digital input range [HEX] 0 Voltage output mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 Voltage output *1 -10V to +10V -10000 to +10000 1 analog value mV specification mode 2 Current output mode 0mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 Current output *1 0mA to 20mA 0 to 20000 4 analog value μA specification mode 5 to E Invalid (setting values unchanged) - - F Channel not used *1. The offset/gain values cannot be changed. 1. Cautions regarding output mode setting While the output mode is being changed, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). At the completion of change of the output mode, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output is restarted. It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the output mode. For this reason, after changing the output mode, be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more, and then write the other data. When the output mode is changed, the settings in the following buffer memory are initialized according to the new output mode. BFM #5 (output setting upon PLC stop)*1 BFM #10 to #13 (offset data)*2 BFM #14 to #17 (gain data)*2 BFM #28 (disconnection detection status)*3 BFM #32 to #35 (output data upon PLC stop)*2 BFM #38 (upper/lower limit function setting)*1 BFM #41 to #44 (lower limit values of upper/lower limit function)*2 BFM #45 to #48 (upper limit values of upper/lower limit function)*2 BFM #50 (Setting of output corrective function by load resistance)*1 *1 FX3U-4DA initializes the corresponding bit to the channel where the user has changed the output mode. *2 FX3U-4DA initializes the corresponding buffer memory to the channel where the user has changed the output mode. *3 These settings are initialized only when the output mode is changed from current output mode (mode 2, 3 or 4) to voltage output mode (mode 0 or 1).

E-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A HFFFF (use of no channels) cannot be set. Common Items 2. Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will also be written to the FX3U-4DA EEPROM. Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do not B FX frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM). FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 5.4.2 BFM #1 to #4: Output data

Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) C FX

Input the digital values corresponding to the analog signals to be output in BFM #1 to #4. 3U -4AD-ADP

BFM number Description #1 Data to be output from channel 1 #2 Data to be output from channel 2 D #3 Data to be output from channel 3 FX 3G

#4 Data to be output from channel 4 -2AD-BD

5.4.3 BFM #5: Output setting upon PLC stop

Initial value: H0000 E FX

Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) 3U -4DA It is possible to set the output conditions from channel 1 to 4 when the PLC is in the stopped state.

H F FX

ch4 ch1 3U ch3 ch2 -4DA-ADP

Set value (HEX) Output conditions 0 The final value during running is held. G FX

1 The offset signal is output.* 3G

2 The output data set in BFM #32 to #35 are output.* -1DA-BD 3 to F Invalid (setting values unchanged)

* The output conditions depend on the output mode (BFM #0). H 1. Cautions regarding output conditions setting upon PLC stop FX 3U

While changing the setting values, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output -3A-ADP status (BFM #6). At the completion of change, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will be restarted. 2. Caution regarding EEPROM writing I -ADP FX

If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written 3U -4AD-PT in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000 times. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories (BFM). J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.4 BFM #6: Output status

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

The output status information of channel 1 to 4 is stored.

H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2

Value status (HEX) Description 0 Output updating is stopped.* 1 Under output updating

* The output conditions conform to the output setting upon PLC stop (BFM #5). 1. Cautions regarding use of output status The output status setting is valid only if the PLC is running. When the PLC is stopped, H0000 is automatically written. When the setting in any of the following buffer memory areas is changed, output updating is stopped. H0000 is automatically written in BFM #6. BFM #0 (Output mode setting) BFM #5 (Output setting upon PLC stop) BFM #9 (Offset/gain setting value write command) BFM #19 (Setting change prohibition) BFM #20 (Initialization function) BFM #32 to #35 (Data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop) BFM #50 (Corrective function setting by load resistance) BFM #51 to #54 (Load resistance for each channel) BFM #60 (Status automatic transfer function Setting) BFM #61 (Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification) BFM #62 (Upper/lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified data register) BFM #63 (Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register specification) BFM #99 (Data table transfer command)

E-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.5 BFM #9: Offset/gain setting value write command Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) Channel numbers are assigned to 4 lower bits of BFM #9. If one of those bits is turned on, the offset data (BFM #10 to #13) and the gain data (BFM #14 to #17) of the corresponding channel will be written in the B FX internal memory (EEPROM). When written in the internal memory, the data will be valid. FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1. Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM #9 -4AD

Bit No. Description b0 Channel-1 offset data (BFM #10) and gain data (BFM #14) writing C b1 Channel-2 offset data (BFM #11) and gain data (BFM #15) writing FX 3U

b2 Channel-3 offset data (BFM #12) and gain data (BFM #16) writing -4AD-ADP b3 Channel-4 offset data (BFM #13) and gain data (BFM #17) writing b4 to b15 Not used

The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time. (Set "H000F" to write the data D of all the channels in the EEPROM.) FX 3G

On completion of writing, "H0000" (b0 to b3: OFF) will be set automatically. -2AD-BD 2. Cautions regarding giving offset/gain setting value write command While changing the setting, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). E

At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will FX be restarted. 3U -4DA If the analog value specification mode (mode 1 or 4) is used, the offset/gain cannot be changed. When other output mode has been set, it is possible to change to same characteristics as those in the output mode 1 or 4. If the write command is not executed, the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM. F FX

When b1 of the error status (BFM #29) is set to ON, the offset and gain data will not be stored in the 3U

EEPROM. -4DA-ADP → For a detailed description of offset and gain setting, refer to Subsection 5.4.6.

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.6 BFM #10 to #13: Offset data/BFM #14 to #17: Gain data

Setting range: See below Initial value: See below Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

If the output mode is specified in BFM #0, the initial value of the offset data and gain data of each channel will be automatically stored. The initial offset data and the gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table: Offset data: Analog output value when the output data in BFM #1 to #4 are 0 (reference offset value) Gain data: Analog output value when the output data in BFM #1 to #4 are the reference gain values (The reference gain value depends on the set output mode.) 1. Reference offset/gain value and initial value set Offset (channels 1 to 4: Gain (channels 1 to 4: Output mode (BFM #0) BFM #10 to #13) BFM #14 to #17) Reference Reference Set value Description Initial value Initial value value value Voltage output 0 0 0mV 16000 5000mV (-10 V to +10 V: -32000 to +32000) Voltage output Analog value mV 0 0mV 5000 5000mV 1 specification mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change (-10 V to +10 V: -10000 to +10000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible) Current output 2 00μA 16000 10000μA (0 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 32000) Current output 3 04000μA 16000 12000μA (4 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 32000) Current output Analog value μA 0 0μA 10000 10000μA 4 specification mode (Data change (Data change (Data change (Data change (0 mA to 20 mA: 0 to 20000) impossible) impossible) impossible) impossible)

2. Offset/gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the output characteristics. The offset and gain data can be set for each channel. If the voltage output mode is set, write the offset and gain data in mV. If the current output mode is set, write the offset and gain data in μA. To change the offset or gain data, execute the offset/gain setting value write command (BFM #9). The setting range is shown in the following table.

Voltage output (mV) Current output (μA) Offset data -10000 to +9000*1 0 to 17000*2 Gain data -9000 to +10000*1 3000 to 30000*2

*1. The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions: 1000 ≤ Gain value - Offset value ≤ 10000 *2. The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions: 3000 ≤ Gain value - Offset value ≤ 30000

E-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 3. Cautions regarding offset/gain data change Common Items If the analog value specification mode (mode 1 or 4) is used, the offset/gain cannot be changed. However, the characteristics can be changed as those in the output mode 1 or 4 by setting the following offset and gain data in the output mode 0 or 2. Offset data Gain data B FX Change characteristics from output mode 0 to 1 0 16000 FX 3UC 3U -4AD

Change characteristics from output mode 2 to 4 0 16000 -4AD

The offset and gain data should be set before the value write command BFM #9 is executed. The resolution cannot be increased by changing the output characteristics. C

When the value specified as the output mode (BFM #0) is changed, the initial value of offset and gain data FX

in each output mode will be automatically written. 3U -4AD-ADP Even if the output characteristics are changed, the actual valid output range will not be changed: -10 V to +10 V for the voltage output mode, and 0 mA to 20 mA in the current output mode. → For a detailed description of output characteristics change, refer to Chapter 7. D FX

5.4.7 BFM #19: Data change prohibition of setting change 3G -2AD-BD

Setting range: K3030 or other than K3030 Initial value: K3030 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) E Setting in the following buffer memory areas is prohibited. FX 3U

BFM #0 (output mode setting Output mode setting) -4DA BFM #5 (output setting upon PLC stop) BFM #9 (offset/gain setting value write command) BFM #10 to #13 (offset data) BFM #14 to #17 (gain data) F BFM #20 (initialization function) FX 3U

BFM #32 to #35 (data to be output upon PLC stop) -4DA-ADP BFM #38 (upper/lower limit function setting) BFM #41 to #48 (upper and lower limit values of upper/lower limit function) BFM #50 (corrective function setting by load resistance) BFM #51 to #54 (load resistance values) BFM #60 (status automatic transfer function setting) G FX

BFM #61 (Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification) 3G BFM #62 (Upper/lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified register specification) -1DA-BD BFM #63 (Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to specified data register specification)

Specify the following value as the setting change prohibition mode (BFM #19). H Set value Description FX 3U

K3030 permits data change -3A-ADP Other than K3030 disables data change

1. Cautions regarding setting of the setting change prohibition mode While changing the setting value, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output I -ADP FX

status (BFM #6). 3U

At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output -4AD-PT will be restarted. 2. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in J -ADP the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. FX

Do not turn off power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories 3U The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not -4AD-PTW frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).

E-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.8 BFM #20: Initialization function (resetting to factory default status)

Setting range: K0 or K1 Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When K1 is set in BFM #20, all functions and all buffer memory (BFM #0 to #3098) will be initialized to the default status. When BFM #20 is not K0 or K1, this function is invalid. (The settings will not be changed, and the functions will not be initialized.) 1. Cautions regarding initialization function During initialization, output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). At the completion of initialization, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will be restarted. It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data. Do not set (write) data in the buffer memory during this period. Priority is given to the setting of the value change prohibition mode (BFM #19). At the completion of initialization, the value of BFM #20 will automatically change to K0.

5.4.9 BFM #28: Disconnection detection status (only in current output mode)

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

When a wire-break is detected, the bit corresponding to the relevant channel will turn on.

1. Assignment to each bit of BFM #28

Bit No. Description b0 Wire-break in channel 1 b1 Wire-break in channel 2 b2 Wire-break in channel 3 b3 Wire-break in channel 4 b4 to b15 Not used

2. Cautions regarding use of disconnection detection status When any of b0 to b3 is turned on, b11 of the error status (BFM #29) is turned on. The disconnection detection status is valid only if the output mode (BFM #0) is the current output mode (mode 2 to 4). In other output modes, each corresponding bit of BFM #28 stays off. 3. Disconnection detection status automatic transfer function (b2 of BFM #60) If the disconnection detection status with automatic transfer-to data register is specified in BFM #63, the data in BFM #28 can be transferred to the specified data register. Only when wire-break is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18.

E-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.10 BFM #29: Error status Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

Error data is assigned each bit of BFM #29. B FX FX

1. Assignment to each bit of BFM #29 3UC 3U -4AD Bit No. Item Description -4AD b0 Error detection If one of b1 to b11 is turned on, b0 will turn on. Gain setting error: error in offset gain data or in EEPROM offset gain b1 O/G error setting C FX

24 V power is not supplied properly. 3U b2 Power supply error Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage. -4AD-ADP

FX3U-4DA may be defective. b3 Hardware error Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. b4 - - Error setting function for D The setting value of the function for output setting upon PLC stop FX

b5 output setting upon PLC 3G (BFM #5) is not set correctly. Correctly set the value. stop -2AD-BD Upper/lower limit function The setting value of the upper/lower limit function (BFM #41 to BFM #48) b6 setting error is not set correctly. Correctly reset the value. Error in corrective function The setting value of the corrective function by load resistance setting by load resistance E b7 (BFM #51 to #54) is not set correctly. FX

(Valid only in voltage output 3U Correctly set the value. mode) -4DA Table output function The setting value of the table output function is not set correctly. b8 setting error Correctly set the value. The setting value of the status automatic transfer function Status automatic transfer b9 (BFM #61 to #63) is not set correctly. F

setting error FX Correctly set the value. 3U

b10 Over-scale The analog output is out of the specified range. -4DA-ADP Disconnection detection Wire-break has occurred. (The details are indicated by BFM #28.) b11 (Valid only in current output * The bit is turned on when BFM #28 is not 0.) mode) Setting data change G b12 Setting change is prohibited. FX

prohibited 3G

b13 to b15 - - -1DA-BD

2. Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated, the error bit will turn off. H 3. Error status data automatic transfer function (b0 of BFM #60) FX 3U

If the error status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM #61, the data in BFM #29 can be -3A-ADP transferred to a specified data register. Only when an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.11 BFM #30: Model code

Initial value (at delivery): K3030 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) K3030 (fixed value) is stored as the model code.

5.4.12 BFM #32 to #35: Data to be output upon PLC stop

Initial value: K0 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) To enable the output data set when the PLC stops, Set "2" for any digit in the output data (H0000) at PLC's stop. Set the BFM values as follows.

BFM number Description #32 Data in channel 1 #33 Data in channel 2 #34 Data in channel 3 #35 Data in channel 4

The setting range depends on the output mode.

Output mode [BFM #0] Setting range 0 -32640 to +32640 1 -10200 to +10200 2, 3 0 to 32640 4 0 to 20400

1. Cautions regarding data output setting when PLC is in stop While changing the settings, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). After the completion of writing, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and output will be restarted. The analog values to be output depend on the output mode. When a value out of any of the above ranges is set, b5 of the error status (BFM #29) is turned on. 2. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).

E-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.13 BFM #38: Upper/lower limit function setting Common Items

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) When any of the output data (BFM #1 to #4) becomes less than the lower limit (BMF #41 to #44) or more than the upper limit (BFM #45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status (BFM #39) is turned B FX on. FX

The upper/lower limit function can be set valid or made invalid by writing a 4-digit hexadecimal number, 3UC 3U -4AD

H, in BFM #38. -4AD H C

ch4 ch1 FX

ch3 ch2 3U -4AD-ADP

Set value Description 0 The upper/lower limit function is invalid. 1 *1 D

The upper/lower limit function without output limitation is valid. FX

2 The upper/lower limit function with output limitation is valid.*2 3G -2AD-BD Other than above Invalid (setting values unchanged) values *1. When any value becomes less than the lower limit (BMF #41 to #44) or more than the upper limit E

(BFM #45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status is turned on. FX 3U

The value is output even if it exceeds -4DA Analog value the upper limit.

Upper limit F FX 3U

Lower limit -4DA-ADP The value is output even if it is below the lower limit.

*2. When any value becomes less than the lower limit (BMF #41 to #44) or more than the upper limit (BFM #45 to #48), the relevant bit of the upper/lower limit function status is turned on. G FX

In this setting, analog values more than the upper limit and less than the lower limit are not output. 3G -1DA-BD Analog value Values more than the upper limit are not output. Upper limit H FX 3U

Lower limit -3A-ADP Values less than the lower limit are not output. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.14 BFM #39: Upper/lower limit function status

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) When any of the output data (BFM #1 to #4) is out of range between the lower limit and the upper limit (BFM #41 to #48), the relevant bit is turned on. 1. Assignment to each bit of BFM #39

Bit Description b0 Data output from channel 1 < Lower limit (BFM #41) b1 Data output from channel 1 > Upper limit (BFM #45) b2 Data output from channel 2 < Lower limit (BFM #42) b3 Data output from channel 2 > Upper limit (BFM #46) b4 Data output from channel 3 < Lower limit (BFM #43) b5 Data output from channel 3 > Upper limit (BFM #47) b6 Data output from channel 4 < Lower limit (BFM #44) b7 Data output from channel 4 > Upper limit (BFM #48) b8 to b15 Not used

2. Cautions regarding use of the upper/lower limit function status The ON bits of the upper/lower limit function status are latched after the output data has returned to the specified ranges between the upper and lower limits. The upper/lower limit function status can be reset by the following methods. - Use the upper/lower limit function status reset function (BFM #40). - Turn the power supply off then on. 3. Upper/lower limit automatic transfer function (b1 of BFM #60) If the upper/lower limit automatic transfer data register is specified in BFM #62, the data in BFM #39 can be transferred to a specified data register. Only when an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from the FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function, refer to Subsection 5.4.18.

5.4.15 BFM #40: Clearance of upper/lower limit function status

Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H) The flags can be reset by turning on the following bits of BFM #40.

1. Assignment to each bit of BFM #40

Bit Description b0 Clearance of lower limit status b1 Clearance of upper limit status b2 to b15 Invalid

2. Operation to be performed after resetting At the completion of status reset, the bits of BFM #40 will automatically turn off.

E-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.16 BFM #41 to #44: Lower limit values of upper/lower limit function Common Items BFM #45 to #48: Upper limit values of upper/lower limit function

Initial value: See below Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the upper/lower limit function has been made valid by the setting of BFM #38, set the upper and lower B FX FX

limit values to be used. 3UC 3U -4AD

The setting range depends on the output mode. -4AD 1. Setting range of upper and lower limits and initial values Initial value Output mode Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value C

[BFM #0] FX [BFM #41 to #44] [BFM #45 to 48] 3U

0 -32640 to +32640 -32640 +32640 -4AD-ADP 1 -10200 to +10200 -10200 +10200 2, 3 0 to +32640 0 +32640 4 0 to +20400 0 +20400 D FX

2. Cautions regarding upper and lower limit values setting 3G -2AD-BD Check that the lower limit value is not equal to or more than the upper limit value. If the lower limit value is equal to or more than the upper limit value, b6 of the error status (BFM #29) is turned on. E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-33 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.17 BFM #50: Setting of output corrective function by load resistance (only in voltage output mode)/BFM #51 to #54: Load resistance values

Initial value: BFM #50: H0000, BFM #51 to #54: K30000 Numeric data type: BFM #50: Hexadecimal (H), BFM #51 to #54: Decimal (K)

The output characteristics of FX3U-4DA have been adjusted at 30 kΩ load resistance as a factory default. When the load resistance is 1kΩ, the output deviation is approx. -4.3% to 20V in full scale, whereas the output deviation is approx. 0.15% to 20V in full scale when the load resistance is 1MΩ. When the load resistance is 30 kΩ or less (1 kΩ to 30 kΩ), the deviation of the output characteristics can be corrected by specifying the output corrective function (BFM #50) and the load resistance values (BFM #51 to #54).

Analog value The deviation of output characteristics is corrected by the corrective function by load +10V resistance.

-32000 32000 Digital value

: Output characteristics after correction

-10V : Output characteristics before correction

1. Setting of output corrective function (BFM #50) The corrective function by load resistance is valid or invalid by writing a 4-digit hexadecimal number, H, in the output corrective function setting (BFM #50).

H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2

Set value Description 0 Corrective function by load resistance is invalid. 1 Corrective function by load resistance is valid. Other than above Invalid (setting values unchanged) values

2. Setting range and initial value of load resistance (BFM #51 to #54) Set the load resistance value for each channel allocated to the following BFM.

BFM Description Setting range (Ω) Initial value (Ω) number #51 Load resistance value for channel 1 #52 Load resistance value for channel 2 1000 to 30000 30000 #53 Load resistance value for channel 3 #54 Load resistance value for channel 4

E-34 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 3. Cautions regarding use of the output corrective function by load resistance Common Items While changing the settings, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output will be restarted. This function is valid only in the voltage output mode (mode 0 or 1). B FX FX

The corrective function by load resistance is valid only at a load resistance from 1 k to 30 kΩ. 3UC 3U -4AD If a setting is out of the upper setting range, b7 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. -4AD When not using this function, the output characteristics at a load resistance of 30 kΩ are applied. 4. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing C If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in FX the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. 3U -4AD-ADP Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM). D FX

5.4.18 BFM #60: Status automatic transfer function setting 3G -2AD-BD Initial value: H0000 Numeric data type: Hexadecimal (H)

When the bits, b0 to b2, of BFM #60 are turned on, the assigned functions (see the table below) are valid. E When the bits are turned off, the functions are invalid. FX 3U -4DA 1. Assignment to each bit of BFM #60

Bit No. Description Reference When the value of the error status (BFM #29) changes, Subsection 5.4.10 b0 the status value is transferred to the data register F Subsection 5.4.19 FX

specified by BFM #61. 3U When the value of the upper/lower limit function status -4DA-ADP Subsection 5.4.14 b1 (BFM #39) changes, the status value is transferred to the Subsection 5.4.20 data register specified by BFM #62. When the value of the disconnection detection status Subsection 5.4.9 b2 (BFM #28) changes, the status value is transferred to the G

Subsection 5.4.21 FX data register specified by BFM #63. 3G

b3 to b15 Invalid (setting values unchanged) - -1DA-BD

2. Cautions regarding the status automatic transfer function While changing the settings, the output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). H FX

At the completion of writing, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output 3U

will be restarted. -3A-ADP 3. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will also be written in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. I -ADP Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. FX

The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. When creating a program, therefore, do not 3U frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM). -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-35 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.19 BFM #61: Error status data automatic transfer-to data register specification

Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value: K200 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data (BFM #29) to the data register specified in BFM #61. When an error is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need a program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the error status (BFM #29), refer to Subsection 5.4.12. 1. If "BFM #61 = K200 (initial value)"

Specified data Description register D200 Value of error status (BFM #29)

2. Cautions regarding error status automatic transfer function setting If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data register. This function is valid by turning on b0 of the status automatic transfer function setting (BFM #60). When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. The data set in BFM #61 will be retained in the EEPROM. 3. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).

E-36 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details A 5.4.20 BFM #62: Upper/lower limit function status data automatic transfer-to data register Common Items specification

Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value: K201 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) B FX FX

Use this function to automatically transfer the upper/lower limit function status data (BFM #39) to the data 3UC 3U -4AD register specified in BFM #62. -4AD Only when the value becomes more than the upper limit or less than the lower limit, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program to read data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the upper/lower limit function status (BFM #39), C FX

refer to Subsection 5.4.14. 3U -4AD-ADP 1. If "BFM #62 = K201 (initial value)"

Specified data Description register D D201 Value of upper/lower limit function status (BFM #39) FX 3G -2AD-BD 2. Cautions regarding upper/lower limit function status automatic transfer function setting If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data register. This function is valid by turning on b1 of the status automatic transfer function setting (BFM #60). E FX

When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. 3U -4DA The data set in BFM #62 will be retained in the EEPROM. 3. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. F Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. FX 3U

The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. When creating a program, therefore, do not -4DA-ADP frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-37 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory (BFM) EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 5.4 Buffer Memory Details

5.4.21 BFM #63: Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection

Setting range: 0 to 7999 Initial value: K202 Numeric data type: Decimal (K)

Use this function to automatically transfer the disconnection detection status data (BFM #28) to the data register specified in BFM #63. Only when wire-break is detected, data will be automatically transferred from FX3U-4DA to the PLC. For this reason, the PLC does not need the program for reading data, and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened. → For a detailed description of the disconnection detection status (BFM #28), refer to Subsection 5.4.9. 1. If "BFM #63 = K202 (initial value)"

Specified data Description register D202 Value of disconnection detection status (BFM #28)

2. Cautions regarding disconnection detection status automatic transfer function setting If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions, do not specify the same data register. This function is valid by turning on b2 of the status automatic transfer function setting (BFM #60). When a value out of the above setting range is set, b9 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. The data set in BFM #63 will be retained in the EEPROM. 3. Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM #0, #5, #10 to #17, #19, #32 to #35, #50 to #54 or #60 to #63, the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories. The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10,000. Therefore, when creating a program, do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories (BFM).

5.4.22 BFM #80 to #3098: Table output function

Related BFM: BFM #80 (start/stop command of table output function) BFM #81 to #84 (output pattern setting of channels) BFM #85 to #88 (output execution cycle number of channels) BFM #89 (completion flag of table output function) BFM #90 (table output error code) BFM #91 (table output error source number) BFM #98 (data table head device number) BFM #99 (data table transfer command) BFM #100 to #398, , #2800 to #3098 (data table in patterns)

Table output function:Sets predetermined output patterns as data table, and outputs analog signals according to the data table. → For a detailed description of the table output function, refer to Chapter 6.

E-38 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.1 Outline of Table Output Function A Common Items

6. Table Output Function

This chapter describes the table output function of FX3U-4DA B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 6.1 Outline of Table Output Function -4AD

1. Explanation of the function This function sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the C data table. FX 3U -4AD-ADP 2. Outline of procedures for table output function

Refer to Section 6.2 Data table is prepared in the data registers D Preparation of data table* FX

(D1000 to 7999) or the expansion registers (R0 3G

to R32767). -2AD-BD Refer to Section 6.3

Transfer of data table* The data table is transferred from the PLC main unit to the relevant buffer memory of FX3U-4DA. E FX

Refer to Section 6.4 3U -4DA Execution of output table Setting and execution • Output patterns (BFM #81 to #84) of each channel • The numbers of table output execution cycle F

number (BFM #85 to #88) of each channel FX

• Start/stop of table output function for each 3U channel command (BFM #80) -4DA-ADP

G * It is possible to write the data table directly in FX3U-4DA using a program (TO instruction, etc.). FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-39 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table

6.2 Preparation of data table

1. Outline of data table The data table to be prepared in the PLC consists of the following items. (1) Number of patterns (1 to 10 patterns) (2) Each pattern (3) Number of points in each pattern (1 to 99 points) (4) Condition after output at final point in each pattern (5) Points in each pattern (6) Data to be output at each point (7) Output update time at each point (8) Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to-point interpolation method 2. Preparation of data table Prepare the data table consisting of the following items in the data registers (D1000 to D7999) in the PLC main unit or the expansion registers (R0 to R32767). It is convenient to prepare the data table on spreadsheet software and copy and paste the data to the device memory of GX Developer.

Setting item Device number in PLC assignment (1) Number of patterns (x) Device number specified in BFM #98 (2) Pattern 1 (3) Number of points in pattern 1 (n) Device number+1 specified in BFM #98 (4) Condition after output at final point in pattern Device number+2 specified in BFM #98 (6) Output data Device number+3 specified in BFM #98 (7) Output update time Device number+4 specified in BFM #98 (5) Point 1 (8) Unit of output update time at each point, Device number+5 specified in BFM #98 and point-to-point interpolation method ...... (6) Output data (7) Output update time (5) Point n (8) Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to-point interpolation method ...... (2) Pattern X (3) Number of points in pattern X (m) (4) Condition after output at final point in pattern (6) Output data (7) Output update time (5) Point 1 (8) Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to-point interpolation method ...... (6) Output data . (7) Output update time . (5) Point m (8) Unit of output update time at each point, Device specified in BFM #98 + total number and point-to-point interpolation method of data tables -1*1

Note) The device number marked by *1 should not exceed D7999 or R32767. For a detailed description of the data table items (1) to (8), refer to the following pages.

E-40 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table A 3. Details of data table Common Items (1) Number of patterns (number of data items: 1) Store the number of patterns at the top of the data table (device specified in BFM #98). Up to 10 patterns can be prepared. The setting range of the number of patterns is 1 to 10. When the number of patterns is out of the setting range, table output error code K111 is stored in BFM #90, the device number in which the number of patterns is specified is stored in BFM #91, and b8 in error B FX status BFM #29 is turned on. FX 3UC 3U -4AD (2) Pattern (number of data items: 5 to 299) -4AD A pattern refers to a predetermined flow of output. The contents of a pattern are defined by a combination of points. Prepare pattern data following the number of patterns to form the data table. Up to 10 patterns can be prepared. C FX 3U

(3) Number of points (number of data items: 1) -4AD-ADP Store the number of points to be used in each pattern at the top of the pattern. Up to 99 points can be provided. The setting range of number of points is 1 to 99. When the number of points is out of the setting range, the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is D

stored in BFM #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. FX 3G (4) Condition after output at final point in pattern (number of data items: 1) -2AD-BD The condition after output at the final point in a pattern can be set to continue to output the output signal at the final point or output the offset signal. The setting is shown in the following table. E Set value Condition after output at final point FX 3U

K0 Continuing to output the output signal at the final point -4DA K1 Outputting the offset signal Other than above Invalid* values F FX

* When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, 3U

the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM #91, -4DA-ADP and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on.

(5) Point (number of data items: 3) Data output point. The data indicating a point consist of output data, output update time, output update G

time unit and point-to-point interpolation method. FX Each pattern can have up to 99 points. 3G -1DA-BD

(6) Output data (number of data items: 1) Digital value corresponding to the analog signal to be output at the point The setting range depends on the output mode and offset/gain setting. H (7) Output update time (number of data items: 1) FX 3U

Output time to the next point. The output update time for the n-th point is the output time between the n-th -3A-ADP point and the (n+1)-th point. When the pattern is repeated, the output update time at the final point is used as the output time between the final point and the first point. When the pattern is not repeated, the output update time for the final point is ignored. I -ADP The setting range is 1 to 32767. For the unit, refer to Item (8). FX

When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 3U #90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM -4AD-PT #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-41 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table

(8) Output update time unit and point-to-point interpolation method (number of data items: 1) Set the unit of the output update time and the point-to-point interpolation method for each point. The output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method for the n-th point are applied between the n-th point and the (n+1)-th point. When the pattern is repeated, the output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method are applied between the final point and the first point. When the pattern is not repeated, the output update time unit and the point-to-point interpolation method for the final point are ignored. A 4-digit hexadecimal number, H, is allocated as shown below. H Invalid* Output updating time unit Invalid* Point-to-point interpolation method

Setting of output update time unit

Set value Output update time unit 010 ms 1100 ms 21 s 31 min Other than above Invalid* values

Interpolation method Data output between points are interpolated every 1 ms and automatically updated.

Set value Interpolation method 0 No interpolation (Output data is held to the next point.) Linear interpolation (Data output between points are 1 interpolated in the shape of a straight line.) S-shaped interpolation (Data output between points are 2 interpolated in the shape of an S-shaped as shown below.) Other than above Invalid* values

S-shaped interpolation

Output data D/8 Point n+1

D D/8 D/2 Point n

Time

T/4 T/4T/4 T/4

* When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on.

E-42 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table A 4. Example of data table Common Items The following table shows an example of data table containing two patterns prepared in and after D5000. Patterns 1 and 2 are in the output mode 1.

Data Set value Description register B FX D5000 K2 Number of patterns 2 patterns FX 3UC 3U Pattern 1

D5001 K3 Number of points in pattern 1 3 points -4AD -4AD Holding of value D5002 K0 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 1 output at final point D5003 K3000 Point 1 Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 1 3V D5004 K18 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 1 1800 ms C FX

Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 1 100 ms 3U D5005 H0021 Point-to-point interpolation method S-shaped interpolation -4AD-ADP D5006 K8000 2 Point Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 1 8V D5007 K26 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 1 2600 ms Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 1 100 ms D5008 H0011 Point-to-point interpolation method Linear interpolation D FX Point 3

D5009 K5000 Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 1 5V 3G -2AD-BD D5010 K5 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 1 500 ms Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 1 100 ms D5011 H0011 Point-to-point interpolation method Linear interpolation D5012 K4 2 Pattern Number of points in pattern 2 4 points E D5013 K1 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 2 Output of offset value FX 3U Point 1

D5014 K2000 Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 2 2V -4DA D5015 K6 Output update time at point 1 in pattern 2 6s Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 2 1s D5016 H0022 Point-to-point interpolation method S-shaped interpolation D5017 K10000 2 Point Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 2 10V F FX

D5018 K15 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 2 15s 3U Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 2 1s -4DA-ADP D5019 H0002 Point-to-point interpolation method No interpolation D5020 K500 Point 3 Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 2 0.5V D5021 K45 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 2 4500 ms G

Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 2 100 ms FX D5022 H0021 Point-to-point interpolation method S-shaped interpolation 3G -1DA-BD D5023 K4000 4 Point Data to be output at point 4 in pattern 2 4V D5024 K9 Output update time at point 4 in pattern 2 9s Output update time unit at point 4 in pattern 2 1s D5025 H0012 Point-to-point interpolation method Linear interpolation H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-43 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.2 Preparation of data table

5. Example of pattern output Data can be output in a predetermined pattern as shown below. (Example of pattern 1 in output mode 1 shown on the previous page)

When the pattern is repeated (BFM #85 to #88 are set to 0 or 2 or Output higher.) value Point 2 8V Linear interpolation S-shaped interpolation

5V Point 3 Point 1 3V

Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 (1800 ms) (2600 ms) (500 ms)

6. Caution when preparing the data table Prepare the data table in continuous data registers in the PLC main unit or continuous expansion registers. (Prepare data without spaces between patterns or points.) If data has spaces, the data cannot be transferred normally to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. → For a detailed description of data table errors, refer to Section 6.5.

E-44 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory A 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory Common Items

The data table prepared in the data registers (D1000 to D7999) in the PLC or the expansion registers (R0 to R32767) are transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. The transfer procedures are shown below. B FX 1. Specify the head device number of the data table to be transferred. (BFM #98, initial value: FX K1000) 3UC 3U -4AD Specify the head device number of the data table in BFM #98. -4AD The setting range is K1000 to K7994 for the data registers (D1000 to D7999) (because at least six points are occupied) or K0 to K32762 for the expansion registers (R0 to R32767) (because at least six points are occupied). Example) When the data table is set starting from D1000, set K1000 in BFM #98. C FX

When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K21 is stored in the table output error code BFM 3U #90, the number of the buffer memory, K98, that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM #91, -4AD-ADP and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. 2. Start transferring the data table. (BFM #99, initial value: H0000) Transfer the data table from the PLC to the FX3U-4DA using the data table transfer command (BFM #99). D FX 3G H -2AD-BD Invalid* Data table transfer command Invalid* Register type E Data table transfer command FX 3U -4DA Set value Transfer command 0 No processing 1 Execution of transfer of data table Other than above F

Invalid* FX values 3U -4DA-ADP Register type

Set value Register type Transfer of data table from data registers G

0 FX (D1000 to 7999) 3G

Transfer of data table from expansion registers -1DA-BD 1 (R0 to 32767) Other than above Invalid* values H * When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, FX the number of the buffer memory, K99, that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM #91, and 3U -3A-ADP b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on.

Example) When K1000 is written in the head device number of data table (BFM #98) and H0001 is written in the data table transfer command (BFM #99), the data table will be transferred from the data register D1000. I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-45 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory

3. Buffer memory contents in FX3U-4DA after transfer The transferred data table is stored in the following buffer memory areas.

BFM Description number #100 Pattern 1 Number of points #101 Condition after output at final point in pattern #102 Output data #103 Output update time Point 1 Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to- #104 point interpolation method ...... #396 Output data #397 Output update time Point 99 Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to- #398 point interpolation method #399 Not used ...... #2800 Number of points #2801 Condition after output at final point in pattern #2802 Output data #2803 Output update time Point 1

Pattern 10 Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to- #2804 point interpolation method ...... #3096 Output data #3097 Output update time Point 99 Unit of output update time at each point, and point-to- #3098 point interpolation method

E-46 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory A 4. Example of transfer of data table Common Items The data table below shows the writing of K5000 to BFM#98 and H0001 to BFM#99. Data starting from D5000 is transferred to the buffer memory in the FX3U-4DA.

PLC main unit FX3U-4DA BFM Source data Data register Set value Set value B FX number register FX 3UC 3U

D5000 K2 #100 K3 D5001 -4AD -4AD D5001 K3 #101 K0 D5002 D5002 K0 #102 K3000 D5003 D5003 K3000 #103 K18 D5004 D5004 K18 #104 H0021 D5005 C FX

D5005 H0021 #105 K8000 D5006 3U -4AD-ADP D5006 K8000 #106 K26 D5007 D5007 K26 #107 H0011 D5008 D5008 H0011 #108 K5000 D5009 D5009 K5000 #109 K5 D5010 D D5010 K5 #110 H0011 D5011 FX 3G

D5011 H0011 : -2AD-BD Transfer to buffer -- D5012 K4 : memory D5013 K1 #400 K4 D5012 D5014 K2000 #401 K1 D5013 E D5015 K6 #402 K2000 D5014 FX 3U

D5016 H0022 #403 K6 D5015 -4DA D5017 K10000 #404 H0022 D5016 D5018 K15 #405 K10000 D5017 D5019 H0002 #406 K15 D5018 D5020 K500 #407 H0002 D5019 F FX

D5021 K45 #408 K500 D5020 3U -4DA-ADP D5022 H0021 #409 K45 D5021 D5023 K4000 #410 H0021 D5022 D5024 K9 #411 K4000 D5023 D5025 H0012 #412 K9 D5024 G #413 H0012 D5025 FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-47 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory

5. Cautions regarding data table transfer While the table output function is executed, it is impossible to start transferring the data table. The number of patterns is not transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. The transferred data table is stored in the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. The data table stored in FX3U-4DA will be erased when power is turned off. Therefore, it is necessary to transfer the data table after rebooting the power. At completion of transfer, BFM #99 will automatically change to H0000. Also when transfer is stopped due to an error, BFM #99 will automatically change to H0000. When BFM #99 changes to H0000, check the error flag. → For a detailed description of errors related to table output, refer to Section 6.5. If an error occurs during transfer of the data table, the data up to the error is transferred. Subsequent data is not transferred. It is possible to write the data table directly in the buffer memory without using the data table transfer command (BFM #99). In this case, the correctness of the data table is not evaluated until the table is output by the table output start/stop function (BFM #80). If a data table with incorrect data is output, the data up to the point where incorrect data occurs is output. At the point where incorrect data occurs, an error is registered and only the data output just before the occurrence of the error is held. Execute the data table transfer command (BFM #99) as a pulse execution type instruction. During transfer of the data table, the scan time increases by up to about 10 ms. The standard data table transfer time is obtained by the following formula.

Number of * data table items Transfer time = (Scan time) × × (number of FX3U-4DA units connected to main unit) 64

* Fractions omitted Example) • Scan time: 50 ms (including increase in scan time caused by data table transfer) • Number of data table items to be transferred: 2991 items (when the number of patterns is 10 and the number of points in each pattern is 99) • Number of units connected to FX3U-4DA: 8 units

2991 Transfer time = (50 ms) × × (8 units) 64 = 18800 ms

E-48 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function A 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function Common Items

After setting the output patterns for the channels (BFM #81 to #84) and the number outputs for the channels (BFM #85 to #88), turn on the table output function start/stop command (BFM #80) to execute the table output function. B FX FX

1. Set the output patterns for the channels. (BFM #81 to #84, initial value: K1) 3UC 3U -4AD

Set the output patterns for the channels in BFM #81 to #84. -4AD The output pattern can be changed in the middle of outputting the table. Setting range for BFM #81 to #84: 1 to 10 When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K31 is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, the number of the buffer memory (K81 to K84) that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM C #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. FX 3U 2. Set the number of table outputs for the channels. (BFM #85 to #88, initial value: K0) -4AD-ADP Set the number of table outputs for the channels in BFM #85 to #88. The number of outputs can be changed even during outputting the table. Setting range for BFM #85 to #88: 0 to 32767 When 0 is set, output of the table will be repeated until the table output is stopped by BFM #80. D FX

When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K32 is stored in the table output error code BFM 3G

#90, the number of the buffer memory (K85 to K88) that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM -2AD-BD #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. 3. Table output start/stop (BFM #80, initial value: H0000) Table output is started and stopped by setting BFM #80 as shown below. E FX 3U H -4DA ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2 F FX

Set value Description 3U -4DA-ADP 0 The table output function of each channel is stopped. The table output function of each channel is started. 1 After output of the final point in the last cycle, 0 will be automatically written. G

Other than above FX Invalid* values 3G -1DA-BD * When a value out of the setting range is set, the error code K33 is stored in the table output error code BFM #90, the number of the buffer memory (K80) that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM #91, and b8 of the error status BFM #29 is turned on. H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-49 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Procedures for executing table output function

4. Cautions regarding table output When BFM #99 (data table transfer command) is not H0000, the table output function cannot be started. When an error occurs during transfer of data table, start the table output after setting the correct data table. While the table output completion flag BFM #89 is ON, output of a new table cannot be started. The table output function is valid only while the PLC is in RUN mode. While even a single channel is outputting data table (BFM #80 is not H0000), it is prohibited to change BFM #0, #5, #9 to #17, #19, #20, #32 to #35, #38, #41 to 48, #50 to #54 and #60 to #63. The pattern can be changed during output as shown below. (The change is invalid while the table output completion flag BFM #89 is ON.)

Output value Pattern 5

Pattern 1

The data output in pattern 1 is ignored, and data is output at point 1 in output pattern 5.

Time Table output start Change from output pattern 1 to output pattern 5

5. Check the table output completion flag. (BFM #89, initial value: H0000) The value in BFM #89 indicates whether the table output from each channel has been completed. After data is output at the final point in the last cycle of a pattern, the table output completion flag is turned on. When the table output (BFM#80) is set to be stopped, the table output completion flag is turned off.

H ch4 ch1 ch3 ch2

Value for each Table output completion flag channel 0 Table output uncompleted 1 Table output completed

E-50 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Details of table output error A 6.5 Details of table output error Common Items

When an error related to the table output function occurs, the error code is stored in BFM #90, and the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the error is stored in BFM #91. 1. Error code table and details of error source numbers B FX FX

Error code Table output error source number 3UC 3U Details of error -4AD (BFM #90) (BFM #91) -4AD The number of patterns in the data table that is held in Device number where the number of K111 the PLC does not meet the following requirement. patterns is specified (same as the head 1 ≤ Number of patterns ≤ 10 device number in the data table) The number of points in the data table that is held in the C Device number where the number of FX

K121 PLC does not meet the following requirement. 3U patterns is specified 1 ≤ Number of patterns ≤ 99 -4AD-ADP The number of points in the data table that is held in the Number of BFM where the number of K122 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement. points is specified 1 ≤ Number of points ≤ 99 "The condition after output at final point in pattern" Device number where "the condition after D K131 specified in the data table that is held in the PLC is not 0 the final point output point in pattern" is FX 3G

or 1. specified -2AD-BD "The condition after output at final point in pattern" Number of BFM where "the condition after K132 specified in the data table that is held in the buffer output point in the pattern" is specified memory is not 0 or 1. The output update time in the data table that is held in the Device number where the output update E K151 PLC does not meet the following requirement. FX time is specified 1 ≤ Output update time ≤ 32767 3U -4DA The output update time in the data table that is held in the Number of BFM where the output update K152 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement. time is specified 1 ≤ Output update time ≤ 32767 The output update time unit in the data table that is held Device number where the output update K161 in the PLC is not 0, 1, 2 or 3. time unit is specified F FX

The output update time unit in the data table that is held Number of BFM where the output update 3U

K162 -4DA-ADP in the buffer memory is not 0, 1, 2 or 3. time unit is specified The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Device number where the interpolation K171 the PLC is not 0, 1 or 2. method is specified The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Number of BFM where the interpolation K172 the buffer memory is not 0, 1 or 2. method is specified G FX

The head device number BFM #98 in the data table to be 3G

K21 K98 -1DA-BD transferred is out of the setting range. The value indicated by b0 to b3 of the transfer command K22 K99 BFM #99 is not 0 or 1. The value indicated by b4 to b7 of the source register K23 K99 type in BFM #99 is not 0 or 1. H FX

Any of the output patterns BFM #81 to #84 does not meet 3U K31 the following requirement. One of K81 to K84 -3A-ADP 1 ≤ Output pattern ≤ 10 The number of table outputs in BFM #85 to #88 does not K32 meet the following requirement. One of K85 to K88 0 ≤ Number of repetitions of output ≤ 32767 I -ADP FX

The bit corresponding to each channel in the table output 3U K33 K80 start/stop command in BFM #80 is not 0 or 1. -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-51 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Details of table output error

2. Cautions regarding table output errors Errors in data table When the data table in the PLC contains an error, the error can be detected during transfer of the data to the buffer memory in FX3U-4DA. In this case, the error code (BFM #90) is K11, and the device number is written as the error source (BFM #91). If an error is caused in the data table by directly rewriting the data in BFM after the data table is transferred, the error can be detected when the table is output using incorrect data. In this case, the error code (BFM #90) is K12, and the BFM number is written as the error source (BFM #91). Error during transfer of the data table While transferring of the data table, an error (error codes K31 to K33) does not occur even when the BFM #80 (table output function start/stop) is set to a value out of the setting range. An error occurs after the completion of the transfer of the data table. Error during output of the table Even if the output value is scaled over during output of the table, the output of the table will not be stopped. However, while the output value is scaled over, b10 (scale over) of the error status BFM #29 stays on. When an error (error codes K122 to K172, K31 to K33) occurs during output of the table, the output of the table is cancelled and the analog output value just before the occurrence of the error is retained. Table output errors (BFM #90) and table output error source numbers (BFM #91) are not retained. They will be cleared when the next data table transfer command is given or the table output start function is executed.

E-52 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 6.6 Examples uses of table output function A 6.6 Examples uses of table output function Common Items

[Uses of table output function] Inverter frequency setting, servo speed control, etc. 1. Inverter frequency setting B FX The output frequency can be controlled by inputting analog signals (e.g. voltage from 0 to 10 V and current FX 3UC 3U

from 4 to 20 mA) to inverter frequency setting signals. -4AD -4AD The analog signals and output signals have the following proportional relationship.

Output frequency (Hz) C FX

60 3U -4AD-ADP

30 D FX 3G

0 -2AD-BD 5 10V Analog signal E To control the frequency as shown below, where control the analog signal is proportional to the frequency use FX the table output function. 3U -4DA

Output frequency (Hz) F

60 FX 3U -4DA-ADP

30 G 0 FX 3G

Time -1DA-BD

Example of table output

Output H voltage (V) FX 3U

Point 2 Point 3 -3A-ADP 10 No interpolation S-shaped S-shaped interpolation interpolation 5 I -ADP FX 3U

Point 4 -4AD-PT 0 Point 1 Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-53 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristics EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics

7. Changing Output Characteristics

For FX3U-4DA, the standard output characteristics are provided for each output mode (BFM #0)at the time of factory shipment. Changing the offset data (BFM #10 to #13) and gain data (BFM #14 to #17) can change the output characteristics of each channel. This chapter describes how to change the output characteristics.

7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics

1 Cancel the setting change prohibition mode. If setting change is prohibited, write K3030 in BFM #19. The setting change prohibition mode will be canceled.

2 Determine the output mode (BFM #0). Determine the output mode (BFM #0) optimum for the selected channels and the voltage/current specifications.

Set value (HEX) Output mode Analog output range Digital input range 0 Voltage output mode -10V to +10V -32000 to +32000 Voltage output analog value mV 1 The characteristic cannot be changed. specification mode 2 Current output mode 0mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 Current output analog value μA 4 The characteristic cannot be changed. specification mode 5 to E Setting not allowed - - F Channel not used - -

Example: Enter "HFF00" in BFM to set output mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and 4 Cautions regarding data setting If a value "1" or "4" is set for a channel, the output characteristics of the channel cannot be changed. Set the optimum output mode for the analog signal to be output.

E-54 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristics FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics A Common Items 3 Determine the output characteristics to be changed.

Example: Change to output voltage of 1 to 5 V with digital values 0 to 32000 Output mode: 0 B FX Output characteristics provided at the time Output characteristics newly provided FX

of factory shipment 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Voltage output value Voltage output value

+10.2V +10V 5V C FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Digital 1V Digital -32000 0 value value +32000 0 32000 D FX 3G -2AD-BD

-10V -10.2V E FX 3U 4 Determine the offset data. -4DA Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 0. Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode, and the analog output value in μA for the current output mode. F Example: To set the offset value of 1 V, set 1000 mV. FX 3U

→ For a detailed description of the offset data, refer to Subsection 5.4.6. -4DA-ADP

5 Determine the gain data. Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 16000. G Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode, and the analog output value in μA FX 3G

for the current output mode. -1DA-BD Example: To set the gain value of 3 V, set 3000 mV. (5-1)÷2+1 = 3V (3000 mV) → For a detailed description of the gain data, refer to Subsection 5.4.6. H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-55 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristics EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 7.1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics

6 Create a sequence program. To change the output characteristics, write the offset data (BFM #10 to #13) and the gain data (BFM #14 to #17) in the sequence program, and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM #9 for the corresponding channel.

Example: Program for changing the output characteristics of channels 1 and 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs):

X000 Cancellation of setting change FNC 12 K3030 U0\G19 MOV P prohibition mode Output mode specification for FNC 12 HFF00 U0\G0 MOV P channels 1 to 4

SET M0

M0 T0 K50

T0 FNC 16 K1000 U0\G10 K2 Setting of offset data (channels 1 and 2) FMOV P

FNC 16 K3000 U0\G14 K2 Setting of gain data (channels 1 and 2) FMOV P

FNC 12 H0003 U0\G9 Offset/gain setting value write command MOV P

FNC 224 FNC 12 K0 U0\G9 K0 U0\G19 Setting change prohibition LD= MOV P

7 Transfer the sequence program to change the output characteristics. Transfer the sequence program, and start the PLC. After the PLC is started and the output characteristic write command (X000) is turned on, the offset data and gain data will be written.

Since the offset data and gain data are stored in the EEPROM incorporated in FX3U-4DA, it is possible to delete the pre-written sequence program.

8 Check the analog output signals Check that the output analog signals correspond to the set output data. → If analog signals are not correctly output, refer to Chapter 9 "Troubleshooting."

E-56 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation) A Common Items

8. Examples of Practical Programs B FX 8.1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation (Regular Operation) FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD When you want to use the initial output characteristics but do not need to use the status information, you can operate the PLC with a simple program as shown below. 1. Conditions C

The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions. FX 3U

1) System configuration -4AD-ADP FX3U-4DA (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V). Channel 3 should be set to mode 3 (current output, 4 mA to 20 mA). D Channel 4 should be set to mode 2 (current output, 0 mA to 20 mA). FX 3G

-For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs -2AD-BD

Initial pulse Transfer H2300 to BFM #0 (output modes of M8002 FNC 12 channels 1 to 4). H2300 U0\G0 ch1 and ch2: Voltage output (-10 to +10 V), MOV P output mode 0 E RUN monitor ch3: Current output (4 mA to 20 mA), output FX M8000 mode 3 3U K50* ch4: Current output (0 mA to 20 mA), output -4DA T0 mode 2

Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0. Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4 Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. in D0 to D3 in the following ranges. Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 and D1: -32000 to +32000 F

Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3. D2 and D3: 0 to 32000 FX 3U

T0 -4DA-ADP FNC 15 D0→BFM #1 (output to channel 1) D0 U0\G1 K4 D1→BFM #2 (output to channel 2) BMOV D2→BFM #3 (output to channel 3) D3→BFM #4 (output to channel 4) * After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After the output mode G is specified, if the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting FX time (T0 K50). 3G -1DA-BD

-For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse Transfer H2300 to BFM #0 (output modes of M8002 FNC 79 channels 1 to 4). H K0 K0 H2300 K1 ch1 and ch2: Voltage output (-10 to +10 V), FX

TO P output mode 0 3U RUN monitor ch3: Current output (4 mA to 20 mA), output -3A-ADP M8000 mode 3 K50* ch4: Current output (0 mA to 20 mA), output T0 mode 2

Data to be output to channel 1 is written in D0. Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4 I -ADP Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1. in D0 to D3 in the following ranges. FX

Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2. D0 and D1: -32000 to +32000 3U

Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3. D2 and D3: 0 to 32000 -4AD-PT

T0 FNC 79 D0→BFM #1 (output to channel 1) K0 K1 D0 K4 D1→BFM #2 (output to channel 2) TO D2→BFM #3 (output to channel 3) D3→BFM #4 (output to channel 4) J -ADP FX

* After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each 3U

setting. The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs. After the output mode -4AD-PTW is specified, if the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time (T0 K50).

E-57 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions

8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions

This section describes a practical program that uses the disconnection detection function (BFM #28), upper/ lower limit function (BFM #38 to #48), corrective function by load resistance (BFM #50 to #54) and status automatic transfer function (BFM #60 to #63) of FX3U-4DA. 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions. 1) System configuration FX3U-4DA (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V). Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 2 (current output, 0 mA to 20 mA). 3) Convenient functions The disconnection detection function, upper/lower limit function, corrective function by load resistance and status automatic transfer function are used. 4) Device assignment Device Description X000 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data X001 Clearance of error status data X002 Clearance of disconnection detection status data Input D10 Data to be output from channel 1 D11 Data to be output from channel 2 D12 Data to be output from channel 3 D13 Data to be output from channel 4 Y000 Output of channel-1 lower limit error data Y001 Output of channel-1 upper limit error data Y002 Output of channel-2 lower limit error data Y003 Output of channel-2 upper limit error data Y004 Output of channel-3 lower limit error data Y005 Output of channel-3 upper limit error data Y006 Output of channel-4 lower limit error data Output Y007 Output of channel-4 upper limit error data Y010 Output of disconnection detection signal Y011 Output of error detection signal D200 Data register at destination of automatic transfer of error status Data register at destination of automatic transfer of upper/lower limit D201 function error status Data register at destination of automatic transfer of disconnection detection D202 error status

E-58 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions A 2. Example of sequence program Common Items For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 H2200 U0\G0 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified *1 RUN monitor MOV P B FX FX

M8000 3UC 3U *2 T0 K50 -4AD -4AD

T0 FNC 12 H1122 U0\G38 Upper/lower limit function setting MOV P

FNC 16 C K-3200 U0\G41 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2 FX FMOV P 3U -4AD-ADP FNC 16 K6400 U0\G43 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4 FMOV P

FNC 16 K28800 U0\G45 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2 FMOV P D FX

FNC 16 K25600 U0\G47 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 3G

FMOV P -2AD-BD

FNC 12 H0011 U0\G50 Corrective function setting by load resistance*1 MOV P

FNC 16 K5000 U0\G51 K2 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2 *1 E

FMOV P FX

Status automatic transfer function setting *1 3U FNC 12 -4DA H0007 U0\G60 (The initial setting of destination data registers is used, MOV P and the sequence program for this function is omitted.) X000 FNC 12 H0003 U0\G40 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data MOV P X001 F FNC 12 K0 U0\G29 Clearance of error status data FX

MOV P 3U X002 -4DA-ADP FNC 12 K0 U0\G28 Clearance of disconnection detection status data MOV RUN monitor P M8000 FNC 15 D10 U0\G1 K4 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4 BMOV G FX

FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 Output of upper/lower limit error status of channels to 3G MOV Y000 to Y007 -1DA-BD

D202.2 Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4 Y010 Output to Y010 D202.3 H D200.0 FX Error detected Output to Y011 3U

Y011 -3A-ADP

*2. After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each -4AD-PT setting. After the output mode is specified, and the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time (T0 K50). J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-59 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.2 Example of Program using Useful Functions

For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 K0 K0 H2200 K1 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified *1 RUN monitor TO P M8000 *2 T0 K50

T0 FNC 79 K0 K38 H1122 K1 Upper/lower limit function setting TO P

FNC 79 K0 K41 K-3200 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2 TO P

FNC 79 K0 K43 K6400 K2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4 TO P

FNC 79 K0 K45 K28800 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2 TO P

FNC 79 K0 K47 K25600 K2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 TO P

FNC 79 K0 K50 H0011 K1 Corrective function setting by load resistance *1 TO P

FNC 79 K0 K51 K5000 K2 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2 *1 TO P

*1 FNC 79 Status automatic transfer function setting K0 K60 H0007 K1 (The initial setting of destination data registers is used, TO P and the sequence program for this function is omitted.) X000 FNC 79 K0 K40 H0003 K1 Clearance of upper/lower limit function status data TO P X001 FNC 79 K0 K29 K0 K1 Clearance of error status data TO P X002 FNC 79 K0 K28 K0 K1 Clearance of disconnection detection status data TO P RUN monitor M8000 FNC 79 K0 K1 D10 K4 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4 TO

FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 Output of upper/lower limit error status of channels to MOV Y000 to Y007

FNC 12 D200 K4M0 MOV

FNC 12 D202 K4M20 MOV M22 Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4 Y010 Output to Y010 M23

M0 Y011 Error detected Output to Y011

*1. The output mode setting, setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX3U-4DA. For this reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. *2. After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. After the output mode is specified, and the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time (T0 K50).

E-60 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation) A 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Common Items Operation)

This section describes a practical program that uses the table output function. 1. Conditions B FX FX

The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions. 3UC 3U -4AD

1) System configuration -4AD FX3U-4DA (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Output mode Channel 1 should be set to mode 0 (voltage output, -10 V to +10 V). C

Channel 3 should be set to mode 2 (current output, 0 mA to 20 mA). FX

Channels 2 and 4 are out of use. 3U -4AD-ADP 3) Convenient function The table output function is used. 4) Device assignment Device Description D FX

X000 Start of table output function for channels 1 and 3 3G

X001 Stop of table output function -2AD-BD X002 Restart of table output function for channel 3 D10 Data to be output from channel 1 Input D11 Data to be output from channel 2 E D12 Data to be output from channel 3 FX 3U

D13 Data to be output from channel 4 -4DA D5000 or more Data table * Y000 Completion of output of table from channel 1 Y001 Table output error M0 Data table transfer complete F Output FX M1 During output of table from channel 3 3U -4DA-ADP D100 Data table transfer command D101 Table output completion flag

* It is necessary to separately create the data table. → For a detailed description of creation of the data table, refer to Section 6.2. G FX 3G

2. Example of sequence program -1DA-BD For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

Initial pulse M8002 H FNC 12 HF2F0 U0\G0 Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4 *1 FX MOV P 3U -3A-ADP RUN monitor M8000 T0 K50 *2

Continued I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT *1. The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U-4DA. For this reason, even if the sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. *2. After setting the output mode, set the data writing time (waiting time) to 5 seconds or more for each setting. After the output mode is specified, and the same output mode is used, it is not necessary to J -ADP set the output mode and the waiting time (T0 K50). FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-61 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation)

T0 FNC 12 K1 U0\G81 Channel-1 output pattern MOV P

FNC 12 K2 U0\G83 Channel-3 output pattern MOV P

FNC 12 Number of repetitions of output of table K5 U0\G85 from channel 1 MOV P Number of repetitions of output of table FNC 12 K0 U0\G87 MOV P from channel 3

FNC 12 K5000 U0\G98 Number of head device in data table MOV P

FNC 12 H0001 U0\G99 Data table transfer command * MOV P

FNC 79 K0 K99 D100 K1 Readout of data table transfer command FROM D100.0 Turning-on of M0 At the completion of transfer SET M0 of data table X000 FNC 12 H0100 U0\G80 Start table output function (channel 3) MOV P Turning-on of M1 when table is output from SET M1 channel 3 X000 M1 FNC 12 H0101 U0\G80 Start table output function (channel 1) MOV P X001 M1 FNC 12 H0000 U0\G80 Stop table output function MOV P Turning-off of M1 when output of table from RST M1 channel 3 is stopped X002 M1 FNC 12 H0100 U0\G80 Restart of table output function (channel 3) MOV P

SET M1 Turning-on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 M1 FNC 79 K0 K89 D101 K2 Readout table output completion flag and table FROM output error D101.0 Y000 Completion of table output from channel 1 Output to Y000

FNC228 K0 D102 Y001 Output to Y001 when table output error occurs LD< >

* Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction.

E-62 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation (Pattern Output Operation) A For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs Common Items

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 K0 K0 HF2F0 K1 Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4*1 TO P RUN monitor B FX M8000 FX

*2 3UC 3U T0 K50 -4AD -4AD T0 FNC 79 K0 K81 K1 K1 Channel-1 output pattern TO P

FNC 79 Channel-3 output pattern C

K0 K83 K2 K1 FX TO P 3U

Number of repetitions of output of table -4AD-ADP FNC 79 K0 K85 K5 K1 TO P from channel 1

Number of repetitions of output of table FNC 79 K0 K87 K0 K1 TO P from channel 3 D FNC 79 FX K0 K98 K5000 K1 Number of head device in data table 3G

TO P -2AD-BD

FNC 79 K0 K99 H0001 K1 Data table transfer command *3 TO P

FNC 78 K0 K99 D100 K1 Readout of data table transfer command FROM E FX 3U

FNC 12 D100 K4M10 -4DA MOV M10 Turning-on of M0 At the completion of transfer SET M0 of data table X000 FNC 79 F K0 K80 H0100 K1 Start table output function (channel 3) FX

TO P 3U -4DA-ADP Turning-on of M1 when table is output from SET M1 channel 3 X000 M1 FNC 79 K0 K80 H0101 K1 Start table output function (channel 1) TO P G X001 M1 FX FNC 79 K0 K80 H0000 K1 Stop table output function 3G

TO P -1DA-BD

Turning-off of M1 when output of table from RST M1 channel 3 is stopped X002 M1 FNC 79 K0 K80 H0100 K1 Restart of table output function (channel 3) H

TO P FX 3U

SET M1 Turning-on of M1 when table is output from -3A-ADP channel 3 Continued

*1. The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U-4DA. For this reason, even if the I -ADP sequence program is deleted, the previously set functions will still be valid. FX 3U

E-63 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)

M1 FNC 78 K0 K89 D101 K2 Readout table output completion flag and table FROM output error

FNC 12 D101 K4M30 MOV M30 Y000 Completion of table output from channel 1 Output to Y000

FNC228 K0 D102 Y001 Output to Y001 when table output error occurs LD< >

8.4 Program to Initialize FX3U-4DA (Factory Default)

To initialize FX3U-4DA, execute the following program. This will return the output mode (BFM #0), the offset data (BFM #10 to #13) and the gain data (BFM #14 to #17) will be to the factory default status state. 1. Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions. 1) System configuration FX3U-4DA (unit No.0) should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC. 2) Device assignment Device Description X000 4AD initialization command

2. Example of sequence program For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs

4DA initialization command X000 FNC 12 K1 U0\G20 The 4DA will be initialized. MOV P (BFM #0 to #3098 will be cleared.)

For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs

4DA initialization command X000 FNC 79 K0 K20 K1 K1 The 4DA will be initialized. TO P (BFM #0 to #3098 will be cleared.)

3. Cautions regarding initializing During initialization, output is stopped, and H0000 is automatically written in the output status (BFM #6). At the completion of initialization, the output status (BFM #6) will automatically change to H1111, and the output will be restarted. It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization. Do not set (write) data in the buffer memory during the period. Priority is given to the setting of the change prohibition mode (BFM #19). Once initialization is completed, the value in BFM #20 will automatically change to "K0".

E-64 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

9. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error codes. B FX If the D/A conversion data is not output, or if the proper digital value is not output, check the following items: FX 3UC 3U -4AD

Wiring -4AD Program Error status C FX

9.1 PLC Version Number Check 3U -4AD-ADP

Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. Check the version number of FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later. Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. D FX Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. 3G

→ For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. -2AD-BD

9.2 Wiring Check E

Check the wiring as follows: FX 3U

1. Power -4DA FX3U-4DA needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of FX3U-4DA is on. 2. Analog output line F Use the 2-core twisted shielded cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog FX 3U

output line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines. -4DA-ADP → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3.

9.3 Program Check G FX

Check the program as follows: 3G -1DA-BD 1. Check the output mode and output data. Check that data has been set correctly in BFM #0 to #4. 2. Check the settings. H

Check that the offset data (BFM #10 to #13), gain data (BFM #14 to #17), upper/lower limit function setting FX

(BFM #38) and table output function start/stop setting (BFM #80) are correct. 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-65 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.4 Error Status Check

9.4 Error Status Check

When an error occurs in FX3U-4DA, the bit appropriate to the error is turned on in the error status (BFM #29). Take measures, referring to the following table.

Bit No. Items b0 Error detection b1 O/G error b2 Power supply error b3 Hardware error b4 - b5 Error in setting of function for setting output upon PLC stop b6 Upper/lower limit function setting error Error in corrective function setting by load resistance b7 (Valid only in voltage output mode) b8 Table output function setting error b9 Status automatic transfer setting error b10 Over-scale b11 Disconnection detection (Valid only in current output mode) b12 Setting data change prohibited b13 to b15 -

1. Error detection (b0) 1) Description of error If any of b1 is turned on, this bit (b11) will turn on. 2. O/G error (b1) 1) Description of error The bit is turned on when the offset or gain data (BFM #10 to #17) in the EEPROM has a setting error. 2) Remedy Check the output mode (BFM #0) and the offset and gain data (BFM #10 to #17). 3. Power supply error (b2) 1) Description of error 24 V power is not correctly supplied. 2) Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supply voltage. 4. Hardware error (b3) 1) Description of error FX3U-4DA may be defective. 2) Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 5. Error when setting the function for output upon PLC stop (b5) 1) Description of error The bit will turn on when the functions setting value for setting output upon PLC stop is not correctly set. 2) Remedy Check the output mode (BFM #0) and the setting value of output data upon PLC stop (BFM #32 to #35).

E-66 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program A 6. Upper/lower limit function value setting error (b6) Common Items 1) Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the upper/lower limit function is not correctly set. 2) Remedy Check the output mode (BFM #0) and the lower limit (BFM #41 to 44) and upper limit (BFM #45 to #48) settings value of the upper/lower limit function. B FX FX 3UC 3U

7. Error in corrective function setting by load resistance (b7) -4AD -4AD 1) Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the corrective function by load resistance is not correctly set. 2) Remedy Check the output mode (BFM #0) and the load resistance values (BFM #51 to #54) for the channels. C FX 3U

8. Table output function setting error (b8) -4AD-ADP 1) Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the table output function is not correctly set. 2) Remedy Check the output mode (BFM #0) and the setting value of the table output function. D FX 3G

9. Status automatic transfer setting error (b9) -2AD-BD 1) Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the status automatic transfer function is not correctly set. 2) Remedy Check the setting values in the automatic transfer destination data register specification field (BFM #61 to E FX

#63). 3U -4DA 10. Over-scale (b10) 1) Description of error This bit will turn on when analog output is out of the specified range. 2) Remedy F FX

Check the output mode (BFM #0) setting value and the values in the output data (BFM #1 to #4). 3U -4DA-ADP 11. Disconnection detection (b11) 1) Description of error The bit is turned on when a cable is disconnected. 2) Remedy G FX

Check that no cables are disconnected or have contact failure. 3G -1DA-BD 12. Setting data change prohibited (b12) 1) Description of error The bit will turn on while the setting change is prohibited. 2) Remedy H FX

To change any setting, set BFM #19 to K3030. 3U -3A-ADP

9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program

If the above-mentioned remedies cannot solve the problem, initialize FX3U-4DA and then check the I -ADP conditions of the FX3U-4DA using the test program. FX → For a detailed description of FX3U-4DA initialization program, refer to Section 8.4. 3U -4AD-PT → For a detailed description of the test program, refer to Chapter 4.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

E-67 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting EditionFX3U-4DA (4-channel Analog Output) 9.5 FX3U-4DA Initialization and Test Program

MEMO

E-68 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] F. FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation method for the FX3U-4DA-ADP special adapter (4-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. I -ADP Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward FX 3U

it to the end user. -4AD-PT

F-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output)

F-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3U-4DA-ADP (referred to as 4DA-ADP). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

The FX3U-4DA-ADP is an analog special adapter. Which is connectable with the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC to output the voltage/current data for up to 4 channels. C 1) Up to 4 units of 4DA-ADP can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. FX *1 3U Up to 2 units of 4DA-ADP can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. -4AD-ADP (Including other analog special adapters). 2) Either "voltage output" or "current output" can be specified for each channel. 3) The D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. D FX 3G -2AD-BD System Point and section to be referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum *1 Number of connectable FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2 maximum (including other analog special adapters) units FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC E Series PLC FX 3U -4DA To check the connectable PLC model number, refer + + to Section 1.3. F FX 3U

Expansion -4DA-ADP 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board*2 adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed description of wiring, Analog data refer to Chapter 3.

Inverter, etc. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description Contents of special devices, refer to Special devices Chapter 4. *3 Output mode Transfer direction 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269 H switching For a detailed description FX 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279*3 of a basic program, refer to 3U

Output setting data Section 4.8. -3A-ADP 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 Error status 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3

Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. I -ADP FX

*1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type). 3U -4AD-PT *2. The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLC. For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used.

*3. FX3G and FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. 1st adapter : M/D8280 to M/D8289 2nd adapter : M/D8290 to M/D8299 J -ADP FX

3rd and 4th adapters : Cannot be connected 3U -4AD-PTW

F-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog output using the 4DA-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4DA-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Compatible PLC version number • Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: • Operation environment • Performance specifications Refer to the common • Output characteristics pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) • Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: • Power supply line • Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4. Programming: Programming • Details of special devices • Examples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 5.

Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change: • Convenient function program • How to use scaling instruction

If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting."

F-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers Common Items

The 4DA-ADP is compatible with the following PLCs.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later*1 After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later*1 After April 2004 FX 3UC 3U

*1 -4AD FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later*1 After January 2012 (From first product)

*1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.61 or later, FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later and FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later (From first product) supports hardware error check. C → For a detailed description of hardware error, refer to Section 6.5. FX 3U

1. Version check -4AD-ADP Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number D The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the FX 3G

product. -2AD-BD → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1.

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number E FX 3U

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 4DA-ADP of the -4DA FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable F

versions. FX

It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting 3U -4DA-ADP "FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC.

1. Japanese versions Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) G FX

FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 3G GX Works2 -1DA-BD Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-J GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *2 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later H Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) FX FX3G PLC 3U -3A-ADP GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later *3 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) I -ADP FX FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later *4 Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) 3U -4AD-PT FX3GC PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) J -ADP FX

*2. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. 3U *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. -4AD-PTW *4. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

F-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

F-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for 4DA-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

10 times of testing in 3G

Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 each direction (X-, Y-, -2AD-BD DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - and Z-axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 to 57 − 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 to 150 9.8 − E Shock FX 2

147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z 3U resistance*1 -4DA Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min F voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal FX 3U

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts G environment FX 3G

Working -1DA-BD < 2000m*4 altitude *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If 4DA-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H FX 3U

*3. -3A-ADP Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP FX

→ For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. 3U -4AD-PT *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use 4DA-ADP. The 4DA-ADP may malfunction.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

Item Specifications D/A conversion circuit 24V DC +20%-15%, 150mA driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power line to the terminal block.) 5V DC, 15mA Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series, it is not necessary to supply the power.)

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Analog output 0V to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC range (External load: 5kΩ to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) Digital input 12 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V/4000) 4μA(16mA/4000) ±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5 °C) ±1.0% (±100mV) for 10V full scale (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale If the external load resistance (Rs) is less than (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5°C) Total accuracy 5kΩ, the value calculated from the following ±1.0% (±160μA) for 16mA full scale formula will be added: (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55 °C) (Addition will be 100mV per 1%.) 47×100 -0.9(%) Rs+47

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) D/A conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.

10V 20mA

Output characteristics Analog output Analog

Analog output Analog 4mA 0 4000 4080 0 4000 4080 Digital input Digital input

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog output area. Channels are not insulated from each other. Numbers of I/O 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) points occupied

F-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.4 D/A Conversion Time A 2.4 D/A Conversion Time Common Items

This section describes the D/A conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC B FX FX

1. D/A conversion and special data register update timing 3UC 3U -4AD D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. -4AD During execution of the END instruction, the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers, performs D/A conversion of the data, and updates the analog output data.

FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP C n'th 1st FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Sequence program Digital value D/A writing D conversion FX D/A conversion 3G 200μs start command -2AD-BD /4ch END instruction D/A Digital value writing conversion D/A conversion 200μs/4ch start command E FX 3U -4DA

2. D/A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device, the offset value will be output. F FX

If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be 3U

latched. -4DA-ADP Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins. 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion G

and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter). FX 3G

4. D/A conversion speed (data update time) -1DA-BD During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of 4 channel will be subject to D/A conversion which takes 200μs, after which the analog data will be output. END instruction execution time will be "200μs × number of connected adapters." H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 2.4 D/A Conversion Time

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

1. D/A conversion and special data register update timing D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of the END instruction, the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers, performs D/A conversion of the data, and updates the analog output data.

FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program Digital value D/A writing conversion D/A conversion 250μs start command /4ch END instruction D/A Digital value writing conversion D/A conversion 250μs/4ch start command

2. D/A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device, the offset value will be output. If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched. Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins. 3. If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter). 4. D/A conversion speed (data update time) During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of 4 channel will be subject to D/A conversion which takes 250μs, after which the analog data will be output. END instruction execution time will be "250μs × number of connected adapters."

F-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 4DA-ADP wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the 4DA-ADP. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 4DA-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4DA-ADP

POWER

Signal Application 24+

24+ External power 24- 24- Grounding terminal

VI+ V1+

I1+ I1+ Channel 1 analog output COM1 COM1

V2+ V2+

I2+ I2+ Channel 2 analog output

COM2 COM2

V3+ V3+ Channel 3 analog output

I3+ I3+ COM3 COM3

V4+ V4+

I4+ I4+ Channel 4 analog output

COM4 COM4

F-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below. 1. Cable B FX Applicable cable and tightening torque FX 3UC 3U

Wire size (stranded/ Tightening -4AD

Termination -4AD single-wire) torque 2 2 To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable Single-wire 0.3mm to 0.5mm (AWG22 to 20) and then twist the core before connection. To connect a single-wire cable, just peel the cover off the 2-wire 0.3mm2(AWG22) C

cable before connection. FX

0.22 to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 3U

2 2 -4AD-ADP Rod terminal 0.3mm to 0.5mm 0.25Nm (recommended terminal) with (AWG22 to 20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation (Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool external view shown in sleeve CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact the following figure.) (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) D FX

*1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 3G -2AD-BD *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. E

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 Nm. FX

Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures 3U or malfunctions. -4DA

To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" cannot protrude. F - Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. FX

9mm 3U (0.35") -4DA-ADP To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve: Insulation sleeve Contact area If the cable cover is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into (Crimp area) the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view. 8mm (0.31") G 2.6mm FX 14mm 3G (0.1") Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.55") -1DA-BD CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 H *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 FX 3U -3A-ADP 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right. I -ADP Note: FX

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not 3U The head -4AD-PT be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque should be shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an straight. appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")). 0.4mm 2.5mm Manufacturer Model J -ADP (0.01") (0.09") FX Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5 3U -4AD-PTW

F-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4DA-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

4DA-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series 4DA-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +15V +15V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to class-D grounded power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

4DA-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +15V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounded power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit.

F-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Output Line A 3.4 Analog Output Line Common Items

The analog output type, "voltage output" or "current output", can be selected for each channel.

If voltage output is selected: 4DA-ADP Terminal block ch B FX *1 Shielded FX V + 3UC 3U

-4AD I + -4AD COM *3

If current output is selected: C ch FX 3U V + -4AD-ADP I+ COM *3

Connection of external power supply line D +15V FX

24+ 3G 24V DC -2AD-BD *2 24-

Class-D grounding E FX

V +, I +, ch : represents the channel number. 3U -4DA *1. Use 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines, and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines. *2. 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series PLC can also be used. F

*3. Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side. FX 3U -4DA-ADP

3.5 Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below. G FX

The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. 3G

Independent grounding should be performed for best results. -1DA-BD When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following figure. → For details, refer to User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC Series. H PLC Other PLC Other PLC Other FX

equipment equipment equipment 3U -3A-ADP

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). I -ADP FX

The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible. 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 4DA-ADP.

4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data

1) The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals. 2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the output mode can be specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Communi- cation FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA special *1 -ADP -ADP -ADP adapter -ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: M8260 to M8269 D/A Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 D/A Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: M8280 to M8289 D/A Special data registers: D8280 to D8289

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 D/A Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. In this case, however, do not include the high- speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, and the CF card special adapter. *1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-4DA-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.

F-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items Communi- cation FX3U-4DA FX3U-4DA special *2 -ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

*1 1st 2nd Special devices B FX FX

Special auxiliary relays: 3UC 3U -4AD

M8280 to M8289 -4AD D/A Special data registers: D8280 to D8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 C

D/A Special data registers: FX

D8290 to D8299 3U -4AD-ADP

*1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). FX *2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4DA-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC. 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If 4DA-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Switches the output mode of M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 R/W channel 1. Switches the output mode of M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W channel 2. Section Switches the output mode of 4.3 M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 R/W channel 3. Switches the output mode of M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 R/W channel 4. Special Sets the cancel of the channel-1 auxiliary M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 R/W output holding function. relay Sets the cancel of the channel-2 M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 R/W output holding function. Section Sets the cancel of the channel-3 4.4 M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 R/W output holding function. Sets the cancel of the channel-4 M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 R/W output holding function. M8268 to M8278 to M8288 to M8298 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data R/W D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data R/W Section D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data R/W 4.5 D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel-4 output setting data R/W Special D8264 to D8274 to D8284 to D8294 to data Unused (Do not use.) - - register D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Section D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.6 Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 2 R 4.7

F-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.3 Switching of Output Mode A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1. R/W B FX M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2. R/W Section FX

M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3. R/W 4.3 3UC 3U -4AD M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4. R/W -4AD Sets the cancel of the channel-1 output M8284 M8294 R/W holding function. Special Sets the cancel of the channel-2 output auxiliary M8285 M8295 R/W C relay holding function. Section FX 4.4 3U

Sets the cancel of the channel-3 output -4AD-ADP M8286 M8296 R/W holding function. Sets the cancel of the channel-4 output M8287 M8297 R/W holding function. M8288 to M8298 to Unused (Do not use.) - - D M8289 M8299 FX 3G

D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data R/W -2AD-BD D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data R/W Section D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data R/W 4.5 D8283 D8293 Channel-4 output setting data R/W Special D8284 to D8294 to E data register Unused (Do not use.) - - FX

D8287 D8297 3U

Section -4DA D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.6 Section D8289 D8299 Model code = 2 R 4.7 F FX 3U

4.3 Switching of Output Mode -4DA-ADP

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 4DA-ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode. To switch the output mode, use the following special auxiliary relays: G FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC FX 3G

Special auxiliary relay -1DA-BD Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF:Voltage output H M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON :Current output FX 3U

M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 -3A-ADP

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description I -ADP FX

1st 2nd 3U -4AD-PT M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF:Voltage output M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON :Current output M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) To switch the output mode of a channel, create a sequence program as follows:

1) To switch the channel output mode of 2) To switch the output mode of channel 2 channel 1 of the 1st analog special of the 1st analog special adapter to the adapter to the voltage output mode: current output mode: M8001 M8000 M8260 M8261 Normally OFF Normally ON

4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting

This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data (0V for voltage output mode, 4mA for current output mode) when the PLC stops. To cancel or set the output holding function, use the following special auxiliary relays: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Cancel output holding M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 function setting for channel 1 Cancel output holding M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 OFF: Holds the analog data output function setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC. Cancel output holding ON : Outputs the offset data at M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 function setting for channel 3 stop of the PLC. Cancel output holding M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 function setting for channel 4

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd Cancel output holding function M8284 M8294 setting for channel 1 Cancel output holding function M8285 M8295 OFF: Holds the analog data output setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC. Cancel output holding function ON : Outputs the offset data at M8286 M8296 setting for channel 3 stop of the PLC. Cancel output holding function M8287 M8297 setting for channel 4

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel, create a sequence program as follows: 1) To set the output holding function for 2) To cancel the output holding function for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter: channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8000 M8264 M8265 Normally OFF Normally ON

F-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.5 Output Setting Data A 4.5 Output Setting Data Common Items

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) The 4DA-ADP performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs the analog data. Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data: B FX FX

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data C FX

D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data 3U -4AD-ADP D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel-4 output setting data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC D Special data register FX Description 3G

1st 2nd -2AD-BD D8280 D8290 Channel-1 output setting data D8281 D8291 Channel-2 output setting data D8282 D8292 Channel-3 output setting data E D8283 D8293 Channel-4 output setting data FX 3U -4DA

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 Performs D/A conversion using the digital D100 D8260 data stored in the D100 for channel 1 of F MOV FX

Normally ON the 1st analog special adapter. 3U -4DA-ADP Performs D/A conversion using the digital FNC 12 D101 D8261 data stored in the D101 for channel 2 of MOV the 1st analog special adapter.

Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be G FX

output as analog data) in D100 and D101. 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status

4.6 Error Status

1. Description of setting If an error is detected on 4DA-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data. Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.

Bit Description b0 Channel-1 output data setting error b1 Channel-2 output data setting error b2 Channel-3 output data setting error b3 Channel-4 output data setting error b4 EEPROM error b5 Unused b6 4DA-ADP hardware error (Power supply error included)*1 b7 to b15 Unused *1. The 4DA-ADP is supported from June, 2009 and later. For using the 4DA-ADP, it is necessary to use a main unit whose version supports this function. For the applicability of each combination of 4DA-ADP and main unit, refer to Section 6.5.

2. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC) M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV Normally ON M0 Y000 Channel-1 output data setting error in 3rd *2 adapter. M1 Y001 Channel-2 output data setting error in 3rd *2 adapter.

M2 Y002 Channel-3 output data setting error in 3rd *2 adapter. M3 Y003 Channel-4 output data setting error in 3rd *2 adapter.

M4 Y004 EEPROM error in the 3rd *2 adapter

*2. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

F-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status A 3. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) Common Items

D8268.0 Y000 Channel-1 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268.1 B FX Y001 Channel-2 output data setting error in FX 1st adapter 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

D8268.2 Y002 Channel-3 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268.3 C Y003 Channel-4 output data setting error in FX 1st adapter 3U -4AD-ADP

D8268.4 Y004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 4.7 Model Code

4.7 Model Code

Initial value: K2 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) 1. Description of setting When the 4DA-ADP is connected, model code "2" is stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Description D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC 1st 2nd Description D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether 4DA-ADP is connected or not.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

Checks the model code FNC224 D8269 K2 Y007 of the 1st analog special LD = adapter.

4.8 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to output D/A converted analog data. For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to the voltage output mode and channel 2 to current output mode, and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D/A conversion.

M8001 M8280 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode (0 V to 10 V).

M8284 Sets the output holding function for channel 1.

M8000 M8281 Sets the output mode of channel 2 to the current output mode (4 mA to 20 mA).

M8285 Cancels the output holding function for channel 2.

M8000 FNC 12 D100 D8280 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored MOV in D100 for channel 1.

FNC 12 D101 D8281 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored MOV in D101 for channel 2.

Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be output as analog data) in D100 and D101. *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

F-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics A Common Items

5. Changing of Output Characteristics

Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the output B FX characteristics. FX 3UC 3U

FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence programs to change the -4AD -4AD output characteristics. → For a detailed description of scaling instruction, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction. C FX

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 3U -4AD-ADP This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 (when analog output range is 1 to 5V) to 0 to 10000. A specified digital value is inputted into D100. D 1. Output characteristics FX 3G

Voltage output characteristics Digital value characteristics -2AD-BD (product specifications) to be changed 10V Y-axis E FX 3U

5V 2000 -4DA Analog output Analog

Specified digital output actually be to value subject to D/A conversion (5V)

1V 400 (1V) F 0 X-axis FX 400 2000 4000 0 10000 Digital value input 3U

Desired digital value (D100) -4DA-ADP

2. Example of program 1 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter. M8001 G

M8260 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output FX

mode. 3G -1DA-BD

M8264 Sets the output holding function for channel 1.

M8002 Program for setting scaling instruction data table FNC 12 K2 D50 H

MOV FX

Item Description Value Device 3U

Number of points Sets the number of points. 2 D50 -3A-ADP FNC 12 K0 D51 MOV X- Digital value of specified 0D51 Start coordinate start point on X-axis FNC 12 point Y- Digital value of desired D/A K400 D52 400 D52 MOV coordinate conversion start point X- Digital value of specified end 10000 D53 I -ADP FNC 12 K10000 D53 End coordinate point on X-axis FX MOV point Y- Digital value of desired D/A 3U 2000 -4AD-PT coordinate conversion end point D54 FNC 12 K2000 D54 MOV M8000 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored FNC259 D100 D50 D8260 SCL in the D8260. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics

3. Example of program 2 (For FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D100) of the 1st analog special adapter.

M8001 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the M8280 voltage output mode.

Sets the output holding function for M8284 channel 1.

FNC230 D100 K0 FNC237 D100 K10000 M10 Check to make sure the digital LD>= AND<= value (D100) is in range. M10 FNC 22 D100 K1600 D101 MUL

FNC 23 D101 K10000 D103 DDIV Calculation for changing output characteristics. FNC 20 D103 K400 D107 Stores the operation result in D8280. ADD

FNC 12 D107 D8280 MOV

4. Cautions regarding programming GX Developer version 8.13P or later supports scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259). If the input digital value for the D/A conversion is out of the data table range specified by scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259), the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error (error code: K6706).

F-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

6. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. B FX If analog data is not output, or if the proper analog value is not output, check the following items: FX 3UC 3U -4AD

Version number of PLC -4AD Wiring Special devices Programs C FX

Error status 3U -4AD-ADP 6.1 PLC Version Number Check

Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. D FX Check the version number of FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.20 or later. 3G

Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. -2AD-BD Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. E 6.2 Wiring Check FX 3U -4DA Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power The 4DA-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that F

the POWER indicator lamp of the 4DA-ADP is on. FX 3U

2. Analog output line -4DA-ADP Use the 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX

6.3 Special Device Check 3G -1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the 4DA-ADP are being used correctly: 1. Output mode switching Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set. H FX

Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode. Turn on the device to set the output 3U mode to the current output mode. -3A-ADP 2. Output setting data Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel. I -ADP FX

3. Error status 3U -4AD-PT Check that no error is detected in the 4DA-ADP. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Program Check

6.4 Program Check

Check the following items for the program: 1. Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs.

6.5 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 4DA-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled.

4DA-ADP FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC FX3G Series PLC FX3GC Series year and month Former than Ver.2.61 or Former than Ver.1.20 or PLC of production Ver.2.60 later Ver.1.10 later Former than Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 2009 May 2009 June Not applicable Applicable Not applicable Applicable Applicable or later For confirmation of the version of the main unit and checking the 4DA-ADP serial number, refer to the following. → For details of confirmation of the PLC main unit version, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. → For details of check of the 4DA-ADP serial number, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.2.1. To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Output data setting error (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range. Analog data will not be correctly output. 2) Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

F-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check A 3. 4DA-ADP hardware error (b6) Common Items 1) Description of error The 4DA-ADP is not operating properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the 4DA-ADP. Also check that the 4DA-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. B FX FX

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric 3UC 3U -4AD

representative. -4AD

C FX 3U -4AD-ADP

D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

F-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-4DA-ADP (4-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check

MEMO

F-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] G. FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation method for the FX3G-1DA-BD analog output expansion board (1-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. I -ADP FX

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward 3U

it to the end user. -4AD-PT

G-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output)

G-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3G-1DA-BD (referred to as 1DA-BD). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

The FX3G-1DA-BD is an analog expansion board. Which is connectable with the FX3G Series PLC to output the voltage/current data for up to 1 channel. C *1 FX 1) Up to 2 units of 1DA-BD can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC. 3U

(Including other analog expansion boards, analog special adapters). -4AD-ADP 2) Either "voltage output" or "current output" can be specified. 3) The D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3G Series PLC. D FX

Point and section to be 3G

System -2AD-BD referred to

2*1 maximum …… Number of connectable including other analog expansion units (boards, analog special adapters. ( FX3G Series PLC E FX

Board B Board A To check the connectable 3U …… PLC model number, refer -4DA to Section 1.3.

Connected to the option connector 1 F FX 3U

Connected to the option connector 2 -4DA-ADP Analog data For a detailed …… description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. Inverter, etc. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

For a detailed description Contents …… of special devices, refer to For FX3G Series PLC Chapter 4. Output mode Transfer direction Special devices switching For a detailed description H

Board A M/D8260 to M/D8269 of a basic program, refer to FX Output setting data Section 4.8. Board B M/D8270 to M/D8279 3U -3A-ADP Error status

Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. I -ADP *1. Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog output using the 1DA-BD, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3G-1DA-BD

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Compatible PLC version number • Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: • Operation environment • Performance specifications Refer to the common • Output characteristics pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) • Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: • Power supply line • Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4. Programming: Programming • Details of special devices • Examples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 5.

Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change

If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting."

G-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers Common Items

The 1DA-BD is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.10 or later After October 2008 B FX FX 3UC 3U

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number D FX 3G

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 1DA-BD of the FX3G -2AD-BD Series PLC. Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. E FX

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) GX Works2 Ver. 1.08J or later *3 H SWDNC-GXW2-E Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC FX 3U

*4. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for 1DA-BD.

2.1 Generic Specifications

Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating temperature -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) when stored Relative 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating humidity Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude (Hz) (m/s2) (mm) 10 times of testing in Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 each direction (X-, Y-, DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - and Z-axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 to 57 − 0.075 Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9.8 − Shock 147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z resistance*1 Noise Using noise simulator of: resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment

Working *3 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

G-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.2 Performance Specifications A 2.2 Performance Specifications Common Items

Specifications Item Voltage output Current output B FX FX

Analog output 0V to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 3UC 3U -4AD

range (External load: 2kΩ to 1MΩ) (External load: 500Ω or less) -4AD Digital input 12 bits, binary 11 bits, binary Resolution 2.5mV(10V/4000) 8μA(16mA/2000) ±0.5% (±50mV) for 10V full scale C

(when ambient temperature is 25°C±5 °C) FX

±1.0% (±100mV) for 10V full scale 3U (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55°C) -4AD-ADP ±0.5% (±80μA) for 16mA full scale Shipment adjustment is carried out by external (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5°C) Total accuracy load resistance 2kΩ. ±1.0% (±160μA) for 16mA full scale If external load resistance becomes larger (when ambient temperature is 0°C to 55 °C) D than 2kΩ, the output voltage will increase FX slightly. 3G -2AD-BD When the load is 1MΩ, the output voltage becomes about 2% higher than the correct value. D/A conversion 60μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.3. E FX 3U -4DA

10V 20mA F FX 3U Output -4DA-ADP characteristics Analog output

Analog output 4mA

0 4000 4080 0 2000 2040 Digital input Digital input G FX

Caution: 3G -1DA-BD An area of dead band is located in the region of 0V. Therefore the output analog value may not represent the digital value accurately. Insulation method The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC. H

Numbers of I/O FX 0 point (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.) points occupied 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 2.3 D/A Conversion Time

2.3 D/A Conversion Time

This section describes the D/A conversion time. 1. D/A conversion and special data register update timing D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of the END instruction, the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers, performs D/A conversion of the data, and updates the analog output data.

FX3G Series PLC

Sequence Program

END instruction

D/A conversion Digital value D/A conversion Digital value start command writing start command writing

D/A D/A conversion conversion

60μs 60μs /1ch /1ch

FX3G-1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD Board A Board B

2. D/A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device, the offset value will be output. If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched. Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins. 3. If two analog expansion boards are connected During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected boards will be subject to D/A conversion and then output (in the order of board A → board B). 4. D/A conversion speed (data update time) During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data will be subject to D/A conversion which takes 60μs, after which the analog data will be output. END instruction execution time will be "60μs × number of connected board."

G-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 1DA-BD wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the 1DA-BD. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 1DA-BD are arranged as follows:

Signal ••V+ I+ VI- Unused Output COM Application terminal terminal terminal

G-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below. 1. Cable B FX Applicable cable and tightening torque FX 3UC 3U

Wire size (stranded/ Tightening -4AD

cable before connection. FX

0.22 to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 3U

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 Nm. FX

Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures 3U or malfunctions. -4DA

(0.1") -1DA-BD Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 H *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 FX 3U -3A-ADP 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right. I -ADP Note: FX

If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not 3U

The head -4AD-PT be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque should be shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an straight. appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")). 0.4mm 2.5mm Manufacturer Model J -ADP (0.01") (0.09") FX Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5 3U -4AD-PTW

G-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Analog Output Line

3.3 Analog Output Line

If voltage output is selected: 1DA-BD Terminal block *1 Shield V+ I+ *2 Class-D VI- grounding

If current output is selected: 1DA-BD Terminal block *1 Shield V+ I+ *2 Class-D VI- grounding

*1. Use 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines, and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines. *2. Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side.

3.4 Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below. The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. Independent grounding should be performed for best results. When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following figure. → For details, refer to User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC Series.

Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

G-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data A Common Items

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 1DA-BD. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 4.1 Writing of D/A Conversion Data -4AD

3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned respectively to the -4AD-ADP analog expansion board (board A) connected to option connector 1 and the analog expansion board (board B) connected to option connector 2 in this order. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3G Series PLC D FX 3G

FX3G Series PLC -2AD-BD

Sequence Program

E Special auxiliary relays: Special auxiliary relays: FX M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279 3U Special data register: Special data register: -4DA D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279

Option connector 1 Option connector 2 D/A D/A F FX3G-1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD FX 3U *1 Board A Board B -4DA-ADP

The analog expansion board connected to option connector 1 is regarded as the "board A", and the analog expansion board connected to option connector 2 is regarded as the "board B". *1. Board B is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If 1DA-BD is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device Board A Board B Section M8260 M8270 Switches the output mode. R/W 4.3 M8261 to M8271 to Unused (Do not use.) - - Special M8263 M8273 auxiliary Sets the cancel of output holding Section relay M8264 M8274 R/W function. 4.4 M8265 to M8275 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 Section D8260 D8270 Output setting data R/W 4.5 D8261 to D8271 to Unused (Do not use.) - - Special D8267 D8277 data Section register D8268 D8278 Error status R/W 4.6 Section D8269 D8279 Model code = 4 R 4.7

4.3 Switching of Output Mode

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 1DA-BD between the current output mode and the voltage output mode. To switch the output mode, use the following special auxiliary relays:

Special auxiliary relay Description Board A Board B OFF:Voltage output M8260 M8270 Switches the output mode. ON :Current output

1. Program Example To switch the output mode, create a sequence program as follows:

To switch the channel output mode of the board A to the voltage output mode: M8001 M8260 Normally OFF

G-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting A 4.4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting Common Items

This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data (0V for voltage output mode, 4mA for current output mode) when the PLC stops. To cancel or set the output holding function, use the following special auxiliary relays: Special auxiliary relay B FX Description FX Board A Board B 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD OFF: Holds the analog data output Cancel output holding function just before stop of the PLC. M8264 M8274 setting. ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP 1. Program Example To set or cancel the output holding function, create a sequence program as follows:

To set the output holding function for the board A: D M8001 FX 3G

M8264 -2AD-BD Normally OFF

4.5 Output Setting Data E FX 3U

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) -4DA The 1DA-BD performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs the analog data. Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data: Special data register F Description FX

Board A Board B 3U -4DA-ADP D8260 D8270 Output setting data

1. Program Example G FX

M8000 3G FNC 12 Performs D/A conversion using the digital -1DA-BD D100 D8260 data stored in the D100 for the board A. Normally ON MOV

Performs D/A conversion using the digital FNC 12 D101 D8270 data stored in the D101 for the board B. MOV H FX 3U

Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be -3A-ADP output as analog data) in D100 and D101.

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Error Status

4.6 Error Status

1. Description of setting If an error is detected on 1DA-BD, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data:

Special data register Description Board A Board B D8268 D8278 Stores the error status data.

Bit Description b0 Output data setting error b1 to b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused

2. Program Example

M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4M0 MOV Normally ON M0 Y000 Output data setting error on board A. M4 Y004 EEPROM error on the board A.

4.7 Model Code

Initial value: K4 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) 1. Description of setting When the 1DA-BD is connected, model code "4" is stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: Special data register Description Board A Board B D8269 D8279 Model code

Use the special data registers above to check whether 1DA-BD is connected or not. 2. Program Example

FNC224 Checks the model code D8269 K4 Y007 of the board A. LD =

G-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 4.8 Basic Program Example A 4.8 Basic Program Example Common Items

Create the following basic program example to output D/A converted analog data. The following program will set the board A to the voltage output mode and board B to current output mode, and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D/A conversion. B FX M8001 FX Sets the output mode of the board A to the voltage M8260 3UC 3U output mode (0 V to 10 V). Normally -4AD -4AD OFF M8264 Sets the output holding function for the board A.

M8000 M8270 Sets the output mode of the board B to the current output mode (4 mA to 20 mA). C

Normally FX

ON 3U

M8274 Cancels the output holding function for the board B. -4AD-ADP

M8000 FNC 12 D100 D8260 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored MOV in D100 for the board A.

FNC 12 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data stored D D101 D8270 FX in D101 for the board B.

MOV 3G -2AD-BD Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be output as analog data) in D100 and D101. E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics

5. Changing of Output Characteristics

The output characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3G Series PLCs.

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics

This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 (when analog output range is 1 to 5V) to 0 to 10000. A specified digital value is inputted into D100. 1. Output characteristics Voltage output characteristics Digital value characteristics (product specifications) to be changed 10V

Y-axis

5V 2000 Analog output Analog

Specified digital output actually be to value subject to D/A conversion (5V)

1V 400 (1V) 0 X-axis 400 2000 4000 0 10000 Digital value input Desired digital value (D100)

2. Example of program For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D100) of the board A.

M8001 M8260 Sets the output mode of 1st board Normally to the voltage output mode (0V to 10V). OFF

M8264 Sets the output mode to the output holding mode.

FNC230 D100 K0 FNC237 D100 K10000 M10 Check to make sure the digital LD>= AND<= value (D100) is in range. M10 FNC 22 D100 K1600 D101 MUL

FNC 23 D101 K10000 D103 DDIV Calculation for changing output characteristics. FNC 20 D103 K400 D107 Stores the operation result in D8260. ADD

FNC 12 D107 D8260 MOV

G-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

6. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. B FX If analog data is not output, or if the proper analog value is not output, check the following items: FX 3UC 3U -4AD

Version number of PLC -4AD Installation Wiring Special devices C FX

Programs 3U Error status -4AD-ADP

6.1 PLC Version Number Check D FX Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC. The version number should be 1.10 or later. 3G

→ For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. -2AD-BD

6.2 Checking installation E

Confirm that the 1DA-BD is attached correctly to the main unit. Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp FX

of the 1DA-BD is lit correctly. 3U -4DA → For a detailed description of installing, refer to FX3G User’s Manual-Hardware Edition.

6.3 Wiring Check F Check the following items for wiring: FX 3U -4DA-ADP 1. Analog output line Use the 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX 3G

6.4 Special Device Check -1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the 1DA-BD are being used correctly: 1. Output mode switching H Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set. FX Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode. Turn on the device to set the output 3U -3A-ADP mode to the current output mode. 2. Output setting data Check that the special device is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel. I -ADP FX 3U

3. Error status -4AD-PT Check that no error is detected in the 1DA-BD. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

G-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G-1DA-BD (1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Program Check

6.5 Program Check

Check the following items for the program: 1. Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs.

6.6 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 1DA-BD, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled.

Bit Description b0 Output data setting error b1 to b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Output data setting error (b0) 1) Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range. Analog data will not be correctly output. 2) Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office.

G-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] H. FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, D FX

1-channel Analog Output) 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-3A-ADP analog special adapter (2-channel analog input, 1-channel analog output) and should be read and understood before I -ADP attempting to install or use the unit. FX 3U

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward -4AD-PT it to the end user.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property J -ADP rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. FX 3U

H-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output)

H-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter outlines the FX3U-3A-ADP (referred to as the 3A-ADP). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

The analog special adapter FX3U-3A-ADP receives voltage/current data from 2 channels and outputs voltage/ current data from 1 channel when connected to a FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. C 1) Up to 4 3A-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. FX *1 3U Up to 2 3A-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. -4AD-ADP (including the other analog special adapters). 2) The 3A-ADP receives and outputs voltage/current data. 3) A/D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U/ FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. D FX

4) D/A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3U/ 3G -2AD-BD FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC.

System Point and section to be referred to FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum *1 E

FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2 maximum FX Number of connectable

(including other analog special adapters) 3U units FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC -4DA Series PLC To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3. F

+ + FX 3U -4DA-ADP

*2 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX

Flowmeter, Inverter, etc. 3G pressure sensor, etc -1DA-BD

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC H For a detailed description FX 3U Contents Special devices of special devices, refer to •Analog data Transfer direction 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269*3 Chapter 4. -3A-ADP •Error status *3 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 For a detailed description •Switching of input mode *3 of a basic program, refer to •Setting of averaging time 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289 Section 4.12. •Output mode switching 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3 •Output setting data I -ADP •Setting whether or not FX

a channel is used 3U -4AD-PT Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system. *1.Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type). *2.The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC. For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used. J -ADP *3.FX3G and FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. FX 3U

1st adapter : M/D8280 to M/D8289 -4AD-PTW 2nd adapter : M/D8290 to M/D8299 3rd and 4th adapters : Cannot be connected

H-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input / output using the 3A-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-3A-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: • Compatible PLC version number • Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: • Operation environment • Performance specifications Refer to the • Input/output characteristics common pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) • Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: • Selection of sensor cable • Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4. • Analog input/output line

Programming Programming: • Details of special devices • Examples of basic programs Refer to Chapter 5.

Changing of input/output characteristics Method of input/output characteristics change • Convenient function program • How to use scaling instruction

If the error status data or the input/output analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting."

H-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number A 1.3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number Common Items

The 3A-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.61 or later*1 After July 2009 B FX FX

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.61 or later*1 After July 2009 3UC 3U -4AD FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.20 or later After June 2009 -4AD

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) *1. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later supports the under-scale detection. C 1. Version check FX 3U

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. -4AD-ADP → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the D

product. FX

→ For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, 3G refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1. -2AD-BD

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number E Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for 3A-ADP of the FX3G/ FX 3U

FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. -4DA Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting F FX

"FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC. 3U -4DA-ADP 1. Japanese versions

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs G FX

GX Works2 3G Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-J -1DA-BD GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *2 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) H FX3G PLC FX 3U

GX Works2 -3A-ADP Ver. 1.07H or later *3 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later *4 I -ADP Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) FX

FX3GC PLC 3U -4AD-PT GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) J -ADP *2. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. FX 3U

*3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. -4AD-PTW *4. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

H-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

H-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the 3A-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C Ambient 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating FX 3U

temperature -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) when stored -4AD-ADP Relative humidity 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude (Hz) (m/s2) (mm) Tests 10 times in each D Vibration 10 to 57 - 0.035 direction (X-, Y-, and Z- FX DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 to 150 4.9 - axis directions) (Total: 3G 80 min, each) -2AD-BD 10 to 57 - 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 to 150 9.8 - *1 2 Shock resistance 147 m/s Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z E

Using noise simulator of: FX Noise resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz 3U -4DA Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter F Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) FX

Grounding *3 3U

-4DA-ADP Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude *4 < 2000m G

*1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. FX 3G

*2. If 3A-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. -1DA-BD *3. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment H

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding FX

Best condition Good condition Not allowed 3U -3A-ADP → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.5. *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the 3A-ADP. The 3A-ADP may malfunction. I -ADP FX

2.2 Power Supply Specifications 3U -4AD-PT

Item Specifications Conversion circuit driving 24V DC +20%-15%, 90mA power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power line to the terminal block.) J -ADP FX

5V DC, 20mA 3U Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series, it is not -4AD-PTW necessary to supply the power.)

H-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.3 Performance Specifications

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Number of input/ 2ch 1ch output points 4mA to 20mA DC Analog input/ 0V to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC 0V to 10V DC (External load: output range (Input resistance:198.7kΩ) (Input resistance:250Ω) (External load:5k to 1MΩ) 500Ω or less) Absolute -0.5V, -2mA, -- maximum input +15V +30mA Digital input/ 12 bits, binary output Resolution 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 5μA(16mA×1/3200) 2.5mV(10V×1/4000) 4μA(16mA×1/4000) Ambient ±0.5%(±50mV) ±0.5%(±80μA) ±0.5%(±50mV) ±0.5%(±80μA) temperature: for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale 25±5°C Ambient ±1.0%(±100mV) ±1.0%(±160μA) ±1.0%(±100mV) ±1.0%(±160μA) temperature: for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale 0 to 55°C If the external load resistance (Rs) is less than 5kΩ, the accuracy increases as shown in the Overall accuracy Overall Reference - - following formula: - (Increase: 100 mV per 1%) 47×100 -0.9(%) Rs+47

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 80μs for each selected input channel + 40μs for each selected output channel (Operation synchronized with sequence program) Time required for FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : conversion 90μs for each selected input channel + 50μs for each selected output channel (Operation synchronized with sequence program) → For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.

4080 3280 4000 3200 10V 20mA

I/O characteristics Analog output 4080 4080 20.4mA Digital output 10.2V Digital output 4mA Analog output 0 10V 0 4mA 20mA 0 4000 0 4000 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC. Insulation The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output area. method Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 points points occupied (This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

H-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.4 Conversion Time A 2.4 Conversion Time Common Items

This section describes the conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC B FX FX

1. Conversion and special data register update timing 3UC 3U -4AD A/D and D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. -4AD During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers. The PLC writes output setting data to special data registers, performs D/A conversion, and updates analog output values. C FX

FX3U-3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP 3U n'th 1st FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC -4AD-ADP

A/D conversion A/D,D/A conversion Sequence 80μ s for each start command program selected input D channel FX

Digital value writing 3G + D/A conversion -2AD-BD A/D conversion 40μ s for each Digital value reading 80μ s for each selected output selected input channel A/D,D/A conversion End instruction channel start command + D/A conversion Digital value writing E 40μ s for each FX Digital value reading 3U

selected output -4DA channel

2. Conversion during PLC STOP 1) A/D conversion F Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be FX 3U

updated. -4DA-ADP 2) D/A conversion If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device, the offset value will be output. If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP G will be latched. FX 3G

Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins. -1DA-BD 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected 1) A/D conversion During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the H

order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter). FX 3U

2) D/A conversion -3A-ADP During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter... 4th adapter). 4. Conversion speed (data update time) I -ADP 1) A/D conversion FX

During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of "80μs for each selected input channel", 3U and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. -4AD-PT END instruction execution time will be "80μs for each selected input channel × number of connected analog adapters." 2) D/A conversion J -ADP During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of "40μs for each selected output FX

channel", after which the analog data will be output. 3U END instruction execution time will be "40μs for each selected output channel × number of connected -4AD-PTW adapters."

H-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 2.4 Conversion Time

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

1. Conversion and special data register update timing A/D and D/A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers. The PLC writes output setting data to special data registers, performs D/A conversion, and updates analog output values. FX3U-3A-ADP FX3U-3A-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

A/D conversion A/D,D/A conversion Sequence 90μ s for each program selected input start command channel + Digital value writing D/A conversion A/D conversion 50μ s for each Digital value reading 90μ s for each selected output selected input channel A/D,D/A conversion End instruction channel start command + D/A conversion Digital value writing 50μ s for each selected output Digital value reading channel

2. Conversion during PLC STOP 1) A/D conversion Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 2) D/A conversion If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device, the offset value will be output. If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled, the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched. Just after power-on, however, the offset value will be output until operation begins. 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected 1) A/D conversion During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter). 2) D/A conversion During execution of the END instruction, data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D/A conversion and then output (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter). 4. Conversion speed (data update time) 1) A/D conversion During execution of END instruction, the A/D converted data of "90μs for each selected input channel", and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. END instruction execution time will be "90μs for each selected input channel × number of connected analog adapters." 2) D/A conversion During execution of END instruction, the output setting digital data per of "50μs for each selected output channel", after which the analog data will be output. END instruction execution time will be "50μs for each selected output channel × number of connected adapters."

H-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the 3A-ADP wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the 3A-ADP. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the 3A-ADP are arranged as follows:

Signal Application

24+ External power 24- Grounding terminal • Do not connect any lines. V1+ I1+ Channel 1 analog input COM1 V2+ I2+ Channel 2 analog input COM2 V0 I0 Analog output COM • Do not connect any lines. •

H-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable ends as shown below. 1. Cables B FX FX

following figure.) FX (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) 3G -2AD-BD *1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end E

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single-wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. FX

cannot protrude. FX

-1DA-BD 2.6mm 14mm (0.1") Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) H *3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 FX 3U

*4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 -3A-ADP 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right. I -ADP FX

(0.01") (0.09") -4AD-PTW Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4×2.5

H-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 3A-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an External power supply 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

3A-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series 3A-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +15V +15V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse

Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounded power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

3A-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +15V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

H-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.4 Analog Input / output Line A 3.4 Analog Input / output Line Common Items

3.4.1 Analog Input Line

For analog input, "voltage input" or "current input" can be selected for each channel. B FX FX

If current input is selected: 3A-ADP 3UC 3U Terminal -4AD -4AD block *1 110kΩ ch V + *2 250Ω I + COM C 88.7kΩ FX 3U

If voltage input is selected: -4AD-ADP

*1 110kΩ ch V + 250Ω I + COM D FX

88.7kΩ 3G Connection of external -2AD-BD power supply line +15V 24+ 24V DC 24- E FX 3U Class-D -4DA grounding V +,I +,ch : represents the channel number. *1. Use the 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines, and separate the analog input F lines from other power lines or inductive lines. FX 3U

*2. If "current input" is selected, be sure to short the line between the V+ terminal and the I+ terminal. -4DA-ADP (: Channel number).

3.4.2 Analog Output Line G FX

If voltage output is selected: 3A-ADP 3G Terminal -1DA-BD *1 block V0 I0 COM H

*2 Class-D grounding FX 3U -3A-ADP

If current output is selected: 3A-ADP Terminal *1 block V0 I -ADP I0 FX 3U

COM -4AD-PT *2 Class-D grounding

J -ADP *1. Use 2-core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines, and separate the analog output FX

lines from other power lines or inductive lines. 3U -4AD-PTW *2. Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side.

H-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 3.5 Grounding

3.5 Grounding

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

H-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data A Common Items

4. Programming

This chapter explains how to create programs for inputting and outputting analog data using the 3A-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 4.1 Loading/Writing of Conversion Data -4AD

Loading of A/D Conversion Data 1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the C FX

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. 3U -4AD-ADP 2) If the data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit. D

→ For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX 3G

Writing of D/A Conversion Data -2AD-BD 1) The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals. 2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the output mode can be specified. E 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically FX 3U

starting from the adapter nearest the main unit. -4DA → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2.

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Communic F FX 3U 3U 3U -ation 3U FX -3A FX -3A FX -3A FX -3A 3U special -ADP -ADP -ADP -ADP *1 -4DA-ADP adapter FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

A/D Special auxiliary relays: M8260 to M8269 or G

Special data registers: FX

D/A D8260 to D8269 3G -1DA-BD

A/D Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 or Special data registers: D/A D8270 to D8279 Sequence program H A/D Special auxiliary relays: FX

M8280 to M8289 3U or

Special data registers: -3A-ADP D/A D8280 to D8289.

Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8290 to M8299 or Special data registers: D/A D8290 to D8299 I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. However, in this case, do not include the high- speed input/output special adapter, communication special adapter, and the CF card special adapter. *1. An expansion board is required to connect the FX3U-3A-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC. J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.2 List of Special Devices

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Communi- cation FX3U-3A special FX3U-3A *2 -ADP adapter -ADP FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC 2nd*1 1st Special devices Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8280 to M8289 or Special data registers: D/A D8280 to D8289. Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8290 to M8299 or Special data registers: D/A D8290 to D8299.

The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. In this case, however, do not include the connecter conversion adapter and the communication special adapter. *1. The second special adapter is not available in the 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC main unit. *2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-3A-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC.

4.2 List of Special Devices

If the 3A-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Switches the input mode of M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 R/W channel 1 Section 4.3 Switches the input mode of M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W channel 2 M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.4 M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Unused (Do not use.) - - Special auxiliary M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of output relay M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 R/W Section 4.5 holding function. Sets whether or not input M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 R/W channel 1 is used. Sets whether or not input M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298 R/W Section 4.6 channel 2 is used. Sets whether or not output M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 R/W channel is used. D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R Section 4.7 D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel-2 input data R D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data R/W Section 4.8 D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Unused (Do not use.) - - Averaging time for channel-1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Section 4.9 Averaging time for channel-2 register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Unused (Do not use.) - - D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.10 D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 50 R Section 4.11

H-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.3 Switching of Input Mode A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R/W Section 4.3 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R/W B FX FX

M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode. R/W Section 4.4 3UC 3U -4AD M8283 to M8293 to -4AD Unused (Do not use.) - - M8285 M8296 Special Sets the cancel of output holding M8286 M8296 R/W Section 4.5 auxiliary function. relay Sets whether or not the input channel 1 C M8287 M8297 R/W FX

is used. 3U Sets whether or not the input channel 2 -4AD-ADP M8288 M8298 R/W Section 4.6 is used. Sets whether or not the output channel M8289 M8299 R/W is used. D8280 D8290 Channel-1 input data R D Section 4.7 FX

D8281 D8291 Channel-2 input data R 3G D8282 D8292 Output setting data R/W Section 4.8 -2AD-BD D8283 D8293 Unused (Do not use.) - - Averaging time for channel-1 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Section 4.9 E

Averaging time for channel-2 FX register D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) 3U -4DA D8286 D8296 Unused (Do not use.) - - D8287 D8297 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.10 D8289 D8299 Model code = 50 R Section 4.11 F FX 3U 4.3 Switching of Input Mode -4DA-ADP

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the input mode of 3A-ADP between the current input mode and the voltage input mode. To switch the input mode, use the following special auxiliary relays: G FX

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3G -1DA-BD Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF:Voltage input M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON :Current input H FX

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC 3U -3A-ADP Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF:Voltage input I -ADP M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON :Current input FX 3U -4AD-PT 1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) To switch the channel input mode, create a sequence program as follows: 1) To switch the input mode of channel 2) To switch the input mode of channel 2 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to of the 1st analog special adapter to the J -ADP the voltage input mode: current input mode: FX

M8001 M8000 3U M8260 M8261 -4AD-PTW Normally OFF Normally ON

H-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.4 Switching of Output Mode

4.4 Switching of Output Mode

Turn the special auxiliary relay on/off to switch the output mode of 3A-ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode. To switch the output mode, use the following special auxiliary relays: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th OFF:Voltage output M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode ON :Current output

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd OFF:Voltage output M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode ON :Current output

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) To switch the output mode of a channel, create a sequence program as follows: 1) To switch the channel output mode of channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the voltage output mode: M8001 M8262 Normally OFF

4.5 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd OFF: Holds the analog data output Cancel output holding just before stop of the PLC. M8286 M8296 function setting ON : Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel, create a sequence program as follows:

1) To set the output holding function for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8266 Normally OFF

H-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used A 4.6 Setting whether or not a channel is used Common Items

The 3A-ADP sets to ON or OFF special auxiliary relays to set whether or not each channel is used. This setting can be used to disable or enable the input or output channels of the 3A-ADP. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs B FX Special auxiliary relay FX

Description 3UC 3U

1st 2nd 3rd 4th -4AD -4AD Sets whether or not input M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 channel 1 is used. Sets whether or not input OFF: Channel is used. M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298 channel 2 is used. ON: Channel is not used. C Sets whether or not output FX

M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 3U channel is used. -4AD-ADP

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd D

Sets whether or not input FX M8287 M8297 channel 1 is used. 3G -2AD-BD Sets whether or not input OFF: Channel is used. M8288 M8298 channel 2 is used. ON: Channel is not used. Sets whether or not output M8289 M8299 channel is used. E FX

POINT 3U When the setting whether or not the output channel is used is changed from "Used (OFF)" to "Not used (ON)", -4DA the last output before the change is held.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs) Set whether or not each channel is used in a sequence program. F FX

1) To set that input channel 2 in the 1st unit 3U

is not used: -4DA-ADP M8001 M8268 Normally OFF G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.7 Input Data

4.7 Input Data

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) The data converted by the 3A-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 input data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 input data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 input data

The converted A/D immediate data or averaged data (data average conforming to the specified averaging time) will be stored in the above data registers as the input data. When the channel is not used, "0" will be stored. → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.9. 1. Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only. Do not change (rewrite) the input data using sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the programming tool.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 Stores the channel-1 input data FNC 12 D8260 D100 of the 1st analog special adapter MOV Normally in the D100. ON Stores the channel-2 input data FNC 12 D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter MOV in the D101

Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer/counter set value or in a PID instruction.

H-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.8 Output Setting Data A 4.8 Output Setting Data Common Items

Numeric data type: Decimal (K) The 3A-ADP performs D/A conversion on the output setting data (digital data) into analog data, and outputs the analog data. Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data: B FX FX

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data C FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC FX 3U

Special data register -4AD-ADP Description 1st 2nd D8282 D8292 Output setting data D

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) FX 3G

M8000 Performs D/A conversion using the digital -2AD-BD FNC 12 D102 D8262 data stored in the D102 of the 1st analog MOV Normally ON special adapter. Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be output as analog data) in D102. E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.9 Averaging Time

4.9 Averaging Time

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) If the averaging time is set for the 3A-ADP, the average data will be stored as the input data. The averaging time can be set for each channel. Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 Sets the averaging time for FNC 12 K1 D8264 channel-1 of the 1st analog MOV special adapter to 1. Normally ON Sets the averaging time for FNC 12 K5 D8265 channel-2 of the 1st analog MOV special adapter to 5.

H-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.10 Error Status A 4.10 Error Status Common Items

If an error is detected in the 3A-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC B FX FX

Special auxiliary relay 3UC 3U -4AD

Description -4AD 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data. FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC C Special data register FX Description 3U

1st 2nd -4AD-ADP D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error. D

Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors. FX

→ For a detailed description of the error status, refer to Section 6.5. 3G -2AD-BD Bit Description Bit Description 3A-ADP hardware error b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6 (Power supply error included)*1 *2 E b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 3A-ADP communication data error FX 3U

b2 Output data setting error b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*3 -4DA b3 Unused b9 Channel-2 under-scale detection*3 b4 EEPROM error b10 to b15 Unused b5 Averaging time setting error - - F *1. A 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) is valid only when the use of analog input is set. FX 3U

Detection of power supply error is valid only when the use of analog input channel 2 is set. -4DA-ADP *2. A 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is valid only when the use of analog input is set. *3. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver.2.70 or later supports the under-scale detection function. The under- scale detection function is valid only for current input mode. The FX3G and FX3GC are not supported. G FX 3G

1. Caution regarding use of error status data -1DA-BD If a 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) or 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC H FX

M8000 3U -3A-ADP FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 Normally ON MOV M8002 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special adapter RST M6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse I -ADP *1 FX RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog status register 3U

b7 = OFF (communication data error) -4AD-PT

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV

3G 3GC J -ADP *1. "1st" for the FX , FX PLC. FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.10 Error Status

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog status register b7 = OFF (communication data error)

2. Program Example 1 (FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC) M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV M0 Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of the 3rd *1 adapter. M1 Y001 Detects over-scale in channel 2 of the 3rd *1 adapter.

M2 *1 Y002 Output data setting error of the 3rd adapter.

M4 Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd *1 adapter

M5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd *1 adapter M6 Y006 3A-ADP hardware error in 3rd *1 adapter

M7 *1 Y007 3A-ADP communication data error in 3rd adapter

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

3. Program Example 2 (FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) D8268.0 Y000 Detects over-scale in channel 1 of the 1st adapter. D8268.1 Y001 Detects over-scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter.

D8268.2 Y002 Output data setting error of the 1st adapter. D8268.4 Y004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter

D8268.5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter

D8268.6 Y006 3A-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter

D8268.7 Y007 3A-ADP communication data error in 1st adapter

H-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.11 Model Code A 4.11 Model Code Common Items

Initial value: K50 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the 3A-ADP is connected, model code "50" is stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: B FX FX

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code C FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC FX 3U

Special data register -4AD-ADP Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code D Use the special data registers above to check whether a 3A-ADP is connected or not. FX 3G -2AD-BD

1. Program Example (FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

FNC224 D8289 K50 Y007 Checks the model code of the 1st LD = analog special adapter E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.12 Basic Program Example

4.12 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to input/output analog conversion data. FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd*1 adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data into D101. The program also sets "voltage output" for output channels, and sets the D/A conversion output to D102.

M8001 Set the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage M8280 Normally OFF input mode (0 V to 10 V). M8000 M8281 Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current Normally ON input mode (4 mA to 20 mA). M8001 Set the output mode to the voltage output mode M8282 Normally (0 V to 10 V). OFF M8286 Set the output holding function.

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV

M8002 RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF Initial pulse RST M7 Error status: b7 = OFF

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8000 FNC 12 K5 D8284 Set the averaging time to "5" for channel-1 data. MOV

FNC 12 K5 D8285 Set the averaging time to "5" for channel-2 data. MOV M8000 Stores the A/D converted channel-1 digital data FNC 12 D8280 D100 MOV into D100.

FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the A/D converted channel-2 digital data MOV into D101. M8000 FNC 12 D102 D8282 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data MOV stored in D102.

Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction. Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be output as analog data) in D102. *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

H-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 4.12 Basic Program Example A FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Common Items The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode, and will store the converted A/D value of channel-1 data into D100 and that of channel-2 data into D101. The program will also set "voltage output" for output channels, and set the digital D/A conversion output to D102. M8001 B FX M8260 Set the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage FX

Normally OFF input mode (0 V to 10 V). 3UC 3U -4AD

M8000 -4AD M8261 Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current Normally ON input mode (4 mA to 20 mA). M8001 M8262 Set the output mode to the voltage output mode Normally (0 V to 10 V). C

OFF FX

M8266 Set the output holding function. 3U -4AD-ADP

M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF Initial pulse RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF D FX

M8000 3G FNC 12 K5 D8264 Set the averaging time to "5" for channel-1 data. -2AD-BD MOV

FNC 12 K5 D8265 Set the averaging time to "5" for channel-2 data. MOV M8000 E FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the A/D converted channel-1 digital data FX MOV into D100. 3U -4DA

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the A/D converted channel-2 digital data MOV into D101. M8000 FNC 12 D102 D8262 Performs D/A conversion with the digital data MOV stored in D102. F FX 3U

Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101, the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used -4DA-ADP in the timer/counter setting value or in a PID instruction. Using the indicator or the sequence program, input the digital data to be subject to D/A conversion (to be output as analog data) in D102. G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

5. Changing of Input/output Characteristics

Use the scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259) for the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC to change the input/output characteristics. FX3G/FX3GC Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction. Use sequence programs to change the input/output characteristics. → For a detailed description of scaling instruction, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition.

5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

2000 to output Digital be calculated (D110)

400

0 X-axis 1V 5V 10V 0 400(1V) 2000(5V) Analog input Digital value actually obtained by A/D conversion

H-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics A 2. Example of program 1 (FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) Common Items For example, create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode (0 V to 10 V) M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status: b6 = OFF B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD RST D8268.7 Error status: b7 = OFF -4AD

M8000 FNC 12 K1 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 data MOV C M8002 FX FNC 12 K2 D50 Program for setting scaling instruction data table 3U MOV -4AD-ADP Item Description Value Device FNC 12 K400 D51 Number of points Sets the number of points 2 D50 MOV X- A/D converted digital value 400 D51 Start coordinate start point data FNC 12 K0 D52 point Y- Digital output value of changed D MOV coordinate X-axis value start point 0 D52 FX X- A/D converted digital value end 3G FNC 12 2000 D53 -2AD-BD K2000 D53 coordinate point data MOV End point Y- Digital output value of changed 10000 coordinate X-axis value end point D54 FNC 12 K10000 D54 MOV M8000 E FNC259 D8260 D50 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100. FX

SCL 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.1 Example: Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics

3. Example of program 2 (FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital input data (D110) of the 1st analog special adapter: M8001 M8280 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode M8000 (0V to 10V). FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV M8002 RST M6 Error status: b6 = OFF

RST M7 Error status: b7 = OFF

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8000 FNC 12 Sets the averaging scaling to "1" K1 D8284 MOV for the channel-1 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D110 MOV

Check to make sure the digital FNC230 D110 K400 FNC237 D110 K2000 M10 LD>= AND<= value (D110) is in range. M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 SUB Calculation for changing input FNC 22 D111 K10000 D112 characteristics. MUL Stores the operation result in D100.

FNC 23 D112 K1600 D100 DDIV

4. Cautions regarding programming GX Developer version 8.13P or later supports scaling instruction (SCL/FNC259). If the A/D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the scaling instruction (SCL/ FNC259), the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error (error code: K6706).

H-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics A 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics Common Items

Voltage output characteristics Digital value characteristics -4AD (product specifications) to be changed -4AD 10V Y-axis C FX 3U

5V 2000 -4AD-ADP Analog output

Specified digital output value to be actually subject to D/A conversion (5V)

1V 400 (1V) D

X-axis FX 0 400 2000 4000 0

10000 3G Digital value input

Desired digital value (D120) -2AD-BD

2. Example of program 1 (FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter.

M8001 E M8262 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output FX 3U

Normally mode. -4DA OFF M8266 Sets the output holding function for channel 1.

M8002 FNC 12 Program for setting scaling instruction data table F

K2 D50 FX MOV Item Description Value Device 3U Number of points Sets the number of points. 2 D50 -4DA-ADP FNC 12 K0 D51 MOV X- Digital value of specified 0 D51 Start coordinate start point on X-axis FNC 12 point Y- Digital value of desired D/A K400 D52 400 D52 MOV coordinate conversion start point G X- Digital value of specified end 10000 D53 FX FNC 12 coordinate K10000 D53 End point on X-axis 3G

MOV point -1DA-BD Y- Digital value of desired D/A 2000 coordinate conversion end point D54 FNC 12 K2000 D54 MOV M8000 FNC259 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored D120 D50 D8262 in the D8262. H

SCL FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-33 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input/output Characteristics FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 5.2 Example: Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics

3. Example of program 2 (FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC) For example, create the following program to change the digital output data (D120) of the 1st analog special adapter.

M8001 Sets the output mode to the voltage M8282 output mode. Normally OFF M8286 Sets the output holding function.

FNC230 D120 K0 FNC237 D120 K10000 M20 Check to make sure the digital LD>= AND<= value (D120) is in range. M20 FNC 22 D120 K1600 D121 MUL

FNC 23 D121 K10000 D123 DDIV Calculation for changing output characteristics. FNC 20 D123 K400 D127 Stores the operation result in D8282. ADD

FNC 12 D127 D8282 MOV

H-34 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

6. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses. B FX Refer to the following items when conversion data is not input or output, or when proper digital values are not FX 3UC 3U

input or output. -4AD -4AD PLC version number Installation Wiring C Special devices FX 3U

Programs -4AD-ADP Error status

6.1 PLC Version Number Check D FX 3G

Check the version number of the FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC. The version number should be 2.61 or later. -2AD-BD Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC. The version number should be 1.20 or later. Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. E FX

6.2 Wiring Check 3U -4DA

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power The 3A-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the F FX

POWER indicator lamp of the 3A-ADP is on. 3U -4DA-ADP 2. Analog input/output line Use 2-core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input/output line. In addition, be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines. G

3. Use of current input mode FX

To use the current input mode for a channel, be sure to shortcircuit the line between the V+ terminal and the 3G I+terminal (: channel number) of the channel. If the line is not shortcircuited, data will not be converted -1DA-BD into proper digital data. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. H 6.3 Special Device Check FX 3U -3A-ADP Check whether the special devices for the 3A-ADP are being used correctly: 1. Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly. Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode. Turn on the device to set the input mode I -ADP FX

to the current input mode. 3U -4AD-PT 2. Output mode switching Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set. Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode. Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode. J -ADP FX

3. Input data 3U Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be -4AD-PTW selected depending on the connecting position and the channel.

H-35 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.4 Program Check

4. Output setting data Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel. 5. Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. 6. Setting whether or not each channel is used Check whether each channel is set correctly. Set a channel to OFF when using it. Set a channel to ON when not using it. 7. Error status Check that no error is detected in the 3A-ADP. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

6.4 Program Check

6.5 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the 3A-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn ON. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description 3A-ADP hardware error b0 Channel-1 over-scale detection b6 (Power supply error included)*1 b1 Channel-2 over-scale detection b7 3A-ADP communication data error*2 b2 Output data setting error b8 Channel-1 under-scale detection*3 b3 Unused b9 Channel-2 under-scale detection*3 b4 EEPROM error b10 to b15 Unused b5 Averaging time setting error - - *1. 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) is valid only when use of analog input is set. Detection of power supply error is valid only when use of the analog input channel 2 is set. *2. 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) is valid only when use of analog input is set. *3. The FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.70 or later supports the under-scale detection function. The under-scale detection function is valid only for current input mode. The FX3G and FX3GC are not supported.

H-36 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check A To solve the problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: Common Items 1. Over-scale detection (b0, b1) 1) Description of error The input analog value (voltage or current value) is outside the specified range. Voltage input mode : The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10.2 V. B FX Current input mode : The input current value is over the specified upper limit of 20.4 mA. FX 3UC 3U

2) Remedy -4AD Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring. -4AD 2. Output data setting error (b2) 1) Description of error C

The specified digital value is outside the specified range. FX

Analog data will not be correctly output. 3U -4AD-ADP 2) Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range. 3. EEPROM error (b4) D

1) Description of error FX The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out 3G properly or has been destroyed. -2AD-BD 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 4. Averaging time setting error (b5) E FX

1) Description of error 3U -4DA The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 2) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel. 5. 3A-ADP hardware error (b6) F FX

1) Description of error 3U -4DA-ADP The 3A-ADP is not operating properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 3A-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi G

Electric distributor office. FX 3G

6. 3A-ADP communication data error (b7) -1DA-BD 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the 3A-ADP and the PLC. 2) Remedy H

Check that the 3A-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. FX

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi 3U Electric distributor office. -3A-ADP 7. Under-scale detection (b8, b9) 1) Description of error The input analog value (current value) is below the specified lower limit. I -ADP FX

This error is only detected for the current input mode, and indicates the input current is less than 2 mA. 3U 2) Remedy -4AD-PT Check that the input analog value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

H-37 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U-3A-ADP (2-channel Analog Input, 1-channel Analog Output) 6.5 Error Status Check

MEMO

H-38 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] I. FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance D FX

Thermometer Data Input) 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP special adapter (4-channel platinum resistance thermometer input) and should be read and understood before I -ADP attempting to install or use the unit. FX Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward 3U -4AD-PT it to the end user.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property J -ADP rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. FX 3U

I-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

I-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (referred to as PT-ADP). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

The FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC/ FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4-channel platinum resistance thermometers. C 1) Up to 4 PT-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. FX *1 3U Up to 2 PT-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. -4AD-ADP (including other analog special adapters) 2) After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100), measurement of temperature will be possible. 3) The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3U/ D FX

FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. 3G -2AD-BD

System Point and section to be referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum *1 Number of connectable FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2 maximum E (including other analog special adapters) units FX

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC 3U

Series PLC -4DA

To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3. + + F FX 3U -4DA-ADP Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board*2 adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed description of wiring, Analog data refer to Chapter 3. G Platinum resistance thermometer FX sensor(Pt100) 3G -1DA-BD

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description Description Special devices of special devices, refer to H

Chapter 4. FX Measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269*3 Transfer direction 3U temperature For a detailed description 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279*3 of a basic program, refer to -3A-ADP Setting of temperature Section 4.8. unit 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units I -ADP and to configure the entire system. FX 3U

*1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type). -4AD-PT

*2. The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC. For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used. *3. FX3G and FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. J -ADP 1st adapter : M/D8280 to M/D8289 FX

2nd adapter : M/D8290 to M/D8299 3U

3rd and 4th adapters : Cannot be connected -4AD-PTW

I-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the PT-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: •Compatible PLC version number •Compatible programming tool version Refer to Chapter 2. number Specifications check Specifications: •Operation environment •Performance specifications Refer to the common •Input characteristics pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) Refer to Chapter 3. •Selection of units Wiring Wiring: •Power supply line •Platinum resistance thermometer Refer to Chapter 4. sensor line Programming Programming: •Details of special devices •Examples of basic programs

If the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 5 "Troubleshooting."

I-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number A 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number Common Items

PT-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 3UC 3U -4AD FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) 1. Version check C

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version. FX

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PT-ADP of the FX3G/ FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. E FX

Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to 3U each PLC version. -4DA It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting "FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC. F FX

1. Japanese versions 3U -4DA-ADP

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC G SWDNC-GXW2-J FX 3G

GX Developer -1DA-BD Ver. 8.13P or later *1 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) FX3G PLC H GX Works2 *2 FX

Ver. 1.07H or later 3U SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC -3A-ADP GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*3 (Offline mode) I -ADP FX3GC PLC FX

GX Works2 3U Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC -4AD-PT SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) *1. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. J -ADP *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. FX 3U

*3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. -4AD-PTW

I-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

I-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PT-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

Tested 10 times in each 3G

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working G

Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts FX environment 3G -1DA-BD Working *4 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If PT-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H *3. FX Other Other Other 3U PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment -3A-ADP

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.6. FX 3U

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PT-ADP. -4AD-PT The PT-ADP may malfunction.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

Items Specification A/D conversion circuit 24V DC +20% -15%, 50mA driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block.) 5V DC, 15mA Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not necessary to supply the power.)

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Items Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor Input signal Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997 Rated temperature -50°C to +250°C-58°F to +482°F range Digital output -500 to +2500 -580 to +4820 Resolution 0.1°C 0.18°F ±0.5% for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5°C) Total accuracy ±1.0% for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55°C) FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) A/D conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time →For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.

+2550 +4910 +2500 +4820 C F ° Input ° characteristics +255 ° -50°C 0 -58 F 0 +491 ° C +250 C ° F +482 F ° °

-55 -580

-500 -67 -550 -670

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input Insulation method area. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 points points occupied (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

I-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time A 2.4 A/D Conversion Time Common Items

This section describes the A/D conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC B FX FX

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC C

n'th 1st FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command D

conversion FX

Digital value reading 3G

200μs/4ch -2AD-BD A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200μs/4ch E FX 3U -4DA 2. A/D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected F During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of FX 3U

1st adapter → 2nd adapter … 4th adapter). -4DA-ADP 4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200μs, and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. G

END instruction execution time will be "200μs × number of connected adapters." FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch

2. A/D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 3. If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter). 4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250μs, and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. END instruction execution time will be "250μs × number of connected adapters."

2.5 Temperature Measurement

To stabilize the temperature measurement, warm-up the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.

I-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the PT-ADP wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the PT-ADP. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the PT-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4AD-PT -ADP

POWER

Signal Application

24+ 24+ External power 24- 24- Ground terminal

L1+ L1+ Channel-1 platinum

L1- L1- resistance thermometer I1- I1- sensor input L2+ L2+ Channel-2 platinum L2- L2- resistance thermometer I2- I2- sensor input L3+ L3+ Channel-3 platinum

L3- L3- resistance thermometer sensor input I3- I3-

L4+ L4+ Channel-4 platinum

L4- L4- resistance thermometer sensor input I4- I4-

I-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below. To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor, use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable. B FX 1. Cables FX 3UC 3U

Applicable cable and tightening torque -4AD -4AD Wire size Tightening Termination (stranded/single-wire) torque 2 2 To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable Single-wire 0.3mm to 0.5mm (AWG22 to 20) and then twist the core before connection. C To connect a single-wire cable, just strip the cover off the FX 2-wire 2 3U 0.3mm (AWG22) cable before connection. -4AD-ADP 0.22 to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod 2 2 0.3mm to 0.5mm 0.25 N•m (recommended terminal) terminal (AWG22 to 20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact with (Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool insulation external view shown in D CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact FX sleeve the following figure.) 3G (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact) -2AD-BD *1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable ends E FX

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. 3U

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N•m. -4DA Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" F FX

cannot protrude. 3U

- Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. -4DA-ADP 9mm (0.35") To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve: If the cable sheath is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area (Crimp area) G

the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while FX

referring to the external view. 3G 8mm (0.31") -1DA-BD 2.6mm 14mm Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.1") (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) H FX

*3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 3U -3A-ADP *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in I -ADP the figure to the right. FX 3U

Note: -4AD-PT If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not The head be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque should be shown in the table above, use the following screwdriver or an straight. appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")). J -ADP FX

0.4mm 2.5mm 3U

Manufacturer Type -4AD-PTW (0.01") (0.09") Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4 × 2.5

I-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PT-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an external power 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

PT-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PT-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +5V +5V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse

Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

PT-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +5V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit.

I-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor A 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Common Items

Select the Pt100 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor. This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area, and will ensure accurate measurement. B FX FX

3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

PT-ADP +5V C Twisted shielded Terminal 4.7kΩ 4.7kΩ FX Pt100 cable*1 block 3U 100kΩ ch -4AD-ADP L+ L- I- 100kΩ

+5V D Shield FX 3G

Twisted shielded 4.7kΩ 4.7kΩ -2AD-BD Pt100 cable*1 100kΩ ch L+ L- 100kΩ I- E FX 3U

+5V -4DA

24+ 24V DC 24- F FX

Class-D grounding 3U -4DA-ADP L+, L-, I-, ch: represents the channel number.

*1. Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise (of the commercial power, etc.). G FX 3G -1DA-BD 3.6 Grounding

Grounding should be performed as stated below. H

The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. FX 3U

Independent grounding should be performed for best results. -3A-ADP When independent grounding is not performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following figure. → For details, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC Series.

PLC Other PLC Other PLC Other I -ADP equipment equipment equipment FX 3U -4AD-PT Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

2 The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm ). J -ADP The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible. FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PT-ADP.

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. 2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special FX3U-4AD -PT-ADP -PT-ADP -PT-ADP adapter -PT-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC*1

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8260 to M8269 Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 A/D Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8280 to M8289 Special data registers: D8280 to D8289

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

I-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special -PT-ADP -PT-ADP adapter FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2

*1 1st 2nd Special devices B FX FX

Special auxiliary relays: 3UC 3U -4AD

M8280 to M8289 -4AD A/D Special data registers: D8280 to D8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D C Special data registers: FX

D8290 to D8299 3U -4AD-ADP

*1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). FX *2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP to the FX3G Series 3G -2AD-BD PLC.

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If the PT-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W Special 4.3 auxiliary M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 to relay Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section Channel-3 temperature 4.4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R measurement data Channel-4 temperature D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Averaging time for channel 2 register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section Averaging time for channel 3 4.5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.6 Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 20 R 4.7

I-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items R: Read / W: Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W Section 4.3 Special auxiliary relay B FX M8281 to M8291 to FX Unused (Do not use.) - -

M8289 M8299 3UC 3U -4AD

Channel-1 temperature -4AD D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section 4.4 Channel-3 temperature C D8282 D8292 R FX

measurement data 3U Channel-4 temperature -4AD-ADP D8283 D8293 R measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 D8284 D8294 R/W Special data register (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 2 D D8285 D8295 R/W FX

(Setting range: 1 to 4095) 3G

Section 4.5 -2AD-BD Averaging time for channel 3 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.6 E FX

D8289 D8299 Model code = 20 R Section 4.7 3U -4DA

4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

To switch the temperature unit of the PT-ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit (°F) or OFF F FX

for Centigrade (°C). 3U

To switch the temperature unit, use the following special auxiliary relays: -4DA-ADP FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th G FX

Selection of temperature unit: 3G M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) -1DA-BD ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC H FX 3U

Special auxiliary relay -3A-ADP Description 1st 2nd Selection of temperature unit: M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F) I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT 1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

1) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (°C) 2) To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit (°F) for the 1st adapter: for the 2nd adapter: M8001 M8000 J -ADP M8260 M8270 FX

Normally OFF Normally ON 3U -4AD-PTW

I-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Temperature Measurement

4.4 Temperature Measurement

The temperature data input in the PT-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data. D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data. D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel-3 temperature measurement data. D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel-4 temperature measurement data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data. D8281 D8291 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data. D8282 D8292 Stores the channel-3 temperature measurement data. D8283 D8293 Stores the channel-4 temperature measurement data.

The immediate data or the average data (data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time) will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data. → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.6. 1. Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data are for reading only. Do not change (rewrite) the current data using the sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the programming tool.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100. Normally ON

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101, the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

I-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Averaging Time A 4.5 Averaging Time Common Items

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) If the averaging time is set for the PT-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the B FX FX

D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set for 3UC 3U -4AD

each channel. -4AD Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register C Description FX

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 3U -4AD-ADP D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data D FX 3G -2AD-BD FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd E D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data FX 3U

D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data -4DA D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data F

1. Cautions regarding averaging time setting FX

If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement 3U -4DA-ADP special data register. If the averaging time is set to "2" or more, the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register. G After turning the PLC power on, the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special FX 3G

data registers (D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293) until the number -1DA-BD of data items is increased to the set averaging time. Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, the error signal will be output. If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1". H FX

If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096". 3U

→ For a detailed description of error status, refer to Section 5.5 -3A-ADP

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 K1 D8264 data of the 1st analog special adapter. I -ADP MOV FX Normally ON 3U -4AD-PT FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "5" for the channel-2 K5 D8265 data of the 1st analog special adapter. MOV J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status

4.6 Error Status

If an error is detected in the PT-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data b0 of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - -

1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a PT-ADP hardware error (b6) or PT-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV Normally ON

M8002 *1 RST M6 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

*1 RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error)

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

I-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status A For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Common Items

M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

Error status of 1st analog special adapter B FX RST D8268.7 FX b7 = OFF (communication data error) 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD 2. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 C MOV FX 3U -4AD-ADP M0 Y000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M1 Y001 The temperature measurement data D of channel 2 is outside the specified FX range, or disconnection is detected. 3G M2 -2AD-BD Y002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M3 Y003 The temperature measurement data E

of channel 4 is outside the specified FX

range, or disconnection is detected. 3U M4 -4DA Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd*1 adapter

M5 *1 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd F

adapter FX 3U

M6 -4DA-ADP Y006 PT-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1 adapter

M7 PT-ADP communication data error in Y007 *1 G

3rd adapter FX 3G -1DA-BD *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status

3. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.0 Y000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. D8268.1 Y001 The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. D8268.2 Y002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. D8268.3 Y003 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. D8268.4 Y004 EEPROM error in 1st adapter

D8268.5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter

D8268.6 Y006 PT-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter

D8268.7 Y007 PT-ADP communication data error in 1st adapter

I-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Model Code A 4.7 Model Code Common Items

Initial value: K20 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the PT-ADP is connected, model code "20" will be stored in the corresponding special data register. B FX The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: FX 3UC 3U

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -4AD -4AD

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code C FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D D8289 D8299 Model code FX 3G -2AD-BD

Use the special data registers above to check whether PT-ADP is connected or not.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) E FNC224 D8269 K20 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st FX LD = analog special adapter. 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example

4.8 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data. For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd*1 adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for channel 1, and "5" for channel 2.

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV

M8002 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special RST M6 adapter Initial b6 = OFF (hardware error) pulse *1 RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error) FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8001 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade M8280 (°C). M8002 Sets the averaging time to "1" for FNC 12 K1 D8284 MOV channel-1 data.

FNC 12 K5 D8285 Sets the averaging time to "5" for MOV channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D100 Stores the current value of the channel-1 MOV temperature measurement data in the D100.

FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the average value of the channel-2 MOV temperature measurement data in the D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data register D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction. *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC. For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for channel 1, and "5" for channel 2.

M8002 Error status of 1st analog special RST D8268.6 adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error)

RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error) M8001 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade M8260 (°C). M8002 Sets the averaging time to "1" for FNC 12 K1 D8264 MOV channel-1 data.

FNC 12 K5 D8265 Sets the averaging time to "5" for MOV channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the current value of the channel-1 MOV temperature measurement data in the D100.

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the average value of the channel-2 MOV temperature measurement data in the D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data register D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

I-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

5. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. B FX If the temperature measurement data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following FX 3UC 3U

items: -4AD -4AD Version number of the PLC Wiring Special devices C Programs FX 3U

Error status -4AD-ADP

5.1 PLC Version Number Check D Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. FX 3G

Check the version number of the FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later. -2AD-BD Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. E FX 3U

5.2 Wiring Check -4DA

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power F

The PT-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the FX

POWER indicator lamp of the PT-ADP is on. 3U -4DA-ADP 2. Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX

5.3 Special Device Check 3G -1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the PT-ADP are correctly used: 1. Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be H FX

selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. 3U -3A-ADP 2. Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. I -ADP 3. Error status FX

Check that no error is detected in the PT-ADP. 3U -4AD-PT If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check

5.4 Program Check

Check the following items for the program: 1. Cancellation of error status at power-on When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (b6 and b7 should turn off) using the program. 2. Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs.

5.5 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the PT-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of b0 channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - - To solve a problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range. The temperature measurement value is not in the range between -55°C to 255°C. Or the line between PT-ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected. 2) Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring condition. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel.

I-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check A 4. PT-ADP hardware error (b6) Common Items 1) Description of error The PT-ADP does not operate properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PT-ADP. Also check that the PT-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. B FX FX

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi 3UC 3U -4AD

Electric distributor office. -4AD 5. PT-ADP communication data error (b7) 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the PT-ADP and the PLC. C FX

2) Remedy 3U

Check that the PT-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. -4AD-ADP If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

I-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check

MEMO

I-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) A Common Items

B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable C

Controllers FX 3U -4AD-ADP User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] J. FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP D FX

(4-channel Platinum Resistance 3G Thermometer Data Input) -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

Foreword This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP special I -ADP adapter (4-channel platinum resistance thermometer input) and should be read and understood before FX

attempting to install or use the unit. 3U Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward -4AD-PT it to the end user.

J-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

J-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions A Common Items

1. Outline

This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (referred to as PTW-ADP). B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD

The FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP to the FX3U/ FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4-channel platinum resistance C

thermometers. FX

1) Up to 4 PTW-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. 3U -4AD-ADP *1 Up to 2 PTW-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. (including other analog special adapters) 2) After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100), measurement of temperature will be possible. D FX

3) The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3U/ 3G

FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. -2AD-BD

System Point and section to be referred to FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum E *1 Number of connectable FX FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2 maximum (including other analog special adapters) units 3U

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC -4DA Series PLC

To check the connectable PLC model number, refer to Section 1.3. + + F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board*2 adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed description of wiring, Analog data refer to Chapter 3. G FX

Platinum resistance thermometer 3G sensor(Pt100) -1DA-BD

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description H

Description of special devices, refer to FX Special devices Chapter 4. Measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269*3 3U Transfer direction -3A-ADP temperature For a detailed description 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279*3 of a basic program, refer to Setting of temperature Section 4.8. unit 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3 I -ADP Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units FX

and to configure the entire system. 3U -4AD-PT *1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).

*2. The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3GC/FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) Series PLC. For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used.

*3. FX3G and FX3GC PLCs use the following special devices. J -ADP FX

1st adapter : M/D8280 to M/D8289 3U

2nd adapter : M/D8290 to M/D8299 -4AD-PTW 3rd and 4th adapters : Cannot be connected

J-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using the PTW-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

If the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 5 "Troubleshooting."

J-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number A 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number Common Items

PTW-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) B FX FX

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 3UC 3U -4AD FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product) -4AD

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) 1. Version check C

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version. FX

Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PTW-ADP of the FX3G/ FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. E FX

1. Japanese versions 3U -4DA-ADP

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC G SWDNC-GXW2-J FX 3G

*3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30. -4AD-PTW

J-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

J-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications A Common Items

2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PTW-ADP. B FX FX 3UC 3U -4AD 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD

Item Specifications C FX

Tested 10 times in each 3G

Insulation 5MΩ or more using 500V DC -4DA-ADP resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working G

Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts FX environment 3G -1DA-BD Working *4 altitude < 2000m *1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If PTW-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. H *3. FX Other Other Other 3U PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment -3A-ADP

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed I -ADP → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.6. FX 3U

*4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PTW-ADP. -4AD-PT The PTW-ADP may malfunction.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Items Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor Input signal Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997 Rated temperature -100°C to +600°C-148°F to +1112°F range Digital output -1000 to +6000 -1480 to +11120 Resolution 0.2°C to 0.3°C 0.4°F to 0.5°F ±0.5% for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5°C) Total accuracy ±1.0% for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55°C) FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) A/D conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time →For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section 2.4.

+6150 +11390 +6000 +11120 F C ° Input ° characteristics -100 C +615 °

° +1139 0 -148 F 0 C

F °

° +600°C

° +1112 F -1000 -1480 -115 -1150 -175 -1750

J-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time A 2.4 A/D Conversion Time Common Items

This section describes the A/D conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC B FX FX

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC C

n'th 1st FX 3U -4AD-ADP

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command D

conversion FX

Digital value reading 3G

END instruction execution time will be "200μs × number of connected adapters." FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250μs/4ch

2.5 Temperature Measurement

To stabilize the temperature measurement, warm-up the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.

J-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) A Common Items

3. Wiring

This chapter describes the PTW-ADP wiring. B FX Observe the following caution to wire the PTW-ADP. FX 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. C FX 3U -4AD-ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS

out. FX

- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed. -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the PTW-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4AD-PTW -ADP

POWER

Signal Application

24+ 24+ External power 24- 24- Ground terminal

L1+ L1+ Channel-1 platinum

L1- L1- resistance thermometer I1- I1- sensor input L2+ L2+ Channel-2 platinum L2- L2- resistance thermometer I2- I2- sensor input L3+ L3+ Channel-3 platinum

L3- L3- resistance thermometer sensor input I3- I3-

L4+ L4+ Channel-4 platinum

L4- L4- resistance thermometer sensor input I4- I4-

J-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque A 3.2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Common Items

To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. 3U

Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N•m. -4DA Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.

To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" F FX

cannot protrude. 3U

the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while FX

referring to the external view. 3G 8mm (0.31") -1DA-BD 2.6mm 14mm Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.1") (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4) H FX

0.4mm 2.5mm 3U

Manufacturer Type -4AD-PTW (0.01") (0.09") Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4 × 2.5

J-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PTW-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an external power 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

PTW-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PTW-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +5V +5V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

PTW-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +5V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit.

J-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor A 3.4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Common Items

Select the Pt100 3-wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor. This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area, and will ensure accurate measurement. B FX FX

3.5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

PTW-ADP +5V C Twisted shielded Terminal 4.7kΩ 4.7kΩ FX Pt100 cable*1 block 3U 100kΩ ch -4AD-ADP L+ L- I- 100kΩ

+5V D Shield FX 3G

Twisted shielded 4.7kΩ 4.7kΩ -2AD-BD Pt100 cable*1 100kΩ ch L+ L- 100kΩ I- E FX 3U

+5V -4DA

24+ 24V DC 24- F FX 3U

Class-D grounding -4DA-ADP L+, L-, I-, ch: represents the channel number.

Grounding should be performed as stated below. H

The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. FX 3U

PLC Other PLC Other PLC Other I -ADP equipment equipment equipment FX 3U -4AD-PT Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

2 The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm ). J -ADP The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible. FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PTW-ADP.

4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. 2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Communi -cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special FX3U-4AD *1 -PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP adapter -PTW-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8260 to M8269 Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 A/D Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: A/D M8280 to M8289 Special data registers: D8280 to D8289

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

J-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special -PTW-ADP -PTW-ADP adapter FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2

*1 1st 2nd Special devices B FX FX

Special auxiliary relays: 3UC 3U

M8280 to M8289 -4AD A/D Special data registers: -4AD D8280 to D8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: C FX

D8290 to D8299 3U -4AD-ADP The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. However, in this case, do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter. *1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). D FX

*2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP to the FX3G Series 3G PLC. -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices

4.2 List of Special Devices

If the PTW-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Special Device number Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W Special 4.3 auxiliary M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 to relay Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section Channel-3 temperature 4.4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R measurement data Channel-4 temperature D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Averaging time for channel 2 register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section Averaging time for channel 3 4.5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.6 Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 21 R 4.7

J-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit A FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC Common Items R: Read / W: Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit. R/W Section 4.3 Special auxiliary relay B FX M8281 to M8291 to FX Unused (Do not use.) - -

M8289 M8299 3UC 3U -4AD

Channel-1 temperature -4AD D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section 4.4 Channel-3 temperature C D8282 D8292 R FX

(Setting range: 1 to 4095) 3G

D8289 D8299 Model code = 21 R Section 4.7 3U -4DA

4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

To switch the temperature unit of the PTW-ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit (°F) or OFF F FX

for Centigrade (°C). 3U

To switch the temperature unit, use the following special auxiliary relays: -4DA-ADP FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th G FX

Selection of temperature unit: 3G M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) -1DA-BD ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC H

Special auxiliary relay FX

Description 3U

1st 2nd -3A-ADP Selection of temperature unit: M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F) I -ADP 1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) FX 3U

1) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (°C) 2) To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit (°F) -4AD-PT for the 1st adapter: for the 2nd adapter: M8001 M8000 M8260 M8270 Normally ON Normally OFF J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Temperature Measurement

4.4 Temperature Measurement

The temperature data input in the PTW-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100. Normally ON

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101, the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

J-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Averaging Time A 4.5 Averaging Time Common Items

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K1 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) If the averaging time is set for the PTW-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in B FX FX

the D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set 3UC 3U -4AD

for each channel. -4AD Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register C Description FX

Special data register Description 1st 2nd E D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data FX 3U

D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data -4DA D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data F FX

1. Cautions regarding averaging time setting 3U -4DA-ADP If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register. If the averaging time is set to "2" or more, the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special G data register. FX 3G

After turning the PLC power on, the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special -1DA-BD data registers (D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293) until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time. Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, the error signal will be output. H FX

If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1". 3U If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096". -3A-ADP → For a detailed description of error status, refer to Section 5.5

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC) I -ADP M8000 FX FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "1" for the channel-1 K1 D8264 data of the 1st analog special adapter. 3U

MOV -4AD-PT Normally ON

FNC 12 Sets the averaging time to "5" for the channel-2 K5 D8265 data of the 1st analog special adapter. MOV J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status

4.6 Error Status

If an error is detected in the PTW-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data b0 of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - -

1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a PTW-ADP hardware error (b6) or PTW-ADP communication data error (b7) is detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV Normally ON

M8002 *1 RST M6 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

*1 RST M7 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error)

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV

*1. "1st " for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

J-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status A For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC Common Items

M8002 RST D8268.6 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

Error status of 1st analog special adapter B FX RST D8268.7 FX b7 = OFF (communication data error) 3UC 3U -4AD -4AD

2. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 C

FNC 12 FX D8288 K4M0 MOV 3U -4AD-ADP M0 Y000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M1 Y001 D The temperature measurement data FX

of channel 2 is outside the specified 3G

range, or disconnection is detected. -2AD-BD M2 Y002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M3 Y003 The temperature measurement data E FX

of channel 4 is outside the specified 3U

range, or disconnection is detected. -4DA M4 Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd*1 adapter

M5 *1 F Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd FX

adapter 3U -4DA-ADP M6 Y006 PTW-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1 adapter

M7 PTW-ADP communication data error G Y007 FX in 3rd*1 adapter 3G -1DA-BD

*1. "1st " for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Error Status

3. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter

D8268.6 Y006 PTW-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter

D8268.7 Y007 PTW-ADP communication data error in 1st adapter

J-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Model Code A 4.7 Model Code Common Items

Initial value: K21 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the PTW-ADP is connected, model code "21" will be stored in the corresponding special data register. B FX The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: FX 3UC 3U

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -4AD -4AD

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code C FX

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC 3U -4AD-ADP

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code D FX 3G

Use the special data registers above to check whether PTW-ADP is connected or not. -2AD-BD

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

FNC224 D8269 K21 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD = analog special adapter. E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Basic Program Example

4.8 Basic Program Example

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 Normally MOV ON

M8002 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special RST M6 adapter Initial b6 = OFF (hardware error) pulse Error status of 3rd*1 analog special RST M7 adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error) FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8001 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade M8280 (°C). M8002 Sets the averaging time to "1" for FNC 12 K1 D8284 MOV channel-1 data.

FNC 12 K5 D8285 Sets the averaging time to "5" for MOV channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D100 Stores the current value of the channel-1 MOV temperature measurement data in the D100.

FNC 12 D8281 D101 Stores the average value of the channel-2 MOV temperature measurement data in the D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data register D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction. *1. "1st " for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC. For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data (°C) from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter to D100 and D101, respectively. The averaging time is set to "1" (immediate data) for channel 1, and "5" for channel 2.

M8002 Error status of 1st analog special RST D8268.6 adapter b6 = OFF (hardware error)

FNC 12 K5 D8265 Sets the averaging time to "5" for MOV channel-2 data. M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the current value of the channel-1 MOV temperature measurement data in the D100.

FNC 12 D8261 D101 Stores the average value of the channel-2 MOV temperature measurement data in the D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data register D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

J-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check A Common Items

5. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. B FX If the temperature measurement data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following FX 3UC 3U

items: -4AD -4AD Version number of the PLC Wiring Special devices C Programs FX 3U

Error status -4AD-ADP

5.1 PLC Version Number Check D Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. FX 3G

Check the version number of the FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later. -2AD-BD Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. Any versions (from Ver.1. 40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. E FX 3U

5.2 Wiring Check -4DA

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power F

The PTW-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that FX

the POWER indicator lamp of the PTW-ADP is on. 3U -4DA-ADP 2. Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. G FX

5.3 Special Device Check 3G -1DA-BD

Check whether the special devices for the PTW-ADP are correctly used: 1. Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected. This special device should be H FX

Check that no error is detected in the PTW-ADP. 3U -4AD-PT If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check

5.4 Program Check

5.5 Error Status Check

If an error occurs in the PTW-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of b0 channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - - To solve a problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range. The temperature measurement value is not in the range between -115°C to 615°C. Or the line between PTW-ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected. 2) Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring condition. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel.

J-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check A 4. PTW-ADP hardware error (b6) Common Items 1) Description of error The PTW-ADP does not operate properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PTW-ADP. Also check that the PTW-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. B FX FX

If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi 3UC 3U -4AD

Electric distributor office. -4AD 5. PTW-ADP communication data error (b7) 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the PTW-ADP and the PLC. C FX

2) Remedy 3U

Check that the PTW-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. -4AD-ADP If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. D FX 3G -2AD-BD

E FX 3U -4DA

F FX 3U -4DA-ADP

G FX 3G -1DA-BD

H FX 3U -3A-ADP

I -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT

J -ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW

J-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP (4-channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check

MEMO

J-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

L FX -ADP 3U -4AD-TC

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable M

Controllers (FNC 88) Instruction PID

User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] K. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP special adapter (4-channel resistance thermometer data input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

K-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)

K-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 1. Outline

This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (referred to as PNK-ADP). L FX -ADP 3U 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD-TC

The FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP to the FX3U/ FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC to read the data from the 4-channel resistance thermometer. M 1) Up to 4 PNK-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. (FNC 88) Instruction PID *1 Up to 2 PNK-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. (Including other analog special adapters) 2) Thermometer types Pt1000 and Ni1000 can be connected. (However, it's impossible to use both types Pt1000 and Ni1000 with 1 adapter.) 3) The temperature data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/ FX3GC Series PLC.

System Point and section to be referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2*1 maximum Number of connectable (including other analog special adapters) units FX3U/FX3UC /FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC To check the connectable PLC model number, refer + + to Section 1.3.

Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board*2 adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed description of wiring, Analog data refer to Chapter 3.

Resistance thermometer sensor type Pt1000 and Ni1000

For FX3U, FX3UC, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description Description of special devices, refer to Transfer direction Special devices Chapter 4. Temperature measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269*3 For a detailed description *3 Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to Section 4.9. Switching of types between 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 type Pt1000 and Ni1000 *3 Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system.

*1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).

K-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using PNK-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: •Compatible PLC version number •Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: •Operation environment •Performance specifications Refer to the common •Input characteristics pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) •Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: •Selection of sensor cable •Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4. •Analog input line

Programming Programming: •Details of special devices •Examples of basic programs

If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 5 "Troubleshooting."

K-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number K FX -ADP

1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 3U -4AD-PNK PNK-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) L FX -ADP

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 3U -4AD-TC FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product)

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) 1. Version check M

Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number. (FNC 88) Instruction PID → For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.2. 2. How to check the manufacturer's serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate, and on the front of the product. → For a detailed description of how to check the manufacturer's serial number, refer to A. Common Items Subsection 5.1.1.

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for PNK-ADP of the FX3G/ FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting "FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC.

1. Japanese versions

Model name Applicable version Remarks (Media model name is shown below.) FX3U and FX3UC PLCs GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later Model selection: FX3U/FX3UC SWDNC-GXW2-J GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later *1 SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: FX3U(C) Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3U(C) (Offline mode) FX3G PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.07H or later *2 SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC GX Developer Ver. 8.72A or later Model selection: FX3G SWD5C-GPPW-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.00 or later Model selection: FX3G(C)*3 (Offline mode) FX3GC PLC GX Works2 Ver. 1.77F or later Model selection: FX3G/FX3GC SWDNC-GXW2-J Model selection: Not selected (Online mode) FX-30P Ver. 1.30 or later Model selection: FX3G(C) (Offline mode) *1. Select "FX3UC" in model selection for GX Developer Ver. 8.24A or earlier. *2. Select "FX3G" in model selection for GX Works2 earlier than Ver. 1.77F. *3. Select "FX3G" in model selection for the offline mode in FX-30P earlier than Ver. 1.30.

K-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

K-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the PNK-ADP. L FX -ADP 3U 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD-TC

Item Specifications 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating M

Ambient temperature (FNC 88) Instruction PID -25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F) when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude (Hz) (m/s2) (mm) Tested 10 times in Vibration 10 - 57 - 0.035 each direction (X-, Y-, DIN Rail Mounting resistance*1 57 - 150 4.9 - and Z-axis directions) (Total: 80 min, each) 10 to 57 − 0.075 Direct Mounting*2 57 to 150 9.8 − 147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, Shock resistance*1 and Z Using noise simulator of: Noise resistance Noise voltage: 1,000Vp-p / Noise width: 1μs / Rise: 1ns / Cycle: 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC, for 1 min voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5MΩ or more using 500V DC Insulation resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) Grounding *3 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude < 2000m*4

*1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If PNK-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. *3. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

→ For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.7. *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the PNK-ADP. The PNK-ADP may malfunction. 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

Item Specifications A/D conversion circuit 24V DC +20% -15%, 45mA driving power (It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block.) 5V DC, 15mA Interface driving power (Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit, it is not necessary to supply the power.)

K-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.3 Performance Specifications

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Platinum resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Pt1000 JIS C 1604-1997 Input signal Nickel resistance thermometer sensor (2-wire or 3-wire) Ni1000 DIN 43760-1987

Rated temperature Pt1000 -50°C to +250°C Pt1000 -58°F to +482°F range Ni1000 -40°C to +110°C Ni1000 -40°F to +230°F Pt1000 -500 to +2500 Pt1000 -580 to +4820 Digital output Ni1000 -400 to +1100 Ni1000 -400 to +2300 Pt1000 Pt1000 Resolution 0.1°C 0.2°F Ni1000 Ni1000 ±0.5% for full scale (when ambient temperature is 25°C±5°C) Total accuracy ±1.0% for full scale (when ambient temperature is in the range of 0 to 55°C) FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) A/D conversion FX3G/FX3GC PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time →For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section2.4.

-Pt1000 -Pt1000 +2560 +4920 +2500 +4820 F ° C °

-50°C Approx. +256 -58°F 0 0 Approx. +492.8 +250°C +482°F C F ° ° -500 -580 Approx. -55 Input -550 Approx. -67 -670 characteristics -Ni1000 -Ni1000 +1150 +2390 +1100 +2300 F C ° °

-40°C -40°F Approx. +239 0 Approx. +115 0 +110°C +230°F C F ° ° -400 -400 Approx. -45 -450 Approx. -49 -490

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 points points occupied (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

K-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time K FX -ADP

2.4 A/D Conversion Time 3U -4AD-PNK This section describes the A/D conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC L FX -ADP

1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing 3U -4AD-TC A/D conversion is performed at every arithmetic operation of the PLC. During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers.

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP M n'th 1st FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200 μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200 μs/4ch

2. A/D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped, A/D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated. 3. If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction, data will be read out from all the connected adapters (in the order of 1st adapter → 2nd adapter…4th adapter). 4. A/D conversion speed (data update time) During execution of the END instruction, the A/D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200μs, and the data read out will be written to the special data registers. END instruction execution time will be "200μs × number of connected adapters."

K-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250 μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250 μs/4ch

2.5 Temperature Measurement

To stabilize the temperature measurement, warm-up the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.

K-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 3. Wiring

This chapter describes the PNK-ADP wiring. L FX Observe the following caution to wire the PNK-ADP. -ADP 3U -4AD-TC WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

K-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the PNK-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4AD-PNK -ADP

POWER

Signal Application

24+ 24+ External power

24- 24- Ground terminal

L1+ L1+ Channel-1 Pt1000/Ni1000

L1- L1- sensor input I1- l1-

L2+ L2+ Channel-2 Pt1000/Ni1000 L2- L2-

I2- sensor input l2- L3+ L3+ Channel-3 Pt1000/Ni1000

L3- L3- sensor input

I3- l3-

L4+ L4+ Channel-4 Pt1000/Ni1000

L4- L4- sensor input I4- l4-

K-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input)3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque K FX -ADP

3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3U -4AD-PNK Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment. Terminate the cable end as shown below. 1. Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque L FX -ADP

Wire size Tightening 3U

Termination -4AD-TC (stranded/single-wire) torque 2 2 To connect a stranded cable, peel the cover off the cable Single-wire 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm (AWG22 to 20) and then twist the core before connection. To connect a single-wire cable, just strip the cover off the 2 2-wire 0.3mm (AWG22) cable before connection. M (FNC 88) Instruction PID 0.22 to 0.25 Rod terminal with insulation sleeve 2 2 Rod terminal 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm N•m (recommended terminal) with (AWG22-20) AI 0.5-8WH : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation (Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool external view shown in the sleeve CRIMPFOX 6*1 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact following figure.) (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2 : Manufactured by Phoenix Contact)

*1. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *2. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 2. Termination of cable end To terminate the cable, treat the stranded/single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve. Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N•m. Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque. Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions. To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" cannot protrude. - Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. 9mm (0.35") To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve: If the cable cover is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while (Crimp area) referring to the external view. 8mm (0.31") 2.6mm 14mm Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.1") (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4)

*3. Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3 *4. Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6 3. Tool To tighten terminals, use a small-sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right.

K-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PNK-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an external power 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

PNK-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PNK-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +5V +5V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse

Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

PNK-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +5V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit.

K-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor K FX -ADP

3.4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3U -4AD-PNK Select the Pt1000/Ni1000 (2-wire or 3-wire sensors) resistance thermometer sensor.

3.5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor L FX -ADP

Wiring depends on the resistance thermometer sensor type selected. Refer to the following wiring diagrams: 3U -4AD-TC

Resistance thermometer PNK-ADP wiring +5V 3-wire sensors Terminal 47kΩ 47kΩ type Shield wire*3 block M 1MΩ ch (FNC 88) Instruction PID L+ L- I- 1MΩ

+5V 2-wire sensors 47kΩ 47kΩ type 1MΩ ch L+ L- *2 1MΩ I-

External power supply wiring +5V 24+ 24V DC*1 24-

Class-D grounding L+, L-, I-, ch: represents the channel number.

*1. 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G/FX3U Series PLC can also be used. *2. When using a 2-wire temperature sensor type, short-circuit the [L -] terminal and the [I -] terminal. For the lead wire use a 10Ω resistance or less per line. *3. Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise (of the commercial power, etc.).

K-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

It is not possible to connect different types of resistance thermometer to 4 channels of PNK-ADP. Be sure to use the same type of resistance thermometer for all the channels.

3.7 Grounding

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

K-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the PNK-ADP. L FX -ADP 3U 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data -4AD-TC

1) The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. M 2) If data is stored in the special devices, the averaging time can be set, and the input mode can be (FNC 88) Instruction PID specified. 3) Special auxiliary relays (10 points) and special data registers (10 points) are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit. → For a detailed description of special device assignment, refer to Section 4.2. FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special *1 -PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP adapter -PNK-ADP FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: M8260 to M8269 A/D Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 A/D Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: M8280 to M8289 A/D Special data registers: D8280 to D8289

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

K-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special -PNK-ADP -PNK-ADP *2 adapter FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

*1 1st 2nd Special devices Special auxiliary relays: M8280 to M8289 A/D Special data registers: D8280 to D8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter, and so on. However, in this case, do not include the connect conversion adapter and the communication special adapter. *1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). *2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC.

K-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices K FX -ADP

4.2 List of Special Devices 3U -4AD-PNK If PNK-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write L FX Special Device number -ADP Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 3U -4AD-TC Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W 4.3 Special Section auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R/W 4.4 relay M M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to (FNC 88) Instruction PID Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section Channel-3 temperature 4.5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R measurement data Channel-4 temperature D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Averaging time for channel 2 register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section Averaging time for channel 3 4.6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.7 Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 11 R 4.8

K-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W Section 4.3 M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R/W Section 4.4 Special auxiliary relay M8282 to M8292 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature measurement D8280 D8290 R data Channel-2 temperature measurement D8281 D8291 R data Section 4.5 Channel-3 temperature measurement D8282 D8292 R data Channel-4 temperature measurement D8283 D8293 R data Averaging time for channel 1 D8284 D8294 R/W Special data register (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 2 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section 4.6 Averaging time for channel 3 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.7 D8289 D8299 Model code = 11 R Section 4.8

4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

The state of special auxiliary relays decides the PNK-ADP's temperature unit as shown in the table below. To switch the temperature unit, use the following special auxiliary relays: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit: M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd Selection of temperature unit: M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

1)To switch the temperature unit to 2) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (°C) for the 1st adapter: Fahrenheit (°F) for the 2nd adapter: M8001 M8000 M8260 M8270 Normally OFF Normally ON

K-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.4 Input sensor selection K FX -ADP

4.4 Input sensor selection 3U -4AD-PNK Turn on the Pt1000 type or off the Ni1000 type selection special auxiliary relay to select the Pt1000 or Ni1000 for PNK-ADP. The input sensor type will be selected for all the channels at the same time. To select the input sensor type, use the following special auxiliary relays: L FX -ADP

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3U -4AD-TC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Input sensor selection: M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF: Pt1000 M ON: Ni1000 (FNC 88) Instruction PID

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd Input sensor selection: M8281 M8291 OFF: Pt1000 ON: Ni1000

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

1) To select Pt1000 for the 1st adapter: 2)To select Ni1000 for the 2nd adapter : M8001 M8000 M8261 M8271 Normally OFF Normally ON

K-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.5 Temperature Measurement

4.5 Temperature Measurement

The temperature data input in the PNK-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

The immediate data or the average data (data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time) will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data. → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.6. 1. Caution regarding temperature measurement The temperature measurement data are for reading only. Do not change (rewrite) the current data using the sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the programming tool.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data MOV of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100. Normally ON

FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101. MOV

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

K-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.6 Averaging Time K FX -ADP

4.6 Averaging Time 3U -4AD-PNK

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K64 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) L FX If the averaging time is set for the PNK-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in -ADP 3U

the D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set -4AD-TC for each channel. Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC M Special data register (FNC 88) Instruction PID Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data

1. Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to "1", the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register. If the averaging time is set to "2" or more, the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time, and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register. After turning the PLC power on, the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers (D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293) until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time. Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set value is outside the setting range, the error signal will be output. If the averaging time is set to "0" or smaller, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "1". If the averaging time is set to "4096" or larger, the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to "4096". → For a detailed description of error status, refer to Section 5.5

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "32" for the channel-1 MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter. Normally ON

FNC 12 K128 D8265 Sets the averaging time to "128" for the channel-2 MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter.

K-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Error Status

4.7 Error Status

If an error is detected on PNK-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data b0 of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PNK-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PNK-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - -

1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a PNK-ADP hardware error (b6) or PNK-ADP communication data error (b7) is once detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV Normally ON

M8002 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter RST M6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

*1 RST M7 Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error)

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

K-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Error Status K FX For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

Error status in the 1st analog special adapter L FX RST D8268.7 -ADP b7 = OFF (communication data error) 3U -4AD-TC

2. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 M MOV (FNC 88) Instruction PID

M0 Y000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M1 Y001 The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M2 Y002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M3 Y003 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range, or disconnection is detected. M4 Y004 EEPROM error in 3rd*1 adapter

M5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd*1 adapter M6 Y006 PNK-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1 adapter

M7 Y007 PNK-ADP communication data error in the 3rd*1 adapter

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

K-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.7 Error Status

3. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268.6 Y006 PNK-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter

D8268.7 Y007 PNK-ADP communication data error in the 1st adapter

K-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.8 Model Code K FX -ADP

4.8 Model Code 3U -4AD-PNK

Initial value: K11 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the PNK-ADP is connected, model code "11" will be stored in the special data register. L FX The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: -ADP 3U

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -4AD-TC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code M (FNC 88) Instruction PID FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code

Use the above special data registers to check whether PNK-ADP is connected or not.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

FNC224 D8269 K11 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD = analog special adapter.

K-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example

4.9 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data. For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) of channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd*1 adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 Normally MOV ON M8002 Error status of 3rd*1 analog special RST M6 adapter Initial b6 = OFF (hardware error) pulse Error status of 3rd*1 analog special RST M7 adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error) FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8001 M8280 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade (°C)

M8281 Selects Pt1000

M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8284 Sets the averaging time to "32" for MOV channel-1 data

FNC 12 K128 D8285 Sets the averaging time to "128" for MOV channel-2 data M8000 Stores the current value of the FNC 12 D8280 D100 channel-1 measurement MOV temperature data to D100. Stores the current value of the FNC 12 D8281 D101 channel-2 measurement MOV temperature data to D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101, data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction. *1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

K-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example K FX For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -ADP 3U

The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) of channels 1 -4AD-PNK and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.

M8002 Error status of 1st analog special RST D8268.6 adapter L FX b6 = OFF (hardware error) -ADP 3U -4AD-TC RST D8268.7 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error) M8001 M8260 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade (°C) M M8261 Selects Pt1000 (FNC 88) Instruction PID

M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "32" for MOV channel-1 data

FNC 12 K128 D8265 Sets the averaging time to "128" for MOV channel-2 data M8000 Stores the current value of the FNC 12 D8260 D100 channel-1 measurement MOV temperature data to D100. Stores the current value of the FNC 12 D8261 D101 channel-2 measurement MOV temperature data to D101.

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

K-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check

5. Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status. If the temperature measurement data is not input, or if the proper digital value is not input, check the following items: Version number of the PLC Wiring Special devices Programs Error status

5.1 PLC Version Number Check

Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. Check the version number of FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later. Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. 5.2 Wiring Check

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power The PNK-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PNK-ADP is on. 2. Resistance thermometer sensor cable When using a 2-wire temperature sensor type, short-circuit the [L-] terminal and the [I-] terminal. Separate the cable of the resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise (of the commercial power, etc.). → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. 5.3 Special Device Check

Check whether the special devices for the PNK-ADP are correctly used: 1. Input sensor selection Check if the special device for type Pt1000/Ni1000 selection is correctly set. Turn off the device to select Pt1000. Turn on the device to select Ni1000. 2. Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set. This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. 3. Averaging time Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. 4. Error status Check that no error is detected in the PNK-ADP. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

K-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.4 Program Check K FX -ADP

5.4 Program Check 3U -4AD-PNK Check the following items for the program: 1. Cancellation of error status at power-on When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (b6 and b7 should turn off) L FX using the program. -ADP 3U 2. Check of storage devices -4AD-TC Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs.

5.5 Error Status Check M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

If an error occurs in the PNK-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of b0 channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PNK-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PNK-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - - To solve a problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range. The temperature measurement value of Pt1000 is not in the range between -55°C to +256°C, or the temperature measurement value of Ni1000 is not in the range between -45°C to +115°C. Alternatively, wiring with Pt1000 and Ni1000 is disconnected. 2) Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring condition. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel.

K-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP (4-channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check

4. PNK-ADP hardware error (b6) 1) Description of error The PNK-ADP does not operate properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PNK-ADP. Also check that the PNK-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 5. PNK-ADP communication data error (b7) 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the PNK-ADP and the PLC. 2) Remedy Check that the PNK-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office.

K-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

L FX -ADP 3U -4AD-TC

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable M

Controllers (FNC 88) Instruction PID

User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] L. FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input)

Foreword

This manual describes the specifications, wiring, and operation methods for the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP special adapter (4-channel thermocouple input) and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

L-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input)

L-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.1 Outline of Functions K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 1. Outline

This chapter describes the outline of FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (referred to as TC-ADP). L FX -ADP 3U 1.1 Outline of Functions -4AD-TC

The FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP is an analog special adapter. Connect the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP to the FX3U/FX3UC/ FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC to read the data from the 4-channel thermocouple. M 1) Up to 4 TC-ADP units can be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC. (FNC 88) Instruction PID *1 Up to 2 TC-ADP units can be connected to the FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. (Including other analog special adapters) 2) Thermocouple types K and J can be connected. (However, it's impossible to use both types K and J with 1 adapter.) 3) A/D conversion data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/ FX3GC Series PLC.

System Point and section to be referred to

FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 4 maximum FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 2*1 maximum Number of connectable (including other analog special adapters) units FX3U/FX3UC /FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

To check the connectable PLC model number, refer + + to Section 1.3.

Expansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board*2 adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed description of wiring, Analog data refer to Chapter 3.

Thermocouple temperature sensor type K or J

For FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC For a detailed description Description of special devices, refer to Transfer direction Special devices Chapter 4. Temperature measurement 1st adapter M/D8260 to M/D8269*3 For a detailed description *3 Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M/D8270 to M/D8279 of a basic program, refer to Section 4.9. Switching of types between 3rd adapter M/D8280 to M/D8289*3 type K and type J Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M/D8290 to M/D8299*3 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User's Manual - Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system.

*1. Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC (14-point and 24-point type).

L-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

1.2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation

Before starting analog input using TC-ADP, follow the procedure below to set up the system:

FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP

Refer to Chapter 1.

Outline Outline of system: •Compatible PLC version number •Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2.

Specifications check Specifications: •Operation environment •Performance specifications Refer to the common •Input characteristics pages.

System configuration and selection System configuration: (Refer to the common pages for analog control.) •Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3.

Wiring Wiring: •Selection of sensor cable •Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4. •Analog input line

Programming Programming: •Details of special devices •Examples of basic programs

If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal, refer to Chapter 5 "Troubleshooting."

L-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number K FX -ADP

1.3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 3U -4AD-PNK TC-ADP is compatible with the following PLC.

Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver. 2.20 or later After May 2005 (From first product) L FX -ADP

FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 1.30 or later After August 2004 3U -4AD-TC FX3G Series PLC Ver. 1.00 or later After June 2008 (From first product)

FX3GC Series PLC Ver. 1.40 or later After January 2012 (From first product) 1. Version check M

1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for TC-ADP of the FX3G/ FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each PLC for versions of programming tools applicable to each PLC version. It is not possible to create programs in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using programming tools of inapplicable versions. It is possible to create programs in FX3GC PLC using programming tools of inapplicable versions by selecting "FX3G" as the alternative model as far as such programming tools are applicable to FX3G PLC.

1. Japanese versions

L-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 1.4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number

2. English versions

L-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.1 Generic Specifications K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 2. Specifications

This chapter describes the general, power supply, and performance specifications for the TC-ADP. L FX -ADP 3U 2.1 Generic Specifications -4AD-TC

Item Specifications 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating M

*1. The criterion is shown in IEC61131-2. *2. If TC-ADP is connected to the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC, direct installation is not possible. *3. Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed → For a detailed description of the grounding, refer to Section 3.7. *4. If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure, do not use the TC-ADP. The TC-ADP may malfunction. 2.2 Power Supply Specifications

L-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.3 Performance Specifications

2.3 Performance Specifications

Specifications Item Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Thermocouple type K or J Input signal JIS C 1602-1995

Rated temperature Type K -100°C to +1000°C Type K -148°F to +1832°F range Type J -100°C to +600°C Type J -148°F to +1112°F Type K -1000 to +10000 Type K -1480 to +18320 Digital output Type J -1000 to +6000 Type J -1480 to +11120 Type K 0.4°C Type K 0.72°F Resolution Type J 0.3°C Type J 0.54°F Total accuracy ±(0.5% full scale +1°C) FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC : 200μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) A/D conversion FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC : 250μs (The data will be updated at every scan time.) time →For a detailed description of data update, refer to Section2.4.

• Type K •Type K +10100 +18500 +10000 +18320 C F ° °

° +1850 -100°C 0 +1010 -148 F 0 ° F C +1000°C +1832 F ° ° -1000 -1480 -166 -110 Input -1100 -1660 characteristics •Type J •Type J +6100 +11300 +6000 +11120 F ° C ° +1130 -100°C 0 +610 -148°F 0 F C +600°C +1112°F ° ° -1000 -1480 -166 -110 -1100 -1660

The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC. Insulation method The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area. Channels are not insulated from each other. Number of I/O 0 points points occupied (This number is not related to the maximum number of input/output points of the PLC.)

L-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.4 A/D Conversion Time K FX -ADP

2.4 A/D Conversion Time 3U -4AD-PNK This section describes the A/D conversion time.

2.4.1 When connected to a FX3U, FX3UC PLC L FX -ADP

1. A/D conversion and special data register update timing 3U -4AD-TC A/D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC. During execution of END instruction, the PLC performs A/D conversion, reads out the A/D converted data, and then writes the data in the special data registers.

FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP M n'th 1st FX3U/FX3UC Series PLC (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200 μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 200 μs/4ch

L-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 2.5 Temperature Measurement

2.4.2 When connected to a FX3G, FX3GC PLC

FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP 2nd 1st FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Sequence program A/D conversion start A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250 μs/4ch A/D conversion start END instruction A/D command conversion Digital value reading 250 μs/4ch

2.5 Temperature Measurement

To stabilize the temperature measurement, warm-up the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.

L-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 3. Wiring

This chapter describes the TC-ADP wiring. L FX Observe the following caution to wire the TC-ADP. -ADP 3U -4AD-TC WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product. M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

WIRING PRECAUTIONS

L-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.1 Terminal Layout

3.1 Terminal Layout

The terminals of the TC-ADP are arranged as follows:

FX3U-4AD-TC -ADP

POWER

Signal Application

24+ 24+ External power

24- 24- Ground terminal

• • Unused

• • (Do not connect any lines.)

J-type J-type Switches the type between type K and type J. J-type J-type

L1+ L1+ Channel-1 thermocouple L1- L1- sensor input

L2+ L2+ Channel-2 thermocouple sensor input L2- L2-

L3+ L3+ Channel-3 thermocouple sensor input L3- L3-

L4+ L4+ Channel-4 thermocouple sensor input I4- L4-

L-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque K FX -ADP

Wire size Tightening 3U

To directly terminate the end of a stranded/single-wire cable: Termination of cable end - Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the "barbed wires" cannot protrude. - Do not solder-plate the end of the cable. 9mm (0.35") To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve: If the cable cover is too thick, it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area (Crimp area) the insulation sleeve. For this reason, select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view. 8mm (0.31") 2.6mm 14mm Manufacturer Model Caulking tool (0.1") (0.55") CRIMPFOX 6*3 Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH (or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*4)

L-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.3 Power Supply Line

3.3 Power Supply Line

Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the TC-ADP to the 24+ and 24- terminals of the terminal block.

3.3.1 To connect to the FX3G, FX3U Series PLC

1. To use an external power 2. To use the 24V DC power of the PLC

TC-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series TC-ADP FX3G/FX3U Series PLC (Main unit) PLC (Main unit) +5V +5V

24+ 24- 24+ 24- 24V 0V

Terminal Terminal block block Fuse

Class-D Class-D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line: Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit. When using an external power supply, turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit. When turning OFF the power, confirm the safety of the system, and then turn OFF the power of the PLC (including special adapter) at the same time.

3.3.2 To connect to the FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

Example of wiring of FX3UC Series PLC

TC-ADP FX3UC Series PLC (Main unit) +5V

Power connector 24+ 24- 24+ 24-

Terminal Red Black Green block

Fuse Class-D 24V DC grounding For example of wiring of FX3GC Series PLC, refer to the following manual. → Refer to the FX3GC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition "Section 4.2 Example External Wiring". Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line: For the 24V DC power supply line, be sure to use the same power as the FX3GC/FX3UC Series PLC. Ground the " " terminal to a class-D grounding power supply line (100Ω or less) together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit.

L-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple K FX -ADP

3.4 Selection of the Thermocouple 3U -4AD-PNK

3.4.1 Thermocouple type

There are 2 types of thermocouples: K type and J type. When selecting the thermocouple type, make sure L FX that the same type of thermocouple is connection to all the channels. -ADP 3U

Be sure to use a non-grounded thermocouple type. -4AD-TC

3.4.2 Compensating lead wire

To connect the thermocouple, use one of the following types of compensating lead wires: M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Thermocouple Type of compensating lead wire Type K KX,KCA,KCB,KCC Type J JX

The compensating lead wire indicates a temperature value of approximately 0.12°C higher than that of the wire resistor (10Ω). Use the appropriate compensating lead wire when considering this difference. If the compensating lead wire is very long, the wire may be easily affected by noise, etc. It is, therefore, recommended for the length of the compensating lead wire to be 100 m or less.

3.5 Wiring of Thermocouple

Wiring depends on the thermocouple type selected. Refer to the following wiring diagrams:

3.5.1 Wiring of thermocouple type K

Terminal block TC-ADP Type J OPEN*1 Type J Temperature compensating circuit Thermocouple Compensating type K*2 lead wire 3kΩ L+ ch L-

Shield Temperature compensating circuit 3kΩ L+ ch L- +5V

24+ 24V DC 24-

Class-D grounding L+, L-, ch: represents the channel number.

*1. It is not necessary to connect lines to the J-type terminals. Leave these terminals disconnected. *2. Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise (commercial power, etc.).

L-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

3.5.2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J

Terminal block TC-ADP type J *1 type J Temperature compensating circuit Thermocouple Compensating type J*2 lead wire 3kΩ L+ ch L-

Shield Temperature compensating circuit 3kΩ L+ ch L- +5V

24+ 24V DC 24-

Class-D grounding L+, L-, ch: represents the channel number.

*1. To use a J thermocouple type, be sure to connect the thermocouple to these terminals. In addition, select J type by turning on the type K/J selection special auxiliary relay. *2. Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise (commercial power, etc.).

3.6 Caution Regarding Wiring

It is not possible to connect different types of thermocouples to 4 channels of TC-ADP. Be sure to use the same type of thermocouple for all the channels. TC-ADP is not insulated between the channels. For this reason, be sure to use a non-grounded type thermocouple. Be sure not to connect to the terminal "•".

3.7 Grounding

Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed

The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 (0.3 to 0.5 mm2). The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.

L-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 4. Programming

This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the TC-ADP. L FX -ADP 3U 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data -4AD-TC

4th 3rd 2nd 1st Special devices

Special auxiliary relays: M8260 to M8269 A/D Special data registers: D8260 to D8269

Special auxiliary relays: M8270 to M8279 A/D Special data registers: D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays: M8280 to M8289 A/D Special data registers: D8280 to D8289

Special auxiliary relays: M8290 to M8299 A/D Special data registers: D8290 to D8299

L-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.1 Loading of A/D Conversion Data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Communi- cation FX3U-4AD FX3U-4AD special -TC-ADP -TC-ADP adapter FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC*2

The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter, and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter. However, in this case, do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter. *1. The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC(14-point and 24-point type). *2. A connector conversion adapter is required to connect the FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP to the FX3G Series PLC.

L-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.2 List of Special Devices K FX -ADP

4.2 List of Special Devices 3U -4AD-PNK If TC-ADP is connected, special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write L FX Special Device number -ADP Description Attribute Reference device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 3U -4AD-TC Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W 4.3 Special Switches the thermocouple type Section auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 R/W between type K and type J 4.4 relay M M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to (FNC 88) Instruction PID Unused (Do not use.) - - M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 R measurement data Channel-2 temperature D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 R measurement data Section Channel-3 temperature 4.5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 R measurement data Channel-4 temperature D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 R measurement data Averaging time for channel 1 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 R/W Special (Setting range: 1 to 4095) data Averaging time for channel 2 register D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section Averaging time for channel 3 4.6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R/W 4.7 Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code = 10 R 4.8

L-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC R: Read / W: Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R/W Section 4.3 Switches the thermocouple type M8281 M8291 R/W Section 4.4 Special auxiliary relay between type K and type J M8282 to M8292 to Unused (Do not use.) - - M8289 M8299 Channel-1 temperature measurement D8280 D8290 R data Channel-2 temperature measurement D8281 D8291 R data Section 4.5 Channel-3 temperature measurement D8282 D8292 R data Channel-4 temperature measurement D8283 D8293 R data Averaging time for channel 1 D8284 D8294 R/W Special data register (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 2 D8285 D8295 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Section 4.6 Averaging time for channel 3 D8286 D8296 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) Averaging time for channel 4 D8287 D8297 R/W (Setting range: 1 to 4095) D8288 D8298 Error status R/W Section 4.7 D8289 D8299 Model code = 10 R Section 4.8

4.3 Selection of Temperature Unit

The state of special auxiliary relays decides the TC-ADP's temperature unit as shown in the table below. To switch the temperature unit, use the following special auxiliary relays: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit: M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd Selection of temperature unit: M8280 M8290 OFF: Centigrade (°C) ON: Fahrenheit (°F)

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

1)To switch the temperature unit to 2) To switch the temperature unit to centigrade (°C) for the 1st adapter: Fahrenheit (°F) for the 2nd adapter: M8001 M8000 M8260 M8270 Normally OFF Normally ON

L-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.4 Selection of Type K or J K FX -ADP

4.4 Selection of Type K or J 3U -4AD-PNK Turn on the J type or off the K type selection special auxiliary relay to select the thermocouple type J or K for TC-ADP. The thermocouple type will be selected for all the channels at the same time. To select the thermocouple type, use the following special auxiliary relays: L FX -ADP

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC 3U -4AD-TC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of type K or J: M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF: Type K M ON: Type J (FNC 88) Instruction PID

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd Selection of type K or J: M8281 M8291 OFF: Type K ON: Type J

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

1) To select thermocouple type K for the 2)To select thermocouple type J for the 1st adapter: 2nd adapter : M8001 M8000 M8261 M8271 Normally OFF Normally ON

L-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.5 Temperature Measurement

4.5 Temperature Measurement

The temperature data input in the TC-ADP will be stored in the special data registers. The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

The immediate data or the average data (data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time) will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data. → For a detailed description of the averaging time, refer to Section 4.6. 1. Caution regarding temperature measurement The temperature measurement data are for reading only. Do not change (rewrite) the current data using the sequence program, indicator, or device monitor of the programming tool.

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel-1 temperature measurement data MOV of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100. Normally ON

FNC 12 Stores the channel-2 temperature measurement data D8261 D101 of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101. MOV

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

L-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.6 Averaging Time K FX -ADP

4.6 Averaging Time 3U -4AD-PNK

Setting range: 1 to 4095 Initial value: K64 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) L FX If the averaging time is set for the TC-ADP, the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the -ADP 3U

D8260 to D8263, D8270 to D8273, D8280 to D8283, and D8290 to D8293. The averaging time can be set for -4AD-TC each channel. Set the averaging time in the following special data registers: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC M Special data register (FNC 88) Instruction PID Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel-1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel-2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel-3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel-4 data

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

2. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "32" for the channel-1 MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter. Normally ON

FNC 12 K128 D8265 Sets the averaging time to "128" for the channel-2 MOV data of the 1st analog special adapter.

L-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.7 Error Status

4.7 Error Status

If an error is detected on TC-ADP, the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register. The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data: FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data.

Check the ON/OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error. Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table. Create a program to detect errors.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data b0 of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - -

1. Caution regarding use of error status data If a TC-ADP hardware error (b6) or TC-ADP communication data error (b7) is once detected, it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power-on of the PLC. For this reason, be sure to create the following program: For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC

M8000 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 MOV Normally ON

M8002 Error status in the 3rd*1 analog special adapter RST M6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

*1 RST M7 Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b7 = OFF (communication data error)

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

L-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.7 Error Status K FX For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter RST D8268.6 b6 = OFF (hardware error) Initial pulse

Error status in the 1st analog special adapter L FX RST D8268.7 -ADP b7 = OFF (communication data error) 3U -4AD-TC

2. Program Example 1 (For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLC)

M8000 FNC 12 M

D8288 K4M0 (FNC 88) Instruction PID MOV

M5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd*1 adapter M6 Y006 TC-ADP hardware error in 3rd*1 adapter

M7 Y007 TC-ADP communication data error in the 3rd*1 adapter

*1. "1st" for the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.

L-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.7 Error Status

3. Program Example 2 (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

D8268.5 Y005 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268.6 Y006 TC-ADP hardware error in 1st adapter

D8268.7 Y007 TC-ADP communication data error in the 1st adapter

L-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.8 Model Code K FX -ADP

4.8 Model Code 3U -4AD-PNK

Initial value: K10 Numeric data type: Decimal (K) When the TC-ADP is connected, model code "10" will be stored in the special data register. L FX The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code: -ADP 3U

FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -4AD-TC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code M (FNC 88) Instruction PID FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC

Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code

Use the above special data registers to check whether TC-ADP is connected or not.

1. Program Example (For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC)

FNC224 D8269 K10 Y010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD = analog special adapter.

L-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example

4.9 Basic Program Example

Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data. For FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3UC Series PLCs The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) of channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd*1 adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.

FNC 12 K4M0 D8288 MOV M8001 M8280 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade (°C)

M8281 Selects thermocouple type K

M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8284 Sets the averaging time to "32" for MOV channel-1 data

L-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 4.9 Basic Program Example K FX For FX3U, FX3UC Series PLC -ADP 3U

The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data (°C) -4AD-PNK of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101, respectively. The averaging time will be set to "32" for channel 1, and "128" for channel 2.

M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8264 Sets the averaging time to "32" for MOV channel-1 data

Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101, data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction.

L-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.1 PLC Version Number Check

5. Troubleshooting

Any versions (from Ver. 2.20 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3U Series are compatible. Check the version number of FX3UC Series. The version number should be 1.30 or later. Any versions (from Ver. 1.00 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3G Series are compatible. Any versions (from Ver. 1.40 (initial version) to the latest version) of the FX3GC Series are compatible. → For a detailed description of the version number check method, refer to Section 1.3. 5.2 Wiring Check

Check the following items for wiring: 1. Power The TC-ADP needs driving power. Verify that the power supply line is properly connected. Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the TC-ADP is on. 2. Thermocouple cable Use a non-grounded type thermocouple and connect the thermocouple using the compensating lead wire. In addition, separate the cable of the thermocouple from the other power cables or inductive cables. 3. To use thermocouple type J To use thermocouple type J, shortcircuit the J-type terminals. If these terminals are not shortcircuited, the temperature measurement data cannot be read out correctly. → For a detailed description of wiring, refer to Chapter 3. 5.3 Special Device Check

Check whether the special devices for the TC-ADP are correctly used: 1. Selection of type K or J Check if the special device for type K/J selection is correctly set. Turn off the device to select thermocouple type K. Turn on the device to select thermocouple type J. 2. Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set. This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel. 3. Averaging time Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range. The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095. If the set averaging time is outside the specified range, an error occurs. 4. Error status Check that no error is detected in the TC-ADP. If an error is detected, check the details of the error, and then check the wiring and programs. → For a detailed description of special devices, refer to Chapter 4.

L-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.4 Program Check K FX -ADP

5.4 Program Check 3U -4AD-PNK Check the following items for the program: 1. Cancellation of error status at power-on When the power is turned off and then on again, the error status should be cleared (the b6 and the b7 should L FX turn off) using the program. -ADP 3U 2. Check of storage devices -4AD-TC Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs.

5.5 Error Status Check M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

If an error occurs in the TC-ADP, the corresponding bit will turn on. The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled. If b6 or b7 is turned ON, then it is necessary to clear the error status using the program the next time the power of the PLC is cycled.

Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of b0 channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC-ADP hardware error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC-ADP communication data error range, or disconnection is detected. The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range, or disconnection is detected. b4 EEPROM error - - To solve a problem, refer to the troubleshooting method described below: 1. Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line (b0 to b3) 1) Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range. The temperature measurement value of thermocouple type K is not in the range between -110°C to +1010°C, or the temperature measurement value of thermocouple type J is not in the range between -110°C to +610°C. Or the line between TC-ADP and the thermocouple is disconnected. 2) Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range. Also check the wiring condition. 2. EEPROM error (b4) 1) Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed. 2) Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 3. Averaging time setting error (b5) 1) Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels (channels 1 to 4) is outside the specified range: 1 to 4095. 2) Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel.

L-31 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP (4-channel Thermocouple Data Input) 5.5 Error Status Check

4. TC-ADP hardware error (b6) 1) Description of error The TC-ADP does not operate properly. 2) Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the TC-ADP. Also check that the TC-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office. 5. TC-ADP communication data error (b7) 1) Description of error A communication error is detected between the TC-ADP and the PLC. 2) Remedy Check that the TC-ADP is correctly connected to the PLC. If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check, please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office.

L-32 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition PID Instruction (FNC 88) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

L FX -ADP 3U -4AD-TC

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programmable M

Controllers (FNC 88) Instruction PID

User's Manual [Analog Control Edition] M. PID Instruction (FNC 88)

Foreword

This manual describes the control methods for using the PID instruction in combination with analog products and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit. Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

M-1 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition PID Instruction (FNC 88)

M-2 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction (FNC 88) 1.1 Outline of function K FX -ADP 3U 1. Outline -4AD-PNK

This chapter describes the outline of PID instruction (FNC88) for the FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC. L FX -ADP 3U

1.1 Outline of function -4AD-TC

The PID instruction requires the system to calculate the output (MV) value from the measured (PV) value. Through combining the P (proportional) action, I (integral) action, and D (derivative) action the target (SV) value can be obtained. See diagram below. M (FNC 88) Instruction PID 1) Alarm output function The alarm function can be set for input variation (measured value) or output variation (value). 2) Setting limit values The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value. 3) Auto-tuning function The proportional gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD) can be set automatically for both the limit cycle method and step response method. 4) Operation method of the PID instruction Both PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed.

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G/FX3GC Series PLC

Measured value (PV)

Target value (SV)

Controlled PID Instruction object

Output value (MV)

M-3 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction (FNC 88) 1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)

1.2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction (Reference)

The PID instruction executes using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression.

According to the contents of S3 +1, bit 0 (operation setting (ACT)) specified by S3 in the PID control, either for forward operation or backward operation is executed. Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter S3 or later. 1. Basic operation expression for PID control Operation direction (ACT) PID operation expression S3 +1, b0

TS ΔMV = KP{(EVn − EVn-1) + EVn + Dn} TI Forward operation EVn = PVnf-SV (OFF) TD KDTD Dn = (−2PVnf−1 + PVnf + PVnf−2) + Dn-1 TS + KDTD TS + KDTD MVn = ΣΔMV

TS ΔMV = KP{(EVn − EVn−1) + EVn + Dn} TI Backward EVn = SV − PVnf operation (ON) TD KDTD Dn = (2PVnf−1 − PVnf − PVnf−2) + Dn-1 TS + KDTD TS + KDTD MVn = ΣΔMV

1) Symbols EVn : Deviation in sampling at this time Dn : Differential term at this time EVn-1 : Deviation in previous cycle Dn-1 : Differential term in previous cycle SV : Target value KP : Proportional gain PVnf : Measured value in sampling at this time (after filter) TS : Sampling cycle PVnf-1 : Measured value in previous cycle (after filter) TI : Integral constant PVnf-2 : Measured value in two cycles before (after filter) TD : Differential constant ΔMV : Output variation KD : Differential gain MVn : Operation quantity at this time 2) Expression for calculating the measured value (after the filter) in sampling at this time (PVnf) The value "PVnf" is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value.

Measured value after filter: PVnf = PVn+L(PVnf-1-PVn)

PVn : Measured value in sampling at this time L : Filter coefficient PVnf-1 : Measured value in previous cycle (after filter)

M-4 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction (FNC 88) 2.1 Explanation of function and operation K FX -ADP 3U 2. How to Use PID Instruction -4AD-PNK

1. Instruction format L FX -ADP

FNC 88 16-bit Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Mnemonic Operation Condition 3U Instruction Instruction -4AD-TC PID 9 steps PID Continuous Operation ⎯ PID

2. Set data M (FNC 88) Instruction PID Operand type Description Data type

S1 Data register storing the target value (SV) Binary 16-bit

S2 Data register storing the measured value (PV) Binary 16-bit

S3 Data register storing PID parameters Binary 16-bit

D Data register storing the output value (MV) Binary 16-bit

3. Target devices Bit devices Word devices Others Real Char- Special Con- Poin- Operand System User Digit Specification System User Index Num- acter Unit stant ter type ber String Mod- XYMTCSD.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G VZ KH E ""P ify

S1 S

S2 S

D S

S : Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

2.1 Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit PID operation Once the target value S1 , measured value S2 and PID parameters S3 to S3 + 6 are set and the program is executed, the operation result (MV) is transferred to the output value SD3 at every sampling time. The sampling time is specified by S3 Command input FNC 88 S1 S2 S3 D PID Target Measured PID Output value value Parameters value (SV) (PV) (MV)

M-5 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction (FNC 88) 2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning

Explanation of set items Occupied Set item Description points The target value (SV) is set. The PID instruction does not change the settings. Target value Caution on using the auto-tuning (limit cycle method) 1 S1 (SV) If the target value for auto-tuning is different from the target value in the PID control, it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added, and then store the actual target value when the auto-tuning flag turns OFF. Measured This is the input value of the PID operation. 1 S2 value (PV) 1) Auto-tuning (in the limit cycle) Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 29 2) Auto-tuning (in the step response method) *1 S3 Parameter a) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 15 are something other than "0" Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 25 b) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 15 are "0" Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 20 1) PID control (normal processing) The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction. After that, the operation result is stored. 2) Auto-tuning (in the limit cycle method) Output value The Upper Limit Value (ULV) or Lower Limit Value (LLV) value is automatically 1 D (MV) output during auto-tuning. The specified MV value is output when auto-tuning is finished. 3) Auto-tuning (in the step response method) The user sets the step output value before driving the instruction. The MV value is not changed by PID instruction during auto-tuning. *1. When auto-tuning is not executed for the limit cycle method, the same number of devices as those occupied in the step response method become occupied.

2.2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto-Tuning

1. When auto-tuning is not executed (parameter setting) It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters S3 to S3 +6 using MOV instruction in advance, etc. before starting the PID operation when auto-tuning is not executed. When data registers in the latch area are backed up against power failure, the setting data is held even after the power of the PLC is turned OFF. Therefore, writing is not necessary when the power is turned back ON. 2. When auto-tuning is executed The proportional gain (S3 +3), integral time (S3 +4) and differential time (S3 +6) are important constants for executing the auto-tuning function described later and for optimizing the PID control. These constants can be set automatically. → For a detailed description of auto-tuning (limit cycle method), refer to Section. 4.1. → For a detailed description of auto-tuning (step response method), refer to Section. 4.2.

M-6 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28 K FX -ADP 3U 3. Parameter -4AD-PNK

This chapter describes various parameters of PID instruction. L FX -ADP 3U

3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28 -4AD-TC

Set item Setting Remarks Reference M It cannot be shorter than operation Subsection (FNC 88) Instruction PID Sampling time (TS) 1 to 32767 (ms) S3 cycle of the PLC. 3.2.1 0: Forward operation bit0 Operation direction 1: Backward operation 0: Input variation alarm is invalid. bit1 1: Input variation alarm is valid. 0: Output variation alarm is invalid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit2 1: Output variation alarm is valid. same time. bit3 Not available Operation 0: Auto-tuning is not executed. Subsection S3 +1 bit4 setting (ACT) 1: Auto-tuning is executed. 3.2.2 0: Upper and lower limits of output value are not valid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at bit5 1: Upper and lower limits of output same time. value are valid. 0: Step response method bit6 Select auto-tuning mode. 1: Limit cycle method bit7 to bit15 Not available When "0" is set, input filter is not Subsection Input filter constant (α) 0 to 99 (%) S3 +2 provided. 3.2.3 Subsection Proportional gain (KP) 1 to 32767 (%) S3 +3 3.2.4 When "0" is set, it is handled as "∞" Subsection Integral time (TI) 0 to 32767 (× 100 ms) S3 +4 (no integration). 3.2.5 When "0" is set, differential gain is Subsection Differential gain (KD) 0 to 100 (%) S3 +5 not provided. 3.2.6 When "0" is set, differential is not Subsection Differential time (TD) 0 to 32767 (× 10 ms) S3 +6 executed. 3.2.7

S3 +7 : These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation. Do not change data. ⎯ S3 +19

M-7 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.1 Parameter List: (S3) to (S3) + 28

Set item Setting Remarks Reference It is valid when operation direction *1 Input variation (incremental) S3 +20 0 to 32767 alarm set value (ACT) (bit 1 of S3 +1) is "1". It is valid when operation direction *1 Input variation (decremental) S3 +21 0 to 32767 alarm set value (ACT) (bit 1 of S3 +1) is "1". It is valid when operation direction Output variation 0 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "1" (incremental) alarm set value or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "0". *1 S3 +22 It is valid when operation direction Subsection Output upper limit set value −32768 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "0" 3.2.2

or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "1" It is valid when operation direction Output variation 0 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "1" (decremental) alarm set value or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "0" *1 S3 +23 It is valid when operation direction

Output lower limit set value −32768 to 32767 (ACT) (bit 2 of S3 +1) is "0"

or (ACT) (bit 5 of S3 +1) is "1" 0: Input variation (incremental) is not exceeded. bit0 1: Input variation (incremental) is exceeded. 0: Input variation (decremental) is not exceeded. bit1 1: Input variation (decremental) is It is valid when operation direction exceeded. *1 Subsection S3 +24 Alarm output (ACT) (bit 1 or bit 2 of S3 +1) is 0: Output variation (incremental) is 3.2.8 "1". not exceeded. bit2 1: Output variation (incremental) is exceeded. 0: Output variation (decremental) is not exceeded. bit3 1: Output variation (decremental) is exceeded. The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used (when the operation direction (ACT) b6 is set to ON). PV value threshold Set it according to measured value S3 +25 (hysteresis) width (SHPV) (PV) fluctuation. Output value upper limit Set maximum value (ULV) of output S3 +26 (ULV) value (MV). They are occupied when operation Output value lower limit Set minimum value (LLV) of output direction (ACT) (bit 6) is "ON (limit Chapter 4 S3 +27 (LLV) value (MV). cycle method)." Wait setting from end of tuning S3 +28 cycle to start of PID control −50 to 32717% (KW)

*1.S3 +20 to +24 become occupied only if bits 1, 2, or 5 are set to "1" to determine the action (ACT) of S3 +1.

M-8 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters K FX 3.2 Details of Parameters -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

3.2.1 Sampling time (TS): (S3) Setting range: 1 to 32767 [ms] L FX Set the cycle time (ms) for the PID operation. -ADP 3U

In PID control and auto-tuning (Limit cycle method) -4AD-TC Set the sampling time longer than the operation cycle of the PLC. In auto-tuning (Step response method) Set the sampling time to 1,000 ms (= 1 second) or more. M

1. Maximum error (FNC 88) Instruction PID The maximum error of the sampling time (TS) is from "-(one operation cycle + 1 ms)" to "+(one operation cycle)." 1) When the sampling time (TS) is a small value Fluctuation of the maximum error described above may cause a problem. In such a case, execute the PID instruction in the constant scan mode, or program it in a timer interrupt routine. 2) When the sampling time (TS) is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC A PID operation error (K6740) occurs, however when PID operation is executed, the sampling time (TS) is equal to the operation cycle of the PLC. In such a case, use the PID instruction in a timer interrupt (I6 to I8), and clear S3 +7 just before executing the PID instruction. → For a detailed description, refer to FX3G/ FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

S 3 +7 is reset. X000 FNC 12 (When the interrupt routine is executed for the I610 K 0 D107 MOVP first time,the register for internal processing is cleared by the pulse generation command.)

FNC 88 D 0 D 1 D100 D150 The PID operation is PID executed.

M-9 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters

3.2.2 Operation setting (ACT):(S3)+1

Setting range: OFF = forward operation, ON = backward operation

1. Forward operation or backward operation: S3 +1, bit 0 Select the PID control direction (forward or backward). During auto-tuning for the limit cycle method It is necessary to set the PID control direction (forward or backward) for auto-tuning. During auto-tuning for the step response method The PID control direction (forward or backward) is not required as, the direction is automatically set when auto-tuning is complete.

Forward operation: S3 +1, bit 0 = 0 As the measured value (PV) becomes larger than the target value (SV), the output (MV) increases. For example, cooling is a forward operation.

Measured value (PV)

Target value (SV) Temperature

Time

Backward operation: S3 +1, bit 0 = 1 As the measured value (PV) becomes smaller than the target value (SV), the output (MV) increases. For example, heating is a backward operation.

Target value (SV)

Measured value (PV) Temperature

Time

Relationship between the forward/backward operation and the output (MV), measured value (PV) and target value (SV) The relationship is as follows.

Target value (SV)

Backward Forward Output (MV) operation operation

Measured value (PV)

M-10 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters K FX 2. Alarm setting (for input variation and output variation): S3 +1, bit 1 and bit 2 -ADP 3U

Setting range: OFF, ON -4AD-PNK The input variation and output variation can be checked arbitrarily. These parameters can be set in S3 +24. → For the operation of upper/lower limit alarm output for the input and output values, refer to Subsection 3.2.8. L FX -ADP

Input variation: S3 +1, bit 1 3U When using the input variation alarm, it is necessary to set to ON the following bits and set the values to be -4AD-TC checked. Set item Setting (setting range) Operation setting ON: Used S3 +1 bit1 Input variation alarm M

(ACT) OFF: Not used (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Input variation S3 +20 Input variation (incremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value S3 +21 Input variation (decremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767

Output variation: S3 +1, bit 2 When using the output variation alarm, it is necessary to set the following bits to ON and set the values to be checked. Set item Setting (setting range) ON: Used bit2 Output variation alarm Operation setting OFF: Not used (ACT) S3 +1 bit5 Output value upper/lower limit setting Make sure to set it to OFF

Output variation S3 +22 Output variation (incremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value S3 +23 Output variation (decremental) alarm set value 0 to 32767

Variation means (Previous value) - (Current value)

3. Upper and lower limits for output value: S3 +1, bit 5 Setting range: OFF = Setting is not provided., ON = Setting is provided. The upper limit and lower limit of the output value work as shown in the graph below. The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can moderate the increase of the integral item in the PID control. When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value, make sure to set S3 +1, bit 2 is set to OFF. Set item Setting (setting range) bit2 Output variation alarm Make sure to set it to OFF Operation setting S3 +1(ACT) ON: Used (ACT) bit5 Output value upper/lower limit setting OFF: Not used

Output value When the upper limit and lower These values limit of output value are not set are not output.

S 3 +22 Output value upper limit

S 3 +23 Output value lower limit These values are not output. When the upper limit and lower limit of output value are set Time

M-11 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters

3.2.3 Input filter (α): (S3)+2

Setting range: 0 to 99[%] PID control: Proportional operation, integral operation and differential operation The input filter (α) is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value (PV) caused by noise. By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level, the effect of noise can be reduced. If the input filter value is too small, the filter effect is small. If the input filter value is too large, the input response is bad.

Because the input filter (α) is effective to the target value (SV), all of the proportional operation, integral operation and differential operation are affected.

Pulse input by noise Actual measured value (PV)

Input amplitude Measured Input amplitude value (PV) processed by input filter processed by input filter

M-12 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters K FX 3.2.4 Proportional gain (KP): (S3)+3 -ADP 3U Setting range: 1 to 32767[%] -4AD-PNK PID control: Proportional operation During the proportional operation, the output (MV) increases in proportion to the deviation (difference between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV)). This deviation is called proportional gain (Kp), and expressed in the following relational expression: L FX -ADP

Output (MV) = Proportional gain (KP) x Deviation (EV) 3U -4AD-TC The reciprocal of the proportional gain (KP) is called proportional band. As the proportional gain (KP) is larger (as shown in the example below), the motion to let the measured value (PV) be nearer to the target value (SV) becomes stronger.

Example 1: Proportional operation (P operation) in heating (backward operation) M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Target value (SV) Measured value (PV) KP3 Remaining deviation Proportional gain KP2 KP3 > KP2 > KP1

Temperature KP1

Time

Proportional gain KP3 > KP2 > KP1 KP3 KP2 KP1 Output (MV)

Time

Example 2: Proportional operation (P operation) in cooling (forward operation)

Proportional gain KP3 > KP2 > KP1 KP3 KP2 KP1 Measured value (PV) Temperature Target value (SV) Remaining deviation Time

Proportional gain KP3 > KP2 > KP1 KP3 KP2 KP1 Output (MV)

Time

3.2.5 Integral time (TI): (S3)+4

Setting range: 0 to 32767 [ × 100 ms] "0" is handled as "∞" (no integration). PID operation: Integral operation During the integral operation, the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes the proportional operation output. This is called integral time and is expressed as "TI". As TI becomes smaller, the integral operation becomes stronger.

M-13 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters

Example 1: PI operation in heating (backward operation)

TI3 Measured value in PI operation Target Measured value in proportional operation TI2 TI1 value (SV) Integral time (TI) 0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1 Temperature

Time

Integral time (TI) TI3 0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1 Output in PI operation

TI2 TI1 Output (MV) Output in proportional operation

Time

Example 2: Proportional operation (P operation) in cooling (forward operation)

Integral time (TI) 0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1 TI3 TI2 Target TI1 Measured value in proportional operation value(SV) Measured value in PI operation Temperature

Time

Integral time (TI) 0 < TI3 < TI2 < TI1 TI3 Output in PI operation TI2 TI1 Output (MV) Output in proportional operation

Time

Important point The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated. As a result, the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated.

Deviation(EV) Deviation

Time

Output of "proportional operation + integral operation"

Output of integral operation

Output of proportional operation Output

Proportional gain (KP) × Deviation (E)

Time

Integral time (TI)

M-14 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters K FX 3.2.6 Differential gain (KD): (S3)+5 -ADP 3U Setting range: 0 to 100[%] -4AD-PNK PID control: Differential operation The filter is applied to the output at the differential operation. Only the differential operation is affected by the differential gain (KD). L FX When the differential gain (KD) is small, the output is immediately given with regard to changes in the -ADP

measured value (PV) caused by disturbance, etc. 3U -4AD-TC When the differential gain (KD) is large, the output is given after a long time with respect to changes in the measured value (PV) caused by disturbance, etc.

Important points Set the differential gain (KD) to "0", and then adjust the operation using the input filter (α). M (FNC 88) Instruction PID If the output response is too close to the disturbance, increase the differential gain (KD).

3.2.7 Differential time (TD): (S3)+6

Setting range: 0 to 32767 [× 10 ms] PID control: Differential operation Use the differential time (TD) to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value (PV) caused by disturbance, etc. and to minimize the fluctuations. When the differential time (TD) is large, it becomes to prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused by disturbance, etc. • It is not always necessary to use the differential time (when disturbance is small, for example).

TD3 (PID operation)

Disturbance Deviation TD1 (PID operation) Deviation (EV) TD2 (PID operation) Time

TD3 (PID operation)

TD3 > TD2 > TD1 TD2 (PID operation)

Output (MV) TD1 (PID operation)

Time

M-15 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters

Example 1: PID operation in heating (backward operation) Changes caused by disturbance TD3 (PID operation) Target value (SV)

PI operation (without differential operation) TD2 (PID operation) Temperature TD1 (PID operation)

TD3 > TD2 > TD1

Time

Changes in output caused by disturbance

Output (MV) TD3 (PID operation) TD3 > TD2 > TD1 TD1 (PID operation)

TD2 (PID operation)

PI operation (without differential operation)

Time

Example 2: PID operation in cooling (forward operation)

TD3 > TD2 > TD1

PI operation (without differential operation)

Changes caused by disturbance Temperature TD1 (PID operation)

TD2 (PID operation)

Target value (SV) TD3 (PID operation)

Time

TD3 > TD2 > TD1

Changes in output caused by disturbance Output (MV) TD2 (PI operation)

TD1 (PID operation)

PI operation (without differential operation)

TD3 (PID operation)

Time

M-16 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction (FNC 88) 3.2 Details of Parameters K FX 3.2.8 Alarm output flag: (S3)+24 -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

When the input variation [S3 +1, bit 1] is set to 1

Variation L FX -ADP 3U -4AD-TC

Measured value (PV) M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

Time Sampling time (TS) Alarm flag ON S3 +24 bit0 ON S3 +24 bit1

When the output variation [S3 +1, bit 2] is set to 1

Variation Output (MV)

Variation

Time Sampling time (TS) Alarm flag ON S3 +24 bit2 ON S3 +24 bit3 - When the preset input/output variation is exceeded: Each bit of S3 +24 (alarm flags) turns ON immediately after PID instruction execution.

M-17 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.1 Limit Cycle Method

4. Auto-Tuning

This chapter describes the auto-tuning function of PID instruction. The auto-tuning function will automatically set the important constants, such as the proportional gain and the integral time, to ensure optimum PID control. There are two auto-tuning methods: limit cycle method and step response method.

4.1 Limit Cycle Method

4.1.1 Parameters set in auto-tuning (of limit cycle method)

Parameter Setting position

Proportional gain (KP) S3 +3

Integral time (TI) S3 +4

Differential time (TD) S3 +6

M-18 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.1 Limit Cycle Method K FX 4.1.2 Auto-tuning procedure -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK 1 Set the forward or backward operation Set the operation direction flag (bit 0) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1. L FX -ADP

2 Select the auto-tuning method (limit cycle method) 3U -4AD-TC

Set the auto-tuning method to ON (bit 6) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1. (When bit 6 is set to OFF, the step response method is selected.)

3 Set the auto-tuning execution flag to ON M (FNC 88) Instruction PID Set the auto-tuning execution flag to ON (bit 4) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.

4 Set the input filter Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +2.

5 Set the sampling time Set the sampling time S3 .

6 Set the Upper Limit Value (ULV) Set the Upper Limit Value (ULV) of the output value (MV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +26.

7 Set the Lower Limit Value (LLV) Set the Lower Limit Value (LLV) of the output value (MV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +27.

8 Set the threshold (hysteresis) (SHPV)

Set the threshold (hysteresis) width (SHPV) in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +25.

9 Set the target value (SV)

Set the target value (SV) to S1 in PID instruction.

10 Set the ON PID instruction command input to start auto-tuning Auto-tuning is executed according to the measured value (PV). ↓ When auto-tuning is completed, the auto-tuning flag (bit 4 and bit 6) turns OFF in the operation setting parameter (ACT) S3 +1.

M-19 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.1 Limit Cycle Method

4.1.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (limit cycle method)

For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control, it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant (parameter) suitable to the control target. This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude (a) and vibration cycle (τ, τon) of the input value, and then calculate the proportional gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD) based on the expressions shown in the table below.

What is the limit cycle method Changes in the input value in two-position control (in which the output Upper Limit Value (ULV) and output Lower Limit Value (LLV) are switched according to the deviation) are measured, and then three constants in the PID control are obtained.

Operation characteristics (in an example of backward operation) During the "τw" period after the tuning cycle is finished, the output value is held at the output Lower Limit Value (LLV), and then normal PID control is started. The value "τw" can be obtained by the expression "τw = (50 + Kw)/100 × (τ-τon)", and the wait setting parameter "Kw" can be set in the parameter S3 +28. (Setting range: Kw = −50 to +32717[%]) (When the abnormal range is specified, "τw" is handled as "0")

Output value

ULV (Output upper limit value)

LLV τon 50 × τ on 1 - (Output lower τ limit value) Time

Input value

SV+SHPV SV(target value) a SV-SHPV τ

τ on τw

τ 0 τ 1 τ 2 Time(s)

SHPV: PV input threshold (hysteresis)

Operation characteristics and three constants

Control type Proportional gain (KP) [%] Integral time (TI) [×100ms] Differential time (TD) [×10ms] Only proportional 1 ()ULV - LLV ×100 ⎯⎯ control (P operation) a

PI control 0.9 τon ()ULV - LLV ×100 33 × τ on 1 - ⎯ (PI operation) a τ

PID control 1.2 τon τon ()ULV - LLV ×100 20 ×τ on 1 - 50 × τ on 1 - (PID operation) a τ τ

M-20 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.2 Step Response Method K FX 4.2 Step Response Method -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK

4.2.1 Parameters to be set by auto-tuning (step response method) Parameter Setting position Parameter Setting position L FX Operation setting (ACT) S3 +1, bit 0 (operation direction) Integral time (TI) S3 +4 -ADP 3U

Proportional gain (KP) S3 +3 Differential time (TD) S3 +6 -4AD-TC

4.2.2 Auto-tuning procedure M 1 Transferring the output value for auto-tuning to the output value D (FNC 88) Instruction PID Set the output value for auto-tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0.5 to 1 for the output equipment.

2 Setting the parameter S3 , target value (SV), etc. that cannot be set in auto- tuning according to the system Note that auto-tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not fol- lowed 1. Set items Set item and parameter Remarks The difference from the measured value (PV) should be 150 or more. Target value (SV) S1 (For the details, refer to "2. Cautions on setting" below.)

Sampling time (TS)S3 1,000 ms or more (For the details, refer to "2. Cautions on setting" below.)

Input filter (α) S3 +2

Differential gain (KD) S3 +5 When setting the input filter, set the differential gain to "0" usually. Others Set other items, as necessary.

2. Cautions on setting 1) Difference between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV) If the difference between the target value (SV) and the measured value (PV) is less than 150 when auto- tuning is started, auto-tuning is not executed normally. Accordingly, if the difference is less than 150, set the target value for auto-tuning. Set the target value again when auto-tuning is completed. Set item Setting in PID instruction Make sure that the difference from the measured value is 150 or Target value (SV) S1 more when auto-tuning is started.

2) Sampling time (TS) S3 Make sure the sampling time is set for auto-tuning to 1 second (1000 ms) or more. It is recommended that the sampling time is set to that it is considerably longer than the output change cycle.

3 Setting to ON bit 4 of S3 +1 (operation setting ACT) to start auto-tuning When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto-tuning to the target value reaches 1/3 or more, auto-tuning is completed. And bit 4 of S3 +1 (operation setting ACT) is automatically set to OFF. 1. Important point Start auto-tuning while the system is stable. If the system is unstable when auto-tuning is started, auto-tuning may not be executed normally.

M-21 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 4 Auto-Tuning PID Instruction (FNC 88) 4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution

4.2.3 Reference: How to obtain three constants in PID control (step response method)

For acquiring satisfactory control results during PID control, it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant (parameter) suitable for the control target. This paragraph explains the step response method to obtain three constants in the PID control (proportional gain (KP), integral time (TI) and differential time (TD)).

What is the step response method In this method, by giving stepped output from 0 to 100%*1 to the control system, three constants in the PID control are obtained from the operation characteristics (maximum ramp (R) and dead time (L)) and the input value variation. *1. The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75% or from 0 to 50%.

Operation characteristics

100% Output value Output value (MV) 0% Time

Input value variation Maximum ramp (R)

Time (s) Dead time (L) 1 (s) [s]

Operation characteristics and three constants

Control type Proportional gain (KP) [%] Integral time (TI) [×100ms] Differential time (TD) [×10ms] Only proportional 1 × Output value ×100 ⎯⎯ control (P operation) RL (MV)

PI control 0.9 × Output value ×100 33 L ⎯ (PI operation) RL (MV)

PID control 1.2 × Output value×100 20 L 50 L (PID operation) RL (MV)

4.3 Cautions on Auto-Tuning Execution

1. Countermeasures with in the program when the input value (PV) does not change When the input value (PV) does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input line, auto-tuning is not finished. Detect and avoid such occurrences by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time from the start of auto-tuning.

M-22 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.1 Example: System and operation K FX -ADP 3U 5. Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) -4AD-PNK

The following is an example of a program for the operation application system shown below. L FX -ADP

5.1 Example: System and operation 3U -4AD-TC

System configuration Temperature sensor Shielded compensating (Thermocouple) conductor M (FNC 88) Instruction PID

X10 X11 ch2 FX3U-32MR/ FX2N-16EYT- FX2N-4AD- ES ESS/UL*1 TC COM Y20 Y21 Temperature Error indication chamber

Electric heater X010: Auto-tuning command *1: Since turning on/off is frequently carried out, be sure to use the X011: PID control command transistor outputs. Setting contents During auto- During PID Item tuning control

Target value S1 500 (+50°C) 500 (+50°C)

Sampling time (TS) S3 3000 ms 500 ms

Input filter (α)+S3 270% 70%

Differential gain (KD)+S3 50% 0% 2000 2000 Output value upper limit S3 +22 (2 seconds)

Output value lower limit S3 +23 00 Parameters Input variation alarm bit 1 of S3 +1 Not provided Not provided Operation direction Not provided Not provided (ACT) Output variation alarm bit 2 of S3 +1 Output value upper/lower limit setting bit 5 of S3 +1 Provided Provided According to 1800 Output value D operation

1. Operation of the electric heater 1) During PID control D502 × 1 ms

OFF ON ON ON ON ON

2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms)

2) During auto-tuning: When the output is 90% of the maximum output

1.8 sec (1800 ms) 1.8 sec (1800 ms) 1.8 sec (1800 ms)

2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms) 2 sec (2000 ms)

M-23 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control

5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control

Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 K500 D500 The target value is set (to 50°C). MOV

FNC 12 K 70 D512 The input filter constant (α) is set MOV (to 70%).

FNC 12 K 0 D515 The differential gain (KD) is set MOV (to 0%).

FNC 12 K2000 D532 The output value upper limit is set MOV (to ON for 2 sec).

FNC 12 K 0 D533 The output value lower limit is set MOV (to ON for 0 sec). PID control is started after auto-tuning X010 PLS M0 The auto-tuning setting is started. PID control is started (without auto-tuning) Auto-tuning setting flag X011 M0 SET M1 Auto-tuning ON flag

The sampling time (Ts) for auto- FNC 12 K3000 D510 MOV tuning is set (to 3 sec). Operation setting (ACT) FNC 12 H0031 D511 MOV Auto-tuning is started. The output value for auto-tuning is FNC 12 K1800 D502 Auto-tuning ON flag MOV set (to ON for 1.8 sec). M1 The sampling time (Ts) for normal FNC 12 K500 D510 MOVP operation is set (to 500 ms). Initial pulse M8002 The mode of FX2N-4AD-TC is set. FNC 79 K 0 K 0 H3303 K 1 Ch 1: Unused Ch 3: Unused TO Ch 2: K type Ch 4: Unused RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78 K 0 K 10 D501 K 1 Data is read from the channel 2 in FROM FX2N-4AD-TC. Initial pulse M8002 RST D502 The PID operation is initialized. PID control is started after PID control is started auto-tuning (without auto-tuning) X010 X011

PID control is started (without auto-tuning) X11 FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction is driven. PID control is PID started after auto-tuning X10 M3 The PID operation is executed.

M-24 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.2 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) and PID control K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK Auto-tuning ON flag M1 Auto-tuning operation is FNC 12 D511 K2M10 MOV confirmed. Auto-tuning ON flag L FX M14 -ADP 3U

PLF M2 Auto-tuning is finished. -4AD-TC

Auto-tuning is finished M2 RST M1 The normal operation is started. M PID operation is executed. (FNC 88) Instruction PID M3 T246 Heater operation cycle K2000 Heater operation cycle T246 [ RST T246 ] Preset PID operation is executed. M3

T246 < D502 PID operation is executed. M3 FNC226 T246 D502 Y021 Heater output LD <

Error flag M8067 Y020 Error occurs.

END

M-25 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)

5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method)

Auto-tuning is started. X010 FNC 12 K500 D500 The target value is set (to 50°C). MOVP

The output value for auto-tuning is FNC 12 K1800 D502 MOV set (to ON for 1.8 sec).

The sampling time (Ts) is set FNC 12 K3000 D510 MOVP (to 3 sec).

FNC 12 H0031 D511 Operation setting (ACT) MOVP Auto-tuning is started.

FNC 12 K 70 D512 The input filter constant (α) is set MOVP (to 70%).

The differential gain (KD) is set FNC 12 K 0 D515 MOVP (to 0%).

FNC 12 K2000 D532 The output value upper limit is set MOVP (to ON for 2 sec).

FNC 12 K 0 D533 The output value lower limit is set MOVP (to ON for 0 sec).

PLS M0 Auto-tuning is started.

Auto-tuning is started. M0 SET M1 PID instruction operation

Initial pulse M8002 The mode of FX2N-4AD-TC is set. FNC 79 K 0 K 0 H3303 K 1 Ch 1: Unused Ch 3: Unused TO Ch 2: K type Ch 4: Unused RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78 K 0 K 10 D501 K 1 Data is read from the channel 2 FROM in FX2N-4AD-TC. Auto-tuning is started. X010 RST D502 The PID output is initialized. PID operation M1

PID operation M1 FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction PID

Auto-tuning operation is FNC 12 D511 K2M10 MOV confirmed. Auto-tuning ON flag M14 PLF M2 Auto-tuning is finished.

Auto-tuning is finished. M2 RST M1 Auto-tuning is completed.

M-26 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs (for Step Response Method) PID Instruction (FNC 88) 5.3 Program example of auto-tuning (step response method) K FX -ADP 3U -4AD-PNK PID operation M1 Heater operation cycle timer T246 K2000 (2 sec) L FX T246 -ADP

The heater operation cycle timer 3U RST T246 is preset. -4AD-TC PID operation M1

PID operation M

M1 (FNC 88) Instruction PID FNC226 T246 D502 Y021 Heater output LD <

Error flag M8067 Y020 Error occurs.

END

M-27 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction (FNC 88) 6.1 Error Codes

6. Troubleshooting

6.1 Error Codes

When an error occurs in the set value of a control parameter or the data acquired during the PID operation, the operation error flag M8067 turns ON, and a corresponding error code is stored in D8067.

Error Error description Action code 6730 Incorrect sampling time (TS) (TS ≤ 0) Incorrect input filter constant (α) 6732 (α < 0 or 100 ≤ α) 6733 Incorrect proportional gain (KP) (KP < 0) A data error has occurred in the set value in a control parameter 6734 Incorrect integral time (TI) (TI < 0) or in the middle of PID operation. Check the parameters. Incorrect derivative gain (KD) 6735 (KD < 0 or 201 ≤ KD) 6736 Incorrect derivative time (TD) (TD < 0) 6740 Sampling time (TS) ≤ Operation cycle The operation is continued in the condition "sampling time (TS) = cyclic time (operation cycle)." Variation of measured value exceeds limit. 6742 (UPV < −32768 or +32767 < UPV) Deviation exceeds limit. 6743 (EV < −32768 or +32767 < EV) Integral result exceeds limit. 6744 (Out of range from −32768 to +32767) The operation is continued with each parameter set to the Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain 6745 maximum or minimum value. (KD). Derivative result exceeds limit. 6746 (Out of range from −32768 to +32767) PID operation result exceeds limit. 6747 (Out of range from −32768 to +32767) set value Check whether the target settings are correct. Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output 6749 variation alarm set value (Set value < 0) Check whether the target settings are correct. The deviation at start of auto-tuning is 150 or less. The deviation at end of auto-tuning is 1/3 or more of the 6750 Improper auto-tuning result deviation at start of auto-tuning. Confirm the measured value and target value, and then execute auto-tuning again. The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the start of auto-tuning was different from the actual operation 6751 Auto-tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto-tuning. Correct the relationship among the target value, output value for auto-tuning and measured value, and then execute auto- tuning again.

M-28 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction (FNC 88) 6.1 Error Codes K FX Error -ADP Error description Action code 3U -4AD-PNK Because the set value fluctuated during auto-tuning, auto- tuning was not executed correctly. 6752 Improper auto-tuning operation Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle, or set a larger value to the input filter constant. L FX After changing the setting, execute auto-tuning again. -ADP 3U

-4AD-TC 6753 Abnormal output set value for auto-tuning [ULV (upper limit) ≤ LLV (lower limit)] Check whether the target settings are correct. 6754 Abnormal PV threshold (hysteresis) set value for auto- tuning (SHPV < 0) M (FNC 88) Instruction PID 6755 (Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Verify that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten.) overwritten in the program. The auto-tuning time is too long. Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit and 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto-tuning the lower limit of the output value for auto-tuning, set a smaller measurement time (τon > τ, τon < 0, τ < 0) value to the input filter constant (α), or set a smaller value to the PV threshold (SHPV) for auto-tuning, and then check whether the result is improved. The variation of the measured value (PV) is small compared 6757 Auto-tuning result exceeds proportional gain. (KP = Out with the output value. Multiply the measured value (PV) by "10" of range from 0 to 32767) so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto-tuning. (TI = Out of range from 0 to 32767) The auto-tuning time is too long. Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the upper limit and the lower limit of the output value for auto-tuning, set a smaller 6759 Auto-tuning result exceeds derivative time. value to the input filter constant (α), or set a smaller value to the (TD = Out of range from 0 to 32767) PV threshold (SHPV) for auto-tuning, and then check whether the result is improved.

Caution With regard to the measured value (PV) in PID, normal measurement data should be read before PID operation begins. Especially when the PID operation is executed to the input value in an analog input block, pay attention to the conversion time.

M-29 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction (FNC 88) 6.1 Error Codes

MEMO

M-30 FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Warranty

Warranty

Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be production the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the 1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be seven (7) years after production of the product is repaired at no cost via the sales representative or discontinued. Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are Discontinuation of production shall be notified with required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any 2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that after production is discontinued. involves replacement of the failed module. 3. Overseas service [Gratis Warranty Term] Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one each FA Center may differ. year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from 4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) loss from warranty liability months, and the longest gratis warranty term after Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis be liable for compensation of damages caused by any warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss warranty term before repairs. in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third [Gratis Warranty Range] person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or 1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for usage state, usage methods and usage environment, damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site given in the instruction manual, user's manual and equipment, start-up test run and other tasks. caution labels on the product. 5. Changes in product specifications 2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or charged for in the following cases. technical documents are subject to change without prior a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or notice. handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software 6. Product application design. 1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., controller, the usage conditions shall be that the to the product by the user. application will not lead to a major accident even if any c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a problem or fault should occur in the programmable user's device, Failure that could have been logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe avoided if functions or structures, judged as functions are systematically provided outside of the necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device for any problem or fault. device is subject to or as necessary by industry 2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has standards, had been provided. been designed and manufactured for applications in d) Failure that could have been avoided if general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) public could be affected such as in nuclear power designated in the instruction manual had been plants and other power plants operated by respective correctly serviced or replaced. power companies, and applications in which a special e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by quality assurance system is required, such as for usage beyond the specified Life of contact Railway companies or Public service purposes shall (cycles). be excluded from the programmable logic controller f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such applications. as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused In addition, applications in which human life or by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, property that could be greatly affected, such as in wind and water damage. aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by devices, manned transportation, equipment for scientific technology standards at time of recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall shipment from Mitsubishi. also be excluded from the programmable logic h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility controller range of applications. of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the However, in certain cases, some applications may be user. possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.

i FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC PLC User's Manual - Analog Control Edition Revised History

Revised History

Date Revision Description 7/2005 A First Edition

2/2006 B FX3U-4AD is added to B. FX3U-4DA is inserted to D. Adding and revising the other descriptions.

3/2006 C B-8 page, 2.2 The Power Supply Specification for the FX3U-4AD, regarding the A/D conversion circuit drive power: Revised from [24V DC ±10%, 80mA] to [24VDC ±10%, 90mA] 3/2007 D JIS (Japanese Industrial Standards) for temperature sensors are added Clerical error correction

12/2007 E FX3UC (D, DSS) Series PLC added FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP is inserted to G Clerical error correction

11/2008 F FX3G Series PLC added FX3G-2AD-BD is added to D. FX3G-1DA-BD is added to G. FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP is added to H. Adding and revising the other descriptions.

6/2009 G FX3U-3A-ADP is added to H. The hardware error function of FX3U-4DA-ADP is added. Explanation corrections for manufacture's serial number. Adding and revising the other descriptions.

8/2010 H Supports the under-scale detection function of the FX3U-4AD-ADP and FX3U-3A-ADP. FX3U-4LC is added. Explanation corrections for the manufacture's serial number. Addition and revision of other descriptions. Clerical error correction

2/2012 J FX3GC Series PLC added. Addition and revision of other descriptions. Clerical error correction.

FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

USER'S MANUAL

Analog Control Edition

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN

MODEL FX3U-U-ANALOG-E MODEL CODE 09R619

JY997D16701J Effective Feb. 2012 (MEE) Specifications are subject to change without notice.